EPO Online Filing 5.09 - European Patent Office

EPO Online Filing 5.09 - European Patent Office
EPO Online Filing
User guide
OLF software version 5.09
Copyright© European Patent Office
All rights reserved
Last update: 29/06/2016
Document version: OLF5-09_UserGuide_EN_160629.docx
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Legal notices
9
2
Introduction
10
3
4
2.1
Help and Support............................................................................................... 10
2.2
Typographical conventions ................................................................................ 11
Overview of Online Filing
12
3.1
Network-based online filing ................................................................................ 14
3.2
National procedures in Online Filing .................................................................. 16
3.3
Updating the Online Filing software ................................................................... 17
3.4
Help on using Online Filing ................................................................................ 18
File Manager
20
4.1
Toolbars ............................................................................................................ 22
4.2
Folders .............................................................................................................. 24
4.3
Applications ....................................................................................................... 26
4.3.1
Creating a new application ................................................................. 27
4.3.2
Saving applications ............................................................................ 28
4.3.3
Renaming applications ....................................................................... 29
4.3.4
Moving applications ............................................................................ 30
4.3.5
Deleting applications .......................................................................... 30
4.3.6
Previewing applications ...................................................................... 31
4.4
Templates.......................................................................................................... 33
4.4.1
Creating a new template .................................................................... 33
4.4.2
Using a template ................................................................................ 36
4.4.3
Modifying a template .......................................................................... 37
4.5
Workflow and status .......................................................................................... 38
4.5.1
Changing the status of an application in File Manager ....................... 39
4.5.2
Changing the status of an application in the form ............................... 41
4.6
Validation ........................................................................................................... 41
4.7
Internal Notes .................................................................................................... 43
4.8
Address Book .................................................................................................... 45
4.8.1
Creating names in the Address Book ................................................. 47
4.8.2
Routes and roles ................................................................................ 48
4.8.3
Adding names from the Address Book to a form ................................ 49
4.8.4
Saving names from a form to the Address Book................................. 51
4.8.5
Exporting Address Book names ......................................................... 53
4.8.6
Importing Address Book names ......................................................... 54
4.9
User Preferences ............................................................................................... 57
4.9.1
Startup ............................................................................................... 57
Page 2 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.9.5
4.9.6
5
Table of contents
Language ........................................................................................... 57
Signing preferences ........................................................................... 58
Confirmations ..................................................................................... 58
Working directories ............................................................................ 60
Network settings................................................................................. 60
4.10
System Preferences .......................................................................................... 61
4.10.1
Security and user management .......................................................... 62
4.10.2
Password policy ................................................................................. 63
4.10.3
Signing settings .................................................................................. 65
4.10.4
Runtime variables .............................................................................. 66
4.10.5
PMS gateway interface ...................................................................... 67
4.10.6
Filing settings ..................................................................................... 69
4.11
User Administration ........................................................................................... 70
4.11.1
Users ................................................................................................. 72
4.11.2
Unblocking users................................................................................ 73
4.11.3
Changing your password .................................................................... 75
4.11.4
Groups ............................................................................................... 76
4.11.5
Profiles for group authorisations ......................................................... 78
4.11.6
List of privileges ................................................................................. 80
4.11.7
Mapping profiles to groups ................................................................. 83
4.11.8
Sharing folders with groups ................................................................ 83
4.12
Fee management .............................................................................................. 86
4.13
Maintenance table viewer .................................................................................. 88
Processing applications
90
5.1
Preparing documents for attachment ................................................................. 90
5.2
Signing applications ........................................................................................... 92
5.2.1
Alphabetical signatures ...................................................................... 95
5.2.2
Facsimile signatures........................................................................... 97
5.2.3
Smart cards ........................................................................................ 99
5.2.4
Checking the smart card .................................................................. 102
5.2.5
Soft certificates................................................................................. 103
5.2.6
Non-repudiation signature ................................................................ 105
5.3
Sending applications........................................................................................ 106
5.3.1
Viewing receipts ............................................................................... 107
5.3.2
Batch sending .................................................................................. 108
5.4
Exporting data from Online Filing ..................................................................... 109
5.4.1
Exporting items ................................................................................ 110
5.4.2
Deleting items from the database after archiving .............................. 112
5.4.3
Exporting data as XML to ZIP file ..................................................... 113
5.4.4
Exporting data as XML to folder ....................................................... 114
Page 3 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5.5
6
7
Table of contents
Importing data into Online Filing ...................................................................... 115
5.5.1
Importing data as XML from ZIP file ................................................. 116
5.5.2
Importing data as XML from folder ................................................... 117
EP(1001E2K)
118
6.1
EP(1001E2K) Request .................................................................................... 120
6.1.1
Request details ................................................................................ 120
6.1.2
Divisional application ........................................................................ 123
6.1.3
Reference ........................................................................................ 124
6.2
EP(1001E2K) Names ...................................................................................... 128
6.2.1
Applicants ........................................................................................ 129
6.2.2
Representatives ............................................................................... 134
6.2.3
Inventors .......................................................................................... 135
6.3
EP(1001E2K) States........................................................................................ 140
6.3.1
Designating contracting states ......................................................... 141
6.3.2
Extension states ............................................................................... 143
6.3.3
Validation states ............................................................................... 143
6.4
EP(1001E2K) Priority....................................................................................... 144
6.5
EP(1001E2K) Biological Material ..................................................................... 146
6.6
EP(1001E2K) Documents ................................................................................ 147
6.6.1
Attaching PDF files ........................................................................... 149
6.6.2
Attaching XML and PatXML files ...................................................... 153
6.6.3
Technical documents in other languages ......................................... 154
6.6.4
Pre-conversion archive ..................................................................... 158
6.6.5
Sequence listings ............................................................................. 159
6.6.6
Additional documents ....................................................................... 162
6.6.7
Viewing attached documents............................................................ 164
6.7
EP(1001E2K) Fee Payment............................................................................. 165
6.7.1
Payment details................................................................................ 166
6.7.2
Fee selection .................................................................................... 168
6.8
EP(1001E2K) Annotations ............................................................................... 172
Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
173
7.1
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) EP Phase ....................................................................... 175
7.1.1
Entry into the European phase ......................................................... 175
7.1.2
Past Record ..................................................................................... 177
7.2
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Names ........................................................................... 178
7.3
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) States............................................................................. 183
7.4
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Biological Material .......................................................... 185
7.5
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Documents ..................................................................... 186
7.5.1
Amendments and translations .......................................................... 187
Page 4 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
8
9
Table of contents
Document Overview ......................................................................... 189
Sequence listings ............................................................................. 194
Additional documents ....................................................................... 197
Pre-conversion archive ..................................................................... 200
Previewing attached documents ....................................................... 201
7.6
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Fee Payment.................................................................. 203
7.6.1
Payment details................................................................................ 204
7.6.2
Fee selection .................................................................................... 206
7.7
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Annotations .................................................................... 209
7.8
Reusing previous data for filing with Euro-PCT(1200E2K) ............................... 210
EP(1038E)
211
8.1
EP(1038E) Application Number ....................................................................... 213
8.2
EP(1038E) Names ........................................................................................... 213
8.3
EP(1038E) Documents .................................................................................... 215
8.3.1
Document types for EP(1038E) by category ..................................... 215
8.3.2
Attaching documents ........................................................................ 222
8.3.3
Filing non-public documents ............................................................. 224
8.3.4
Filing appeal documents .................................................................. 225
8.3.5
Viewing attached documents............................................................ 226
8.4
EP(1038E) Fee Payment ................................................................................. 227
8.4.1
Payment details................................................................................ 227
8.4.2
Fee selection .................................................................................... 230
8.4.3
Designation of states ........................................................................ 234
8.5
EP(1038E) Annotations ................................................................................... 236
8.6
Reusing previous data for filing with EP(1038E) .............................................. 237
EP(Oppo)
239
9.1
EP(Oppo) Opposition....................................................................................... 242
9.1.1
Reference ........................................................................................ 243
9.1.2
Grounds ........................................................................................... 244
9.2
EP(Oppo) Names ............................................................................................ 245
9.2.1
Persons in conjunction with "Notice of opposition or intervention" .... 245
9.2.2
Persons in conjunction with "Other action" ....................................... 249
9.3
EP(Oppo) Requests......................................................................................... 251
9.4
EP(Oppo) Documents...................................................................................... 255
9.4.1
Document types for EP(OPPO) as defined by functional role ........... 256
9.4.2
Attaching documents ........................................................................ 258
9.4.3
Filing non-public documents ............................................................. 260
9.4.4
Evidence - publications .................................................................... 261
9.4.5
Evidence - other ............................................................................... 263
Page 5 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Table of contents
9.5
EP(Oppo) Fee Payment .................................................................................. 264
9.6
EP(Oppo) Annotations ..................................................................................... 267
9.7
Previewing the completed form ........................................................................ 268
10 PCT/RO/101
272
10.1
Creating a new PCT/RO/101 application ......................................................... 274
10.1.1
Saving the form ................................................................................ 276
10.1.2
Working with templates .................................................................... 277
10.2
PCT/RO/101 Request ...................................................................................... 279
10.3
PCT/RO/101 States ......................................................................................... 282
10.4
PCT/RO/101 Names ........................................................................................ 285
10.4.1
Applicant .......................................................................................... 286
10.4.2
Inventor ............................................................................................ 290
10.4.3
Agent ............................................................................................... 292
10.4.4
Power of attorney document............................................................. 295
10.4.5
Adding names from the Address Book to a form and vice versa ....... 299
10.5
PCT/RO/101 Priority ........................................................................................ 301
10.6
PCT/RO/101 Biology ....................................................................................... 304
10.7
PCT/RO/101 Declarations ............................................................................... 306
10.7.1
Declaration as to the identity of the inventor ..................................... 307
10.7.2
Declaration as to applicant's entitlement to apply for and be
granted a patent ............................................................................... 308
10.7.3
Declaration as to applicant's entitlement to claim priority .................. 309
10.7.4
Declaration of inventorship ............................................................... 310
10.7.5
Declaration as to non-prejudicial disclosures or exceptions to lack
of novelty.......................................................................................... 312
10.7.6
Previewing declaration sheets .......................................................... 313
10.8
PCT/RO/101 Contents ..................................................................................... 315
10.8.1
International Application ................................................................... 317
10.8.2
PDF attachments ............................................................................. 319
10.8.3
Single specification file (PDF) ........................................................... 321
10.8.4
XML attachments ............................................................................. 324
10.8.5
Accompanying Items ........................................................................ 326
10.8.6
Sequence listing ............................................................................... 329
10.8.7
Pre-conversion archive ..................................................................... 332
10.9
PCT/RO/101 Fees ........................................................................................... 333
10.10 PCT/RO/101 Payment ..................................................................................... 335
10.10.1 Signing the deposit account authorisation ........................................ 338
10.11 PCT/RO/101 Annotate ..................................................................................... 338
10.11.1 Designating inventor for certain states only ...................................... 342
Page 6 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Table of contents
10.12 Processing the PCT/RO/101 application .......................................................... 343
10.12.1 Signing the form ............................................................................... 344
10.12.2 Sending the form .............................................................................. 346
10.12.3 Exporting and importing a form ........................................................ 347
11 PCT-SFD
349
11.1
PCT-SFD – Application .................................................................................... 351
11.1.1
Filing office and capacity in which it is acting .................................... 351
11.1.2
Past record....................................................................................... 352
11.2
PCT-SFD – Names .......................................................................................... 353
11.3
PCT-SFD – Documents ................................................................................... 353
11.3.1
Documents filed with the Receiving Office (RO) ............................... 353
11.3.2
Documents filed with the International Searching Authority (ISA) ..... 357
11.3.3
Documents filed with the International Preliminary Examining
Authority (IPEA) ............................................................................... 359
11.3.4
Documents filed with the Supplementary International Searching
Authority (SISA) ............................................................................... 362
11.3.5
Attaching PDF documents ................................................................ 363
11.3.6
Attaching sequence listings .............................................................. 365
11.3.7
Viewing attached documents............................................................ 367
11.4
PCT-SFD – Fee Payment ................................................................................ 368
11.4.1
Fee selection .................................................................................... 369
11.4.2
Payment details................................................................................ 371
11.5
PCT-SFD – Annotations .................................................................................. 373
11.6
Signing an application with Form PCT-SFD ..................................................... 374
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
376
12.1
PCT-DEMAND – Demand ............................................................................... 377
12.2
PCT-DEMAND – Names.................................................................................. 379
12.2.1
Applicant .......................................................................................... 379
12.2.2
Agent ............................................................................................... 381
12.2.3
Address for correspondence ............................................................ 382
12.3
PCT-DEMAND – Examination Basis ................................................................ 383
12.4
PCT-DEMAND – Documents ........................................................................... 385
12.4.1
Examination documents ................................................................... 386
12.4.2
Accompanying items ........................................................................ 388
12.4.3
Attaching sequence listings .............................................................. 389
12.4.4
Pre-conversion archive ..................................................................... 391
12.4.5
Viewing attached documents............................................................ 391
12.5
PCT-DEMAND – Fee Payment ........................................................................ 392
12.5.1
Fee selection .................................................................................... 393
12.5.2
Payment details................................................................................ 393
Page 7 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12.5.3
12.6
Table of contents
Viewing the fee sheet ....................................................................... 395
PCT-DEMAND – Annotations .......................................................................... 396
13 Server Manager
398
13.1
Server Manager overview ................................................................................ 399
13.2
Services management ..................................................................................... 400
13.3
Database management (Backup) .................................................................... 403
13.3.1
Backing up database ........................................................................ 404
13.3.2
Restoring database .......................................................................... 407
13.3.3
Creating a new empty database ....................................................... 408
13.4
Exporting items ................................................................................................ 408
13.5
Importing items ................................................................................................ 411
13.6
User sessions .................................................................................................. 412
13.7
Unlocking forms ............................................................................................... 413
13.8
History ............................................................................................................. 415
13.9
Settings ........................................................................................................... 415
13.9.1
Settings for file locations .................................................................. 416
13.9.2
Default Network Settings .................................................................. 417
13.10 Live Update ..................................................................................................... 418
13.10.1 Settings for Live Update ................................................................... 418
13.10.2 Downloading updates ....................................................................... 421
13.10.3 Installing updates ............................................................................. 423
13.11 Data Migration ................................................................................................. 425
13.11.1 User Data Migration ......................................................................... 425
13.11.2 Database Migration .......................................................................... 427
14 Glossary
429
15 Index
432
Page 8 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
1
1 Legal notices
Legal notices
Copyright
© European Patent Office (EPO), 2016. All rights reserved.
Accurate reproduction of EPO-created information contained in this documentation is
authorised, provided the source is acknowledged and unless otherwise stated (e.g. that use is
restricted or subject to prior permission).
Further use of third-party works requires permission from the copyright holder, unless this is
waived under the law applicable.
Trade marks and logo
The EPO's official logo is likewise protected worldwide as an emblem of an international
organisation under the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property.
Disclaimer
EPO Online-Services and the associated data from EPO databases are regularly maintained
and updated. Great care has likewise been taken in writing the instructions for using the
services provided, to ensure that the information supplied is correct. Furthermore, the EPO
makes every effort to prevent technical malfunctions. Given the amount of data and
information provided, however, it is not possible to rule out all errors and omissions.
The EPO therefore accepts no liability for the completeness and accuracy of the data and
information made available in connection with these services, and it does not guarantee that
the underlying files and the formats used are error-free and will not cause the user's systems
to malfunction. Nor can the EPO guarantee that the information presented in this
documentation about the functionality and use of these services is fully up to date, complete,
and without any errors or mistakes.
Other access conditions
The EPO reserves the right to modify, extend or discontinue the available services, in full or in
part, without prior notice.
Using the Online Filing software (OLF)
The EPO grants users the right to use the Online Filing software free of charge for an unlimited
period. The software is exclusively intended for online filing with the EPO, i.e. for European
patent applications and other documents.
Please refer to the EPO's website and go to Applying for a patent > Online services >
Online filing > Download documentation
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/documentation.html) to download
the most recent version of the Conditions for the loan and use of the Online Filing software
(http://docs.epoline.org/onlinefilingdocs/olf-license-en.pdf).
Page 9 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
2
2 Introduction
Introduction
Intended audience
This guide is intended for users of the Online Filing software and EPO Online Services. To use
EPO Online Services, you need a username and a smart card registered and supplied free of
charge by the EPO. You can enrol for a smart card using the enrolment form provided on the
EPO website (http://www.epo.org/online-services).
What this guide contains
This guide details the features of the Online Filing Software and describes the processes for
submitting patent applications or subsequently filed documents electronically. Online Filing
supports applications via the EP and PCT routes as well as the use of additional national filing
routes with the EPO as interface.
Additional information
The information presented in this document may change over time as online services develop.
The latest documents and software updates are available for download from the EPO website
(http://www.epo.org/online-services).
2.1
Help and Support
The EPO operates a helpdesk for Online Filing users.
Send us your question using our contact form on the EPO website at
www.epo.org/contact-form.
Our experts will get back to you as soon as possible.
You can also reach us by phone or e-mail:
Open:
Monday to Friday, 08:00 to 18:00 (CET)
Phone:
00800 8020-2020 (free call from most countries worldwide)
E-mail:
[email protected]
Internet:
Online filing on the EPO website: www.epo.org/online-filing
Contact us online on the EPO website: www.epo.org/contact
Visit the Online filing discussion forum (English only):
http://forums.epo.org/onlineservices-your-say-online-filing/
Page 10 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
2.2
2 Introduction
Typographical conventions
The following text styles identify special information.
Style
Usage
Element
Interactive elements in the application such as windows, options, menu items,
icons, buttons and data entry fields.
Text Entry
Text that you type in data entry fields.
KEY
Keys that you press on your computer keyboard, e.g. P, ALT or CTRL.
KEY1+KEY2
Keys that you press at the same time: hold down KEY1 and press KEY2.
Filename.ext
Name and extension of files used in Online Filing.
Page 11 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3
3 Overview of Online Filing
Overview of Online Filing
Online Filing version 5.09 lets you file EP, Euro-PCT and PCT applications with the EPO and
make submissions within the opposition, appeal, limitation and revocation procedures. It also
lets you submit subsequently filed documents for all EP procedures. EPO Online Filing can
furthermore be used to submit applications and documents to participating national offices.
The EPO recommends that all applicants use the Online Filing software for their filings to the
EPO. This method guarantees the quality of the data and documents transmitted. As soon as
the EPO receives the electronic application, you are sent a receipt with the application number
and the date of filing. What is more, the EPO grants Online Filing users a reduction on certain
fees.
If you file an application online with the EPO, you should use the same procedure, where
possible, for subsequent communications and document submission. In particular, you should
not send a confirmation fax or letter to the EPO by post.
Running Online Filing
The Online Filing software opens with File Manager. Log on by entering the user name and
password you were assigned by the Online Filing Administrator. User names are associated
with roles that allow you to perform certain tasks on the system. Online Filing only allows you
to use the options appropriate to the role assigned to your user name - e.g. only certain roles
may add or remove signatures.
Online Filing modes
Online Filing operates in two different work environments: production mode or demo mode.
The appropriate mode is selected when starting File Manager.
Figure 1: Online Filing login window
Production mode is for real filings. The default is production mode. You can also set this
startup mode in User Preferences (p. 57).
Demo mode is provided to allow users to practice the processes of completing, signing and
sending applications, without submitting a real filing. Demo mode transmissions go to a
different EPO server address from production transmissions and submissions are only
confirmed by a demo receipt.
All settings, forms, applications and Address Book entries, as well as users, groups and user
profiles are specific to the current mode, i.e. demo mode or production mode, to ensure that
any work in one is kept entirely separate from the other.
Page 12 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3 Overview of Online Filing
File Manager
File Manager is the central administration interface for using the Online Filing suite. This is
where you organise your applications and track their processing status.
 Create folders for applications and templates
 Edit applications in the workflow process (Draft - Sign - Send)
 Check the legal and formal requirements of applications
 Export applications
 Save names and contact details in the Address Book
 Customise File Manager to suit individual user preferences
 Create user names and manage user privileges
 Set up your own password policy
 Manage general system settings.
Electronic Forms
At the EPO, electronic online filing is available for the following procedures – also referred to
as forms – which can be found in the Forms folder in File Manager:
 EP(1001E2K) – Request for grant of a European Patent (EPC 2000)
Form EP(1001E2K) is the default form used for requesting the grant of a European patent
and examination of the application under Article 94 EPC. The application can be filed
directly to the EPO or via one of the participating national offices.
 EP(1038E) – Subsequently filed documents (in EP procedures)
All subsequently filed documents should be submitted using Form EP(1038E), except in
the opposition procedure, when they should be submitted with Form EP(Oppo) (p. 239).
Form EP(1038) can also be used to submit an appeal and/or documents filed
subsequently in appeal proceedings. If you file documents and fees related to an appeal,
you cannot file other documents or fees, i.e. non-appeal-related documents or fees – at
the same time.
Non-public documents can also be filed with Form EP(1038E). Please note that you
cannot file non-public documents at the same time as any other documents, i.e. public
documents. Nor can you file non-public documents at the same time as you pay fees
related to public documents.
You can also use Form EP(1038E) exclusively to pay a fee.
At present, Online Filing does not allow the filing of priority documents, with the exception
of US certified priority documents.
 Euro-PCT(1200E2K) – Entry into the European phase (EPC 2000)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is the form used for entry of an international application into the
European phase before the EPO as designated or elected office.
 EP(Oppo) – EP opposition
The EP(Oppo) form is used for filing an opposition and/or submitting subsequently filed
documents in opposition proceedings (not for appeal proceedings). It should be used by
all parties involved in opposition proceedings.
Page 13 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3 Overview of Online Filing
PCT/RO/101 – PCT/RO/101 Request
You can use Form PCT/RO/101 to submit an international application filed under the PCT
to the EPO. You can define the EPO as both receiving office (RO) and international
searching authority (ISA).
 PCT-SFD – PCT Subsequently filed documents
You can use Form PCT-SFD to file documents submitted after the filing of an international
application under the Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT). You can also use it to select the
fees for the subsequently filed documents and the way you want to pay them.
 PCT-DEMAND – PCT Demand (PCT/IPEA/401)
Form PCT/IPEA/401 is used for filing demands for international preliminary examination
according to Chapter II of the Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT).
The electronic forms are structured along the same lines as traditional paper forms to simplify
data entry. You can open and work in several forms at the same time. You can create new
applications and produce your own templates by copying your drafts and applications already
filed.

Server Manager
The Server Manager tool allows the Online Filing administrator to manage services, servers
and databases.
 Monitor, start and stop services
 Activate and deactivate services for national procedures
 Backup and restore databases
 Export and import data
 Manage user connections to the server
 Monitor and log the progress of all actions
 Configure and run Live Update for software updates
 Select countries for the update of national procedures via Live Update
 Migrate either the user configuration or the Online Filing database.
3.1
Network-based online filing
Online Filing is a client-server application and can be configured as either a stand-alone
installation or a network installation.
In a stand-alone installation, the client and server both run on the same computer. There is
usually only one user here who is also the administrator.
For network installation, the Online Filing server in installed with the database on a specific
computer in the applicant's company or a patent attorney firm. This server centrally
administers all applications, data and users. The individual users have an Online Filing client
installed on their PC workstations. Data is accessed via the company network or via a private
internet connection (VPN tunnel), allowing persons working at discrete locations all over the
world to co-operate on joint applications.
Page 14 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3 Overview of Online Filing
User authorisation and authentication
The data and software functions released for users in Online Filing are specified individually
by the administrator. An application that is being processed by a user is locked for all other
users, but is available in read-only mode. All users can see who edited and saved the
application last, ensuring that workflows remain transparent and fully documented.
Smart cards (p. 99) are used for signing applications as well as for authentication when
making transmissions to the EPO. All users who have signing and sending privileges need
their personal smart card with PIN and a smart card reader in their offices.
Network settings when installing Online Filing
The exchange of data between the client and the server is managed by the computer network.
How the data is exchanged is defined by the network protocol. The Online Filing server works
with two different protocols - CORBA and SOAP - and reserves individual ports for each
service.
CORBA is recommended, since SOAP considerably slows down the rendering of the
graphical user interface. Also, SOAP does not work with procedure PCT/RO/101. However,
SOAP is useful when the server is accessed via a WAN through a firewall.
During the Online Filing client setup, you are prompted to specify the settings for the
connection to the server. CORBA is set by default.
 Enter the correct IP address of the server or its computer name in your network (available
from your system administrator).
The localhost address should only be used if the client and server are running on the
same logical PC.
Figure 2: Setting the server address when installing the client
Page 15 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3 Overview of Online Filing
When configuring the Online Filing server, you have the option of entering a specific port for
each individual procedure. You can leave the default ports, provided that they are not already
otherwise assigned in your network. Ask your network specialist or system administrator for
more information.
Figure 3: Settings for CORBA and SOAP ports during installation
For more information on installing Online Filing, refer to the installation manual, which is
available from the EPO website at Online services > Online filing > Download
documentation
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/documentation.html).
3.2
National procedures in Online Filing
All national procedures compatible with Online Filing are integrated by default in the software
as standalone plug-ins and are systematically installed. Individual plug-ins can be activated
and deactivated subsequently as required in Server Manager; see Services management
(p. 400).
You can select the options Typical and Custom when setting up Online Filing as a server
installation or stand-alone installation.
Typical installation
 Installs the default services: File Manager, Server Manager, EP(1001E),
Euro-PCT(1200E), EP(1038E), EP(OPPO), PCT/RO/101, PCT-DEMAND
(PCT/IPEA/401) and PCT-SFD
 Installs all national plug-ins without activating them
Page 16 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3 Overview of Online Filing
Custom installation
 Installs the default services and all national plug-ins
 Also activates selected national plug-ins
For more information on installing Online Filing, refer to the installation manual, which is
available from the EPO website at Online services > Online filing > Download
documentation
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/documentation.html).
For an overview of all national procedures, see the EPO website at Online services > Online
filing > Online Filing in national offices
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/national.html).
3.3
Updating the Online Filing software
The EPO is constantly developing and upgrading the Online Filing system and software in
response to customer requirements to improve performance, data quality and workflow.
All software updates are made available via the Live Update service, and installation files are
published on the EPO website for manual download.
Live Update
The EPO recommends that all software users configure the Live Update function. This
ensures that you are always using the latest version of Online Filing, incorporating the most
recent procedural and fee changes, for your submissions.
Live Update also lets you download and install updates for specific national procedures.
For details on how to use and configure this tool, see Live Update (p. 418) in the Server
Manager section of this manual.
Manual Update
A chronological list of all downloadable updates for version 5.0 can be found on the EPO
website at Online services > Online filing > Download software for filing with the EPO
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/download.html).
Release notes
The new features and changes implemented by the current and previous Online Filing
software updates are listed at Online services > Online filing > Download software for
filing with the EPO > Version 5
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/download/version-5.html).
RSS feed
If you would like to keep abreast of all new versions, updates, patches and maintenance data,
you can subscribe to the EPO Online Services RSS feed. The RSS feed will then notify you as
soon as new software modules are available for download.
For the link to the RSS feed visit the Online services page
(http://www.epo.org/online-services) or go to http://www.epo.org/rss/online-services.xml.
Page 17 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3.4
3 Overview of Online Filing
Help on using Online Filing
Apart from reading this guide, there are other things you can do to get help on using the Online
Filing software.
Contacting EPO User Support
 In the menu, click Help > Info.
The About File Manager window provides contact details for EPO User Support as well as
information on the type of installation and the build numbers for the modules currently
installed. It is important to have this data to hand when talking to Customer Services.
Contact details for the national patent offices can also be found in the upper part of the
window.
 To see more addresses, scroll down this pane.
The lower part of the window contains information on all the national procedures installed.
 To see all the plug-ins, scroll down this pane.
Figure 4: Helpful information on Online Filing
Creating a diagnostic file
When you contact EPO User Support, it is always useful to have detailed information on your
OLF system setup at hand. The helpdesk can then get a clear picture of how your Online Filing
software is configured and this can enable the support staff to help you efficiently with advice
and troubleshooting.
You can export all the relevant information, i.e. version number, installed plug-in versions,
installed patches, original installation settings and server configuration, into a diagnostic file
and mail this to EPO User Support.
 Start the Online Filing Server Manager.
 In the menu, click Help > Create diagnostic file.
 Note the warning message in the next dialog window.
 Click Create.
Page 18 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
3 Overview of Online Filing
Online Filing Server Manager exports all relevant data into the EPOolfDiagnostic.txt file.
You are prompted to select the storage location for the diagnostic file on your hard disk.
 Open the EPOolfDiagnostic.txt file in Windows Notepad to inspect the contents
including the warning message.
 If required, you can now modify the file's contents before sending it to EPO User Support.
Figure 5: Contents of the diagnostic file in Windows Notepad
Online help
Online Filing's integrated online help files contain all information from this user guide for
reference. An index is provided to help you search for keywords.
 Click the Help button in the toolbar on the right.
or
In the menu, click Help > Online Filing Help.
The Online Filing help opens in a new window in the default browser specified in the relevant
Windows system settings, e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Page 19 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4
4 File Manager
File Manager
Online Filing opens with the File Manager window. The Forms folder is always displayed
when you start the application, enabling you to select a procedure immediately to create a new
application.
 Click All Applications to see the application list.
Figure 6: File Manager - Overview
Page 20 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Elements in File Manager
Element
Description
Menu Bar
Contains all commands that you need to create, edit and save applications,
options for configuring the program properties of Online Filing as well as
other tools.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Location Indicator Bar
Contains specific information on the application currently selected: folder,
status, procedure, user reference.
Status Selection Bar
Displays the applications in a selected folder filtered by their current status:
Draft, Ready to sign, Ready to send or Sent.
Search
Searches the list of applications (or templates) for a specific search term. To
find a term, select the column you want to search in the drop-down list and
enter the search term in the field to the right.
The first application (or template) in the list that matches your search terms
is highlighted in grey after you click the Search icon
. Click the Search
icon again to jump to the next application that matches your search criteria.
Folders and Templates Contains the system folders All Applications, Default Folder, Forms,
Templates and Trash. You can create additional folders and sub-folders as
required for your applications and templates.
Info Pane
Displays general information on the application (or template) currently
highlighted in the list.
Click View... to preview the application. The application then appears in the
PDF Viewer with a list of all attached files that can also be displayed in PDF
view.
Application List
Shows the content of the folder that you selected on the left, that is, all
applications, templates or forms that are in this folder.
Status Bar
Shows information on the last action executed in the program.
Page 21 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Customising File Manager
You can customise File Manager to only display the elements you wish to see.
 Click the options checked in the View menu one by one, e.g. Status Bar and Location
Indicator.
The check marks are removed and the Status Bar and Location Indicator elements will
be hidden.
 Click an option in the View menu again to set the check mark and display the element
once more in File Manager.
Figure 7: Customising File Manager: Location Indicator and Status Bar are hidden
Exiting File Manager
Use the File menu to close File Manager and exit Online Filing.
 Click Exit to close the program.
 Click Log off if you want to operate the program under a different user name.
4.1
Toolbars
The Online Filing toolbars provide buttons for the most common tasks you need to complete
as you prepare, sign and send your application.
All of these functions can also be activated via options on the File Manager menu bar. Another
alternative is the shortcut menu, which you open by right-clicking an element. The shortcut
menu always contains a list of frequently used options.
Page 22 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
File Manager toolbar
Button
Function
Description
New draft
Creates a new application based on a standard procedure or
template.
Delete
Moves the selected item to the Trash folder.
Previous
Moves the application back a step in the workflow process.
Next
Moves the application forward a step in the workflow process.
Validation
Displays validation messages for the selected application.
Internal Notes
Creates application notes not intended for transmission to the EPO.
Notes for the EPO are inserted in the Annotations tab on a form.
Address Book
Opens the Online Filing Address Book to edit contact details for legal
and natural persons.
System preferences Opens the System Preferences (p. 61) window.
Help
Opens the online help for File Manager.
Forms toolbar
When you edit an application in Online Filing, the software opens a form in a separate window,
e.g. Form EP(1001E2K). The form view window also features buttons for the most common
tasks.
Button
Function
Description
Save
Stores a copy of your work so far.
Next
Moves the application forward a step in the workflow process.
Validation
Shows validation messages for the tab currently open.
Internal Notes
Creates notes not intended for transmission to the EPO.
Preview
Shows a preview of the application in the PDF Viewer.
Add
Adds a new item, e.g. adding details for a new applicant or attaching
a new file.
Delete
Removes the selected item from the form.
Help
Opens the online help for the EP forms.
Page 23 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.2
4 File Manager
Folders
File Manager features a series of special system folders to help with organising your work.
You cannot rename or delete these.
Icon
System Folder
Description
All Applications
Contains a list of all applications (apart from items in the Trash
folder).
Default Folder
All new drafts are filed here unless you specify a different location
when saving.
Forms
Contains the official forms prescribed for the various procedures that
are available for applications. The list of procedures available
depends on the settings chosen during installation.
Templates
Contains modified forms with user-specific information.
Trash
Contains deleted applications (or templates). Once the Trash folder
has been emptied, none of the items deleted in Online Filing can be
retrieved.
You can create your own folders and sub-folders in File Manager. These folders could be
named by type of application, company name or any other criteria that suit you. Folders are
ordered alphabetically under the Default Folder. You can rename and delete folders you
create.
Folders containing sub-folders are marked by a little black triangle on the left.
 To open a folder and view its sub-folders, double-click the folder.
Figure 8: Folders with sub-folders in File Manager
Creating a folder
 In the menu, click File > New Folder.
or
 Right-click in the folder area and select New Folder from the shortcut menu.
Page 24 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
 Type a name for the folder and press ENTER.
Figure 9: New folder created
Creating a sub-folder
 Right-click the folder to which you want to add a sub-folder.
 Select New SubFolder from the shortcut menu.
 Type a name for the sub-folder and press ENTER.
Renaming a folder
 Right-click the folder you want to rename.
or
Press the F2 key.
 Select Rename Folder from the shortcut menu.
 Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Figure 10: Folder renamed
Deleting a folder
You can only delete folders which do not contain any applications or templates.
 Right-click the folder you want to delete.
 Select Delete Folder from the shortcut menu.
The folder is deleted immediately.
Sorting a folder
 Select the folder you wish to sort.
Page 25 of 436
4 File Manager
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 In the menu, click on View > Sorting, then choose the name of the column you want to
sort the list by.
Figure 11: Sorting applications by an option in the "View" menu
or
 Click a column heading in the list of applications.
 Click the column heading again to change the sorting order from ascending (A-Z or 0-9) to
descending (Z-A or 9-0).
Figure 12: Sorting applications by clicking the column heading
4.3
Applications
The list of applications indicates the most important properties of all applications in the folder
currently selected:
 Last saved - Date of the last change
 Reference
 Title


Number of validation messages by validation level (see "Validation" p. 41)
Type of procedure/form used


Number of attachments
Status in the workflow process
Page 26 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Figure 13: List of applications in File Manager
You can customise the list of applications and filter it by various criteria.
 In the menu, click Status > View, then choose the status you want, e.g. Ready to send.
or
Click the appropriate button in the Status Selection Bar.
 In the menu, click View > Columns, then select the columns you want to display in the list
of applications.
 Double-click the dividing line between two column headers to resize the columns so that
they fit their content.
4.3.1
Creating a new application
You can create a new application in File Manager using a form from the Forms folder or a
customised form from the Templates folder.
 In the menu, click File > New Draft.
or
Click the New Draft button in the toolbar.
or
Double-click a form or template.
or
Press CRTL+N on your keyboard.
The Create a New Application window opens.
 Enter the User Reference for the new application.
 Select the type of procedure you want to choose from in the Group list, e.g. EP.
This is not mandatory but it reduces the number of forms displayed in the Procedure list,
making selection easier for you if the number of procedures installed is very high.
 Select the option you want in the Procedure list.
The procedure on which an application is based cannot be changed afterwards.
Data automatically appears in the Description field and cannot be edited.
 If you want to use one of your templates as a basis for the new application, select it in the
Based on Template list.
 Select the language you want in the Language of proceedings list.
Page 27 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
The application form will be created in this language. However, this setting has no effect
on the language of the Online Filing graphical user interface.
 Select the folder where you want to save the new application.
 Click Create.
A warning appears if the user reference you entered has already been assigned to an
application.
– Confirm this message with Yes if you are sure you want to use the same user
reference for the new application.
– Click No to change the user reference in the Create a New Application window.
– If you create a new PCT/RO/101 application, only unique user references are
allowed; see Creating a new PCT/RO/101 application (p. 274) in the section on
PCT/RO/101 or in the online help for form PCT/RO/101.
The option Customer number is only available for the UK procedures UK-IPO(F1),
UK-IPO(NP1) and UK-IPO(SFD).
Example
This new EP(1001E2K) draft is not based on a template. English is selected as the language
of proceedings and the application is stored in one of the personal folders.
Figure 14: Create a new draft based on Form EP(1001E2K)
4.3.2
Saving applications
A new application is only transferred to the database after the draft has been saved for the first
time. Changes made in the subsequent workflow process can be saved at any time. Saving
changes ensures that the data displayed in File Manager is also updated.
 In the form view menu, click File > Save.
Page 28 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
or
Click the Save button in the toolbar.
You can use the Save As option in the File menu to create a new item from an open
application:
 Select Save copy as Draft and enter a reference to save as a new copy.
The original remains as it was when last saved. All subsequent changes apply to the new
document.
 Select Save as Template to save as a customised form (see "Templates" p. 33) on which
to base new drafts.
The saving options in form PCT/RO/101 are slightly different; see Saving the form (p. 276) in
the section on PCT/RO/101 or in the online help for form PCT/RO/101.
4.3.3
Renaming applications
You can only rename applications while they are still in Draft status. Applications based on
form PCT/RO/101 cannot be renamed.
 Open File Manager and select the application you wish to modify.
 Right-click the application in the list and select Rename user reference from the shortcut
menu.
Figure 15: Rename user reference for application
 Enter the new user reference in the Rename user reference window.
 Click Rename to save your changes.
The user reference in the database will be updated. It can take a few moments for the
change to appear in File Manager.
Page 29 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.3.4
4 File Manager
Moving applications
In File Manager, select the application (or template) you want to move.
Right-click the application.
Select Move to folder from the shortcut menu.
Select the destination folder for the application in the Move to folder window.
 You can display sub-folders by double-clicking the parent folder.
 Click OK.
The application is now in the selected folder.




Figure 16: Selecting the folder where you want to move an application
4.3.5
Deleting applications
There are a number of ways to delete applications (or templates). At every stage of the
deletion process, Online Filing asks if you are absolutely sure you want to delete an
application. This is not a setting that can be deactivated in the user preferences.
Deleted applications are first moved to the Trash folder where they remain until you empty the
trash.
 In File Manager, select the application(s) or template(s) you wish to delete.
 You can select multiple items one after the other by clicking them with the CTRL key
held down.
 In the menu, click Edit > Delete application.
or
In the toolbar, click the Delete button.
or
Right-click the application(s) and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
or
Press DELETE on your keyboard.
Page 30 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Retrieving deleted items
 Click the Trash folder.
 Select the application you want to restore.
 Right-click the application and select Move to folder from the shortcut menu.
 Select the required folder in the Move to folder window and click OK.
Removing items from the Trash folder
You can clear all items or individual items in the Trash folder.
 Right-click the Trash folder and select Empty Trash Folder from the shortcut menu.
or
Select the items you want to remove and delete them as described above.
4.3.6
Previewing applications
Just like in any word processing application, you can open a preview of an application in
Online Filing to display the application form as it appears in print. In Online Filing, the preview
of the application is displayed as a PDF file in the PDF Viewer window, which runs the Adobe
Acrobat Reader application installed on your PC. This window also displays all attached files
as well as the system files generated by Online Filing.
 Select an application in File Manager.
The info pane provides more information on a selected application, including information
that is not yet visible in the list of applications:
– ID is the internal number of the application in the database.
– Title is the title of the invention (for applications using the EP(1001E2K) form only,
otherwise blank).
– Last saved indicates the user's name and the date.
– Applicant indicates the name(s) of the applicant.
– Internal Notes provides a short summary of remarks by the persons handling the
application.
 Click the View... button in the info pane.
or
Select View > List of attached documents.
Figure 17: Info pane with application information
The PDF Viewer opens with a preview of the required application (ep-request.pdf).
Page 31 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
A list of all files associated with this application is displayed on the left.
 In this example, the technical documents are contained in one attachment
(SPECEPO-1.pdf).
 The XML files listed are the system files required for transmission to the EPO. The
f1002-1.pdf file is the designation of inventor generated internally by Online Filing.
 The list of files displayed by the PDF Viewer includes the acknowledgement of receipt
(receipt.pdf) once an application has been successfully transmitted to the EPO.
 The user reference appears on the bottom left of each page in the PDF document created
by Online Filing.
The PDF Viewer provides a toolbar and other items for handling the PDF document.
 To print the form, click the Print file icon in the PDF Viewer's toolbar.
 To save a copy of the PDF file to your PC, click the Save file icon.
 To resize the width of the left navigation pane, click the grip at the centre of the divider
(symbolised by three dots) and drag it to the required position.
Figure 18: Application displayed in the PDF viewer
Page 32 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.4
4 File Manager
Templates
Templates are user-defined forms, containing data that you need every time you prepare
certain applications, such as information relating to a particular applicant or to fee payments.
4.4.1
Creating a new template
In File Manager, you can create a template from a draft application, start with a blank form or
use an existing template.
Specific instructions on how to create a template for PCT/RO/101 applications can be found in
Working with templates (p. 277) in the section on PCT/RO/101 or in the online help for form
PCT/RO/101.
Creating a template with a blank form
 In the menu, click File > New Template.
or
Press SHIFT+CTRL+N.
 In the Create a New Template window, enter the Template Name.
 Select the required procedure and the language of proceedings.
 To store the new template in one of your template folders, double-click the Templates
folder and select the appropriate sub-folder in the Save to folder field.
 If you wish, enter a description to help identify the template.
This is displayed in the Title column in File Manager.
 Click Create.
Figure 19: Creating a new template
The new template opens in the form view where it can be edited.
Page 33 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Creating a template from an existing application (draft)
The application is in Draft status.
 Double-click the application to open it in the form view.
 In the menu, click File > Save As > Save as Template.
 Enter the template name in the Save As Template window.
 Select a folder if you want to save the template in a sub-folder of the Templates folder.
 Double-click the Templates folder to display all sub-folders.
 Enter a description.
 Click Save.
Figure 20: Saving an application as a template
The new template remains open in the form view.
Converting an application (draft) into a template
Only an application in Draft status can be converted into a template. This removes the
application from its original location and creates a new template in the selected template
folder.
 In File Manager, right-click the application you want to convert into a template.
 Select Convert to template from the shortcut menu.
 Select a folder in the Convert to template window.
 Enter a description.
 You cannot change the template name here.
Page 34 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
 Click Save.
Figure 21: Converting an application into a template
The template then appears in the selected template folder in File Manager.
Figure 22: Templates folder with sub-folders and new template
Page 35 of 436
4 File Manager
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Creating a template from an application already processed (Sent, Ready to send,
Ready to sign)
Only applications still in Draft status can be directly converted into templates. There is,
however, also a way to create a template from an application, for instance, that has already
been sent.
 In File Manager, select the application you want to use as a template.
Its status can be Ready to sign, Ready to send or Sent.
 Right-click the application and select Copy application from the shortcut menu.
 Type a new user reference.
 Click Copy.
The copy now appears in Draft status in File Manager.
 Right-click this application and select Convert to template from the shortcut menu.
 To continue, proceed as described above.
Copying a template
 Click the Templates folder.
 Select the template you want to copy.
 Right-click the template and select Create a copy of template from the shortcut menu.
 Enter a name for the new template in the Copy template window.
 Click Copy.
Figure 23: Creating a new template by copying an existing template
In File Manager, the new template appears in the same folder as the copied template.
4.4.2
Using a template
You can use your templates immediately to create a new application.
 In the Templates folder, double-click the template you require.
or
Click the New Draft button in the toolbar.
The Create a New Application window opens.
 Where applicable, select the template you want in the Based on Template list.
 Enter the details for the new application.
Page 36 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click Create.
Figure 24: Create a new application based on a template
4.4.3
Modifying a template
You cannot change the underlying procedure in a template. Nor can you rename a template.
Changes made to a template are not transferred to existing applications based on this
template.
Editing data in a template
 Click the Templates folder.
 Select the template you want to edit.
 Right-click the template and select Edit template from the shortcut menu.
The template will open in the form view.
 Modify the data as required and save the template.
Updating fee information in a template
When you create a template, the most recent fee schedule for the selected procedure is
always entered in full in the template. The Live Update routine updates the fee information in
Online Filing - but not in existing templates - whenever the EPO issues new fees.
Page 37 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
A warning message appears if the template that you try to open to create a new application
still contains outdated fee information.
Figure 25: Warning when you open a template containing outdated fee information
 Click OK to cancel the operation.
 To update the template, right-click the template in File Manager and select Edit template
from the shortcut menu.
A warning message about updating fee information appears.
Figure 26: Warning about updating fee information in a template
 Click OK.
The template now opens with the new fees.
 Save the template.
Modifying the template description
 Click the Templates folder.
 Select the template you want to edit.
 Right-click the template and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
 Change the text in the Template description field in the Template properties window.
 Click Save.
Figure 27: Changing template properties
4.5
Workflow and status
In Online Filing, the workflow is the sequence of all tasks related to the filing of an application,
that is, from the creation of a draft to the successful transmission of an application to the EPO.
Page 38 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
The status of an application indicates which tasks have already been performed for an
application and which task can be performed next.
File Manager shows the current status of each application, that is, either Draft, Ready to
sign, Ready to send or Sent. You can filter the list of applications so that only applications in
a specific status are displayed.
 Click a status button for a list of all the applications in the relevant status.
All
Shows all applications in the folder currently selected.
Draft
All applications that are still being processed. Applications in this status are missing
either mandatory information or documents required for the procedure.
Ready to sign
Mandatory information and documents have been included but signatures have not
been added.
Ready to send
Mandatory information and documents has been included and signatures have been
added.
Sent
The application was successfully transmitted to the EPO and the acknowledgement
of receipt was received from the EPO.
4.5.1
Changing the status of an application in File Manager
The workflow process in Online Filing helps you to fill out applications correctly and in full. The
software checks the documents and data contained in an application for compliance with the
legal framework and the Validation (p. 41) function informs you about which data is missing or
has to be corrected. An application can only move forward to the next status in the workflow if
all necessary data was entered and is correct (where verifiable).

You can only change the status of applications if your user name is assigned the
corresponding privileges in Online Filing.
You can change the status of applications either via the Next and Previous workflow buttons
in the toolbar or via the Workflow menu. The workflow buttons only ever change the status
one step at a time to the next or previous stage. In contrast, you can use the menu options to
change the status several steps at a time, e.g. from Ready to send directly back to Draft.
 Select the application you want in File Manager.
 In the menu, click Workflow > Change Status followed by the required option to move
the application to a specific status.
or
Keep clicking the relevant workflow button until the application reaches the status you
want.
Page 39 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Icon Function Description
Next
Move the application forward a step in the workflow process. You can only move an
application to the next step if the current data is sufficient, e.g. only an application
signed with a digital signature can be moved to Ready to send status.
Previous Move the application back a step in the workflow process, e.g. return it to Draft status
so that changes can be made.
Example 1
In this example, the selected application is in Draft status and already contains all mandatory
information. Clicking the Next button moves the application to Ready to sign status and
opens it in the PDF Viewer. Notice that the Previous button is disabled because Draft is the
first step in the workflow process.
The tool-tip on the Next button says "Ready to sign".
Figure 28: "Ready to sign" option available in the workflow
Example 2
In this example, the status of the selected application is Ready to sign. Clicking the Next
button initiates the signing process. Note that the Previous button is enabled. Clicking it would
return the application to Draft status.
In this example the tool-tip on the Next button says "Sign".
Figure 29: "Sign" option available in the workflow
Page 40 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.5.2
4 File Manager
Changing the status of an application in the form
An application remains in Draft status until you actively change its status, e.g. move the
application to Ready to sign status.
 Open an application in Draft status.
 In the form toolbar, click the Next button.
Figure 30: Using workflow buttons in the form view to move an application to "Ready to sign" status
or
 In the menu, click File > Close, then select Move to Ready to Sign and exit.
Figure 31: Moving an application to "Ready to sign" status when closing a form
When an application leaves Draft status, the next step in the workflow process automatically
starts the next time the application is opened.
For example, the signing process automatically starts if you open an application in Ready to
sign status and the sending process initiates if you open an application in Ready to send
status.
 Use the Previous button in File Manager to move the application back to Draft status in
order to make changes in the form view.
Form PCT/RO/101 provides different functions; see Processing the PCT/RO/101 application
(p. 343) in the section on PCT/RO/101 or in the online help for form PCT/RO/101.
4.6
Validation
The Online Filing software incorporates validation mechanisms that check the logical
consistency of data entered in an application and compares it with the legal requirements of
the EPC and the various filing offices. For the latest version of the EPC, see the EPO website
at Law & practice > Legal texts > European Patent Convention
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/epc.html).
Page 41 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
There are three severity levels for validation messages:
Icon Severity
Validation state
1
The red icon for error means that mandatory information required by the EPC is
missing or the data provided is incorrect. You must supply or amend this information
before you can submit the application.
2
The yellow icon for warning means that some information is missing but may be
supplied subsequent to your filing.
3
The grey icon for message means that helpful hints concerning your filing are
available.
In File Manager, the total number of validation messages about an application is shown both
in the application list and the info pane.
There are no validation indications for the PCT/RO/101 requests shown in the overview
screens as the validation system operated by the PCT/RO/101 is not compatible with the data
format used by the EPO Online Filing File Manager. For more information on validation
messages, please refer to PCT/RO/101 (p. 272) in the section on PCT/RO/101 or in the online
help for form PCT/RO/101.
Figure 32: Number of validation messages in the info pane and application list
In the form view, the validation status is indicated by icons in the tabs corresponding to the
form sections.
Figure 33: Validation icons in a form's tabs indicate missing data
The total number of validation messages per severity level is also displayed in the status bar
of the currently opened application.
Figure 34: Number of validation messages indicated in the form's status bar
Note that the validation icons change dynamically as you enter new data.
Page 42 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click the Validation button in an application's form view to view the messages specific to
the currently displayed tab.
 Click the Validation button in File Manager to see all the messages concerning the
selected application.
The validation messages are displayed in a separate window.
Figure 35: All validation messages for an application
You can leave the validation window open to keep track of your applications while working in
File Manager.
 In the menu, click View > Validation > Docked to dock the validation window under the
File Manager window.
 If you want the validation window to appear docked to the form window each time,
select the corresponding option for Startup (p. 57) in User Preferences.
 If you prefer, you can select View > Validation > Undocked.
This option leaves the floating window open and allows resizing of the window.
 To close the validation window, click View > Validation > Hide.
4.7
Internal Notes
Internal Notes can be used by the persons handling an application within a company to
exchange information without sending it to the EPO. You can only create and delete internal
notes in the applications, not in File Manager. Notes are displayed as read-only when opened
from File Manager.
Information for the EPO is inserted in the form's Annotations tab, see EP(1001E2K)
Annotations (p. 172).
For instructions on annotations and notes in form PCT/RO/101, please refer to PCT/RO/101
Annotate (p. 338) in the section on PCT/RO/101 or in the online help for form PCT/RO/101.
Page 43 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Creating Internal Notes
 In the procedural form, click the Internal Notes button in the toolbar.
Any notes already created for this form are listed.
 Click the New button.
 Enter the author's name, subject and note text.
Figure 36: Sample for internal notes, created in the form
Viewing Internal Notes
 In File Manager, select the application of which you wish to view the notes.
 Click the Internal Notes button in the toolbar.
 Like the validation window, the Internal Notes window can be set to Docked,
Undocked or Hide in the View menu.
Page 44 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 In the list click a note to display it.
Figure 37: Example of an internal note in the docked Internal Notes window in File Manager
4.8
Address Book
The Address Book is a facility for storing contact details (e.g. applicants, representatives,
inventors).
 In the File Manager menu, click Tools > Address Book.
or
Click the Address Book button in the toolbar.
Figure 38: Opening Address Book in File Manager
Page 45 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Entries in the Address Book are grouped by legal and natural persons. Note that a legal
person is represented by the icon
and a natural person by the icon
.
Figure 39: Address Book with legal and natural persons
Address Book functions
Function
Add
Remove
Revert changes
Search
Description
Click
to create a new Address Book entry.
Click
to delete the Address Book entry currently selected.
Click
to cancel entries or changes.
Select the data field you want to search in the Find in drop-down list and then
enter the relevant search term in the search field. Click the Search icon
find matching Address Book entries.
to
Enter details
Edit the personal details in the data fields. You must enter at least a first and last
name for a natural person or at least the company name for a legal person.
Select route
Click this field to open a drop-down list of routes.
Select role
Click this field to open a drop-down list of features for the selected route.
Enter registration
number
Click the field to enter the registration number.
Page 46 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Exchange of data between Address Book and forms
When filling out forms, you can copy entries (see "Adding names from the Address Book to a
form" p. 49) from the Address Book for the persons listed in the Names tab. You can also copy
the information on a person you entered in a form to a new entry (see "Saving names from a
form to the Address Book" p. 51) in the Address Book.
For instructions on exchanging address data with form PCT/RO/101, please refer to Adding
names from the Address Book to a form and vice versa (p. 299) in the section on PCT/RO/101
or in the online help for form PCT/RO/101.

Data loss can occur in Online Filing if information from an EP form is copied to the
Address Book and then transferred to a non-EP form, and vice versa. You should
therefore check the integrity of address data when transferring Address Book entries
and add any missing information manually.
Exchange of data between Address Book and external files
You can create Address Book entries either directly in Online Filing or import (see "Importing
Address Book names" p. 54) them from existing CSV files. You can also export (see
"Exporting Address Book names" p. 53) entries created in Online Filing to an external CSV
file.
4.8.1
Creating names in the Address Book
 In the Address Book menu, click File and then New Person or New Company.
or
Click the Add button, and then select Legal Person or Natural Person.
Figure 40: Creating a new person
 Enter the details in the fields on the right.
 Click the Save Changes button.
A warning appears if there is already an Address Book entry with the same name.
Figure 41: Warning: Record already exists in the Address Book
Page 47 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide


4 File Manager
The data in the First Name, Last Name and Registration No. fields is compared for natural
persons. The Address Book allows you to create two entries with the same first name and
last name but different registration numbers.
You can save two entries with the same company name but different registration numbers
for legal persons.
Editing names in the Address Book
 Select the name you wish to change.
 Edit the data.
 Click the Save Changes button to store the changes.
 To cancel the changes, click the Undo button.
Deleting names from the Address Book
 Select the entry you wish to remove.
 Click the Delete button.
4.8.2
Routes and roles
The Route, Role and Registration No. fields are grouped as a table in the Role sub-tab,
situated on the right side of the Address Book below the personal data. A registration number
is no longer required for filing with the EPO.
Adding a route and role to a name
 Select the name you wish to use in the Address Book.
 Click the New button (in the Role sub-tab).
The route EP and the role Applicant are added automatically.
 To select another route, click the field to open it for editing.
All routes supported by Online Filing are listed in the Route drop-down list, irrespective of
whether they are actually activated in your system.
 Select the role in the same manner.
– The roles for the EP route are Applicant and Representative.
– The roles for the PCT route are Applicant only and Agent.
Figure 42: Selecting a role for the EP route
Page 48 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click the grey field in the Registration No. column to activate it.
 Enter the registration number for the selected role.
 For more information on the format of registration numbers, contact the relevant
national office.
Multiple registration numbers
If a person has registration numbers for different filing offices, you can create multiple lines
with routes, roles and registration numbers.
 To create a second line, click the New button once more.
 Select the Route and Role options.
 Enter the registration number.
Figure 43: Multiple roles and registration numbers entered
Deleting a route and role
 Select the relevant line in the Address Book entry.
Click the Delete button (in the Role sub-tab).
4.8.3
Adding names from the Address Book to a form
You can insert the names saved in the Address Book into your applications.
 In the Names tab of Form EP(1001E2K) click the Add button.
 Select a role, e.g. Representative, Legal Practitioner.
Figure 44: Selecting Representative, Authorised
 Click the Copy from Address Book button.
The Address Book opens. The list of names is filtered and only shows natural persons
because the Representative, Legal Practitioner role is defined as a natural person.
 In the Address Book, select the name as appropriate.
Page 49 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
 Click the Copy person to the form button.
Figure 45: Copy representative's data to the form
The entry is added to the Names tab of the current form.
Figure 46: Data and registration number for representative entered automatically in form
Page 50 of 436
4 File Manager
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.8.4
4 File Manager
Saving names from a form to the Address Book
If you enter details on a person in a form's Names tab, you can save this information in the
Address Book for future use.
 In the Names tab, select the name you wish to save..
 Click the Copy to Address Book button.
A warning appears and the entry is not saved in the Address Book if the name already exists in
the Address Book.
Figure 47: Warning: Record already exists in Address Book
If the data has been successfully copied to the Address Book, a message to this effect is
displayed in the status bar.
Figure 48: Applicant's data successfully copied from the form to the Address Book
Page 51 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Multiple entries for a legal person
You can specify a separate address for correspondence with one of the applicants, e.g. see
Applicants (p. 129) in the EP(1001E2K) section.
 Add an address for correspondence and enter the required information.
 Click the Copy to Address Book button.
This creates an additional Address Book entry for a legal person with the same company
name, but with different address data.
Figure 49: Additional address for correspondence copied to the Address Book
Data required for Address Book entries
An entry for a natural person must contain the first and last name while an entry for a legal
person must contain the name of the company.
An appropriate message appears in the status bar if the entry in the form does not satisfy
these conditions and the entry is not saved to the Address Book.
Figure 50: Incomplete entry is not copied to the Address Book from the form
Page 52 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.8.5
4 File Manager
Exporting Address Book names
This option allows you to save names from the Online Filing Address Book to an external
location on your computer.
 In the Address Book menu, click File > Export.
Figure 51: Exporting data from the Address Book
 Select a location and enter a file name, and then click Save.
The entire Address Book is exported and saved as a CSV file.
CSV files (CSV = character separated values) contain data in text-only format that can be
read by many different programs. These files display data records as single lines in which the
individual data fields are separated by delimiters. A delimiter is a marker, such as a comma, a
semicolon or a tab character.
Example
The figure below shows a CSV file exported from the Address Book and opened in Microsoft
Notepad. In this case, the delimiters are semicolons. The first line is the header containing the
field names. These are only in English and are for internal use in Online Filing. The second
line contains information on the first person in the Address Book.
Figure 52: Sample CSV file opened in Notepad
Page 53 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
This is how the same CSV file appears in Microsoft Excel. The data records are arranged in
rows here and the data fields in columns. The first line again contains the field names as
column headings. Persons are sorted by the date when the entry was created in the Address
Book.
Figure 53: Sample CSV file in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet
The application associated with CSV files depends on your computer's configuration. A
Windows system opens CSV files by default with Microsoft Excel, provided this software is
installed on the PC.
4.8.6
Importing Address Book names
This option allows you to import names from an external CSV file into the Online Filing
Address Book.
Preparing the CSV file with multiple roles
When importing addresses from an external CSV file, all data on the route, role and
registration number is contained in the Role field. All of the data must be within the one field
but divided by vertical bars (|). The different terms for representative and applicant in the
various routes must be entered in English so that they can be imported by Online Filing.
Figure 54: Different sets of data for EP and PCT routes
Importing the CSV file
 In the File Manager menu, click Tools > Address Book.
or
Click the Address Book button in the toolbar.
Page 54 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 In the Address Book menu, click File > Import.
Figure 55: Importing data into Address Book
 Select the CSV file you want to import on your PC.
 Click Open.
 The CSV file must not be open in another program at the same time.
Figure 56: Selecting CSV file for import into Address Book
Mapping field names
Online Filing compares the names of the fields in the CSV file with the names of the fields in
the address book. The fields' names are automatically assigned to each other if they match up
exactly. If the name in the CSV File Field column differs from the name in the Address Book
Field column, None is displayed in the list. In this case, you have to map the names manually.
 Open a drop-down list of available field names by double-clicking the entry you want to
change in the CSV File Field column.
Page 55 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Select the matching field in your CSV file. If there is no matching field, set the option to
None to leave the Address Book field blank.
Figure 57: Import Address Book - matching field names
Handling duplicate entries
The import process is now started. If the software finds a duplicate name in the Address Book,
a message appears.
Figure 58: Address Book message for duplicate entries
 Click Overwrite to replace the existing name with the imported data. If the software finds
a further duplicate name, you will be asked again how you wish to proceed.
 Click Overwrite all to replace all existing duplicate names at once.
 Click Skip if you do not wish to import a particular duplicate name. You will be prompted
again if the software finds a further duplicate name.
 Click Skip all if you do not wish to import any of the duplicate names.
 Click Add as new record to import the duplicate name as a new entry in the Address
Book.
 If no person type (either natural or legal) is indicated for a record, a legal person type
is assumed by default. If both first name and last name are indicated, a natural person
type is assumed.
Page 56 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.9
4 File Manager
User Preferences
Online Filing enables all users to individually set their preferred settings for working with the
software. These user preferences can be set independently both in production mode and
demo mode.
 In the File Manager menu, click Tools > Preferences > User Preferences.
 Changes only take effect the next time you start File Manager.
 Click OK to apply your changed settings and restart File Manager.
 Click Reset All Settings to restore the previous user preferences.
Figure 59: User preferences in File Manager, default options
4.9.1
Startup
 Select your preferred mode for startup: Production or Demo.
The working mode is selected in the login window; see Overview of Online Filing (p. 12).
 If you want the validation messages to appear each time you open an application, select
the check box Dock validation in forms at startup.
The Validation Messages window can be docked below the form; see Validation (p. 41).
4.9.2
Language
The File Manager user interface can be used in English, German, French, Dutch, Spanish,
Romanian, Slovak, Polish or Swedish.
Page 57 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Select the startup language you wish to work in.
By default, a form's user interface is displayed in the selected language of proceedings; see
Creating a new application (p. 27).
 If you want to work in the same language in the form as in File Manager, select the check
box Open forms in the language of the File Manager.
 This option does not apply for PCT/RO/101 forms. The PCT/RO/101 form's interface
will always be in the language which was set in File Manager when creating the new
application.
The language of proceedings, however, can only be English, French or German. Therefore,
the default language of proceedings in a new application will be English if you set Dutch,
Spanish, Romanian, Slovak, Polish or Swedish as the language for File Manager.
4.9.3
Signing preferences
The signing preferences show the options allowed by the Online Filing system settings; see
Signing settings (p. 65). If an option is greyed out, this means that your Online Filing
administrator has disabled it in the System preferences.
 Select the type of signature you usually use:
– Smart card (default)
– Soft certificate (only available in demo mode)
– Alphabetical
– Facsimile
When signing an application, you can still select a different type of signature if required.

4.9.4
The EPO does not currently accept soft certificates as an electronic signature for filings
to the EPO server. Other offices may, however, accept them for online filing. See the
website of the office concerned for details.
Confirmations
Online Filing displays warning messages following certain actions. You can avoid some extra
clicks by de-activating these confirmation dialogs.
Figure 60: Default settings for confirmations
 If you do not wish to receive notifications about deletions of files, clear the check box for
Confirm upon deletion of entries in applications.
or
Page 58 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
When this message appears in the procedural form, you can choose not to display it in
future.
Figure 61: Message to confirm deletion of file
 If you do not wish to receive notifications about renaming of files, clear the check box for
Show information about renaming of attached files.
or
When this message appears in the procedural form, you can choose not to display it in
future.
Figure 62: Message on renaming file
 Select the check box Start signing immediately when moving application forward
from draft status if you want an application in Draft status to move directly to Ready to
sign status by clicking the Next workflow button in File Manager.
 If you want to use an existing user reference for a new application and not receive a
warning, clear the check box Warn when creating an application with an already
existing user reference.
or
If this message appears when creating a new application, you can choose not to display it
in future.
Figure 63: Message when creating a new application indicating that a form already exists with the user reference
you want to use
Page 59 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.9.5
4 File Manager
Working directories
The creation of working directories is advisable if you tend to always access the same PC or
network folders via Online Filing, for instance, when selecting electronic documents to attach
to your applications or when importing data. You can create a central storage location in your
company for documents associated with ongoing patent applications and allow shared access
to all users of Online Filing.
The default for all working directories is C:\Program Files\EPO_OLF5\fm, i.e. the installation
folder that was selected when setting up Online Filing.
 Click Browse... to set the working directories for Import, Export, Attach (i.e. attaching
files) and CD-R.
The directory specified for CD-R is used by Online Filing when you select the Physical
Media option in the sending dialog; see Sending applications (p. 106). The application
data is saved in a special file format and can be burned to a CD or DVD later.
 Working directories are not supported when working with the PCT procedure (Form
PCT/RO/101).
 Select the check box Remember the last used directory if you want Online Filing to
access the last directory you opened each time you import, export or attach files.
These working directories are updated in the user preferences every time you select
another directory during the corresponding action.
Figure 64: Modified working directories
4.9.6
Network settings
The network settings depend on how the computer network is configured in your company.
By default, the Online Filing Thin Client (i.e. File Manager) uses the same internet connection
as the Online Filing server, which can be configured in Server Manager.
 To modify the internet connection for your personal Online Filing Client, clear the check
box User Default Network Settings.
This opens the other fields for editing.
 Enter the IP address or the proxy server name in the Proxy Server field.
 Enter the number of the proxy server port in the field after the colon.
 If required, enter username and password for authorisation at the proxy server.
The SSL Version is set to TLSv1 by default and cannot be changed. To provide for enhanced
security in terms of data encryption, Online Filing does not use previous SSL versions
anymore.
Page 60 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Please contact your system administrator if you are unsure about the information you
need to enter in your situation.
Figure 65: User-specific settings for network connections
4.10
System Preferences
In System Preferences, you can change global settings that apply to all users of Online
Filing. This is usually done by the Online Filing administrator or another user with appropriate
user rights; see Profiles for group authorisations (p. 78).
 In the File Manager menu, click Tools > Preferences > System Preferences.
or
Click the System Preferences button in the toolbar.
 Edit the settings as required.
 To apply your settings, click Save.
You are prompted to restart File Manager for the changes to take effect.
 To discard your changes and return to the Online Filing default settings, click Reset All
Settings.
 To quit without applying any changes, click Cancel.
Page 61 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

4 File Manager
Note: The settings for production mode and demo mode are configured independently.
Figure 66: System preferences for File Manager
4.10.1 Security and user management
To protect your IP data, it is highly recommended that you establish uniform security rules for
all users in your company working with Online Filing. All users should log on with their user
name and password, even if you have installed the standalone version for a single-user
environment.
Enabling User Management
Only the Online Filing Administrator can enable user management either immediately during
the installation of Online Filing or later in System Preferences. If user management is
enabled, users must always enter their user name and password to log on to File Manager.
 To enable User Management subsequent to the installation of the software, go to System
Preferences in File Manager.
 Select the Enable User Management check box.
 Click Save.
You are prompted to restart File Manager for the changes to take effect.
 Create user names and passwords as required; see Users (p. 72).
Enabling Folder Management
Folder management is not enabled by default. This option governs whether or not the Folders
tab is active in User Administration; see Sharing folders with groups (p. 83).
 To enable folder management, enable user management if it is not already enabled.
Page 62 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Then select the Enable Folder Management check box.
 Click Save.
You are prompted to restart File Manager for the changes to take effect.
Figure 67: Enabling folder management after user management has been enabled
4.10.2 Password policy
If your company has a password policy for its network, you will be able to set up a similar
policy in Online Filing should you wish to. That way, users are presented with a log-on method
and style with which they are already familiar.
To enable password policy, user management has to be enabled by the Online Filing
Administrator either during installation of the software or later in File Manager's System
Preferences.
Enabling password policy when installing Online Filing
You can set up a password policy to protect access to Online Filing with a user name and
password when installing the server or standalone version.
 This will enable user management and password policy at the same time.
 The master user Administrator is created.
 You are requested to enter a password for the master user Administrator that complies
with the Online Filing default password policy.
For more information, please refer to the Online Filing Installation guide.
Enabling password policy in File Manager
If required, you can enable user management and password policy in System Preferences
subsequent to installation.
 To enable user management and password policy, go to System Preferences in File
Manager.
 Select the Enable User Management check box.
The Enable password policy check box becomes available.
Page 63 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Select the Enable password policy check box as appropriate.
Figure 68: The password policy can be enabled if user management has been enabled
The password settings become editable.
 To apply the Online Filing default settings, click Save
Password policy is activated when you restart File Manager.
Figure 69: Enabling password policy with the default settings

If you disable user management, password policy will also be disabled. The user
accounts and passwords as well as the password policy settings, however, remain
stored in the Online Filing database and will be activated again the next time user
management and password policy are enabled.
Defining a password policy
When defining a password policy in Online Filing, the following setting parameters apply:
(1) The minimum password length is 6 characters, i.e. letters, special characters or digits.
(2) The maximum password length is 20 characters. This means that a number between
6 and 20 is allowed in the minimum length field.
(3) These special characters are allowed:
! # $ % * + , - . / : ; = ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ { } ~
(4) The four minimum-number fields (lower-case letters, upper-case letters, special
characters, digits) added together must not exceed the value entered as the minimum
length of the password.
Page 64 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Example of a mismatch of password settings:
 Enter 6 in the Minimum length of password field.
 Enter 2 in each of the following fields: Minimum number of lowercase characters,
Minimum number of uppercase characters, Minimum number of special characters
and Minimum number of digits.
These four fields add up to 8, which is greater than 6.
 Click Save.
You will see an error message prompting you to correct your settings.
Changing your password policy
 In File Manager, go to System Preferences.
 Modify the field entries to match your password rules as required.
 To display more helpful information about the fields, move your mouse pointer over
the little
icons.
 To discard your entries and return to the default values, click Reset to default settings.
 To apply the new settings, click Save.
You are prompted to restart File Manager for the changes to take effect.
Figure 70: Modifying parameters to define your own password policy
If a user's password does not comply with the new password policy, he or she is prompted to
provide a new password when logging on to File Manager the next time, see Changing your
password (p. 75).
4.10.3 Signing settings
This is where you define the types of signature that your company should support for signing
applications. The settings are made separately for demo mode and production mode.
 Click Signing in the list on the left under the heading Online Services File Manager.
 Select or clear the check boxes as required.
Page 65 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
For instance, if the Alphabetical check box is cleared, users cannot apply an
alphanumeric signature to their applications.
Figure 71: System preferences for signing
4.10.4 Runtime variables
Runtime variables enable you to customise Online Filing in line with user requirements that
extend beyond the scope of the simple user preferences.
There is currently only one runtime variable for File Manager:
EP_warning_for_no_payment_mode_indicated. The EP prefix indicates that this variable
affects all EP procedures. The variable governs whether a grey or yellow validation icon is
displayed on the Fee Payment tab in EP forms if a mode of payment was not specified for this
application.
Changing the value of a variable
 Click Runtime Variables in the System Preferences window and select the variable you
want to change.
 Click the field in the Value column to open the drop-down list.
 Select True or False.
 Click somewhere else in the variables list to close the drop-down list.
Page 66 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click Save.
Figure 72: Changing the runtime variable to "True"
False: Grey validation icon, the validation message is "Please enter mode of payment".
True: Yellow validation icon, the validation message is "Warning (set by system preferences):
no mode of payment is indicated".
The yellow validation icon is displayed in EP forms after you restart File Manager.
Figure 73: Yellow validation icon for the Fee Payment tab after changing the runtime variable
4.10.5 PMS gateway interface
The PMS gateway is used to exchange data with the EPO over a local OLF server. Users of
other patent management systems (PMS) can use this interface to send their applications
directly to the EPO via the OLF server, without actually processing the applications with the
OLF software. For EPO authentication, a smart card reader with valid smart card must be
connected to the computer running the OLF server.
For more information on the PMS gateway, refer to the following material on the EPO website
under Online services > Online Filing:
 Under Download software for filing with the EPO
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/download.html): Online Filing
v5 PMS development kit (for applicants and PMS providers)
 Under Download documentation
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/documentation.html): Importing
Data into Online Filing version 5 and higher
Page 67 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

4 File Manager
Note: The PMS gateway interface can only be configured in File Manager's production
mode. If you want to test the PMS gateway interface in demo mode, please enable it in
production mode first. Your production mode settings will apply in the demo mode.
 Open the System Preferences window.
 Click PMS gateway interface.
The default setting is Not enabled.
 Select the Smart card option and enter the smart card PIN code.
 At present, applications in EP procedures cannot be signed with a soft certificate and
filed with the EPO.
 Enter the HTTP port number of the server and the valid term for the password or PIN.
Figure 74: Settings for the PMS gateway interface when using a smart card
Technical coordination with the EPO
The EPO or the other patent offices can only accept files via the PMS interface if the PMS
software used has already been approved. This guarantees that applicants only use PMS
software that has been compatibility-tested with the EPO Online Filing system.
If you are using custom-made PMS software, approval must be obtained from the EPO User
Support or the customer services departments of other patent offices before you use the
software with the PMS gateway.
 If these requirements are satisfied, select the check box I confirm that the PMS
software has been approved by the patent office(s) concerned.
 The check box Enable filing to production allowed activates after this confirmation.
 Do not select this check box until your tests have been successfully completed and
you want to enable the interface for your users for the transmission of documents to the
EPO.
Page 68 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
4.10.6 Filing settings
The sections EP-Filing and PCT-Filing in the System Preferences window contain
information on the software version, the date of installation and the options for sending
applications. You can define the settings individually for each procedure installed.

The EPO recommends Online (online filing over the internet) as the default setting for
filing applications.
The Physical Media option is an alternative for sending applications over a secure internet
connection. You can burn data to a CD- or DVD-ROM and send it by post or courier to the
EPO. This might be suitable for very large files (e.g. extremely long sequence listings) that
would take considerable time to transfer over an internet connection.
Figure 75: Settings for EP filing, "Online" send method
The default setting can be changed to Physical Media.
Figure 76: Settings for EP filing, "Physical Media" send method
The Allow CD-R filing check box is selected by default so that users always have the
opportunity to choose between Online and Physical Media when sending applications.
If this check box is cleared, Online is the only option allowed and applications cannot be filed
over physical media.
Figure 77: Settings for EP filing, CD-R filing not allowed
Page 69 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4.11
4 File Manager
User Administration
User Administration in Online Filing can be used to create individual authorisation concepts for
users and user groups. This enables you to provide details on the Online Filing system
administrator, specify which data is released in a network and which actions may be
performed in the software by individual users.
User management settings are specific to the current mode, that is, to demo mode or to
production mode, to ensure that any work in one is kept entirely separate from the other.
Enabling or disabling user management
Only a user with Administrator ID has the privilege to enable User Management in File
Manager and assign administrator rights to others. As a master user, the Administrator is
automatically created when installing the Online Filing server and cannot be deleted later.
If User Administration is enabled, users are always prompted to log on with their user name
and password when starting Online Filing.

Attention: Make sure you create a second user with full administrator rights, i.e. with
authorisation to perform user administration. The Administrator user is blocked after
three successive attempts to log on with the wrong password. If this happens, there is no
way to reset the password unless there is another user with administrator rights
configured on your system.
 Log on to File Manager with the Administrator user name.
 In the File Manager menu, click Tools > User Administration.
 If the option is unavailable, go to Tools > Preferences > Systems Preferences and
select the check box Enable User Management.
 After enabling or disabling user management, restart File Manager.
Disabling user management does not mean that your existing user-rights configuration is
deleted. If you enable user management again, the same user names and passwords apply
as before.

Once User Administration has been configured, this data can be transferred to a
different server machine running Online Filing. For more details see User Data Migration
(p. 425) in the Server Manager section.
Page 70 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Features in User Administration
There are five tabs in the User Administration window.
Tab
Description
Users
Entering details for individuals, creating passwords and assigning users to groups.
Groups
Creating groups based on company roles, or other criteria as appropriate.
Profiles
Creating lists of privileges for using the software.
Mapping
Assigning profiles to groups.
Folders *)
Assigning authorisations for individual folders to groups.
*) The Folders tab is only active if the Enable Folder Management option is selected
in System Preferences; see Security and user management (p. 62).
Changes that you have made but not yet saved in User Administration are indicated by a small
grey arrow on the right. The total number of entries with unsaved changes in the open tab is
displayed on the status bar.
 Click the Save All button to save your work in all tabs within User Administration.
 Click the Revert All button to discard all changes.
Figure 78: User Administration with unsaved entries
Page 71 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
4.11.1 Users
The Users tab lists all persons who are authorised to use Online Filing. Login names and
passwords are case sensitive, so they must be typed exactly as created in upper and lower
case.

Configure groups and profiles first and then add the individual users to the groups you
want.
Creating a new user
The Administrator and other users with user administration authorisation can create new
users and assign them privilege profiles. The Administrator is automatically created when
installing the software and cannot be renamed or deleted later.
 Click the New button on the left.
 In the middle panel enter the first name and last name.
 Enter the login name.
The login name is the one that appears as Last saved in the info pane – see Previewing
applications (p. 31) – so it should be readily identifiable to all system users.
 Enter a password for the new user.
 Enter the password once again in the Verification field.
If password policy is enabled and your proposed password does not comply with it, you will be
prompted to supply a new password once you click the Verification field; see Changing your
password (p. 75).
Figure 79: New user with login name
Adding user to a group
 Click the New button in the middle of the tab under Is Contained in the Following
Groups.
Page 72 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
The Add User to Group window opens.
 Select the group(s) for this user.
 Click Add.
The user inherits all privilege profiles assigned to these groups.
Figure 80: Adding users to a group
 Finally click the Save All button.
Modifying user data
The Administrator and other users with user-administration authorisation can change user
data if necessary. For example, if a user forgets his or her password, the Administrator can
create a new password for this user.
When users are logged in, they can change their password via Tools > Change password;
see Changing your password (p. 75).
The Administrator's name and login name cannot be modified, however. These data fields
are locked by default.
4.11.2 Unblocking users
Online Filing automatically disables a user account after three successive attempts to log on
with the wrong password.
Figure 81: Blocked user is unable to log on to File Manager
The user Administrator - or another user who is member of the Administrators group - can
unblock the user to let him log on to Online Filing again.
Page 73 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

4 File Manager
Attention: Make sure you create a second user with full administrator rights, i.e. with
authorisation to perform user administration. The Administrator user is blocked after
three successive attempts to log on with the wrong password. If this happens, there is no
way to reset the password unless there is another user with administrator rights
configured on your system.
Unblocking a user account
 Select the blocked user in User Administration.
 Clear the Account is disabled check box.
 Click the Save All button.
Figure 82: User is disabled and can be re-activated in User Administration
Blocking a user account
The administrator can, if required, also disable a specific user, assuming permanent deletion
of the user is not intended.
 Select the Account is disabled check box.
 Click the Save All button.
Unblocking the Administrator
The administrator account can also be blocked after three failed attempts to log on. To
unblock this account, another user with user management privileges must log on to File
Manager. The following message box appears when opening User Administration:
Figure 83: Message when starting User Administration with a blocked administrator account
 Click OK.
User Administration opens. The check mark in the Account is disabled check box
automatically disappears.
Page 74 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click the Save All button to complete the operation and re-activate the administrator
account.
Figure 84: Removing the block on the "Administrator" user account
4.11.3 Changing your password
When you are logged on to File Manager you can change your password.
 In the menu, click Tools > Change password.
The Change password window opens.
 Enter your old password.
 Enter your new password.
 Enter your new password a second time to confirm.
 Click OK.
Figure 85: Changing your password
Applying password policy
If password policy is enabled and your new password does not comply with it, you are
prompted to modify your new password after you click OK in the Change password window.
Page 75 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
The same warning message appears if you log on to File Manager after the password policy
has been changed and your old password no longer complies with it.
Figure 86: New password does not comply with the password policy
 To close the warning message, click OK.
 Edit your new password as required in the Change password window.

Only the following special characters are allowed:
! # $ % * + , - . / : ; = ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ { } ~
For more information, please see Password policy (p. 63).
4.11.4 Groups
The Groups tab is used to administer the user groups that were defined for your company.
You can name the groups after employee roles, such as attorneys, paralegals and assistants,
or use any other definitions that suit your requirements.
The group Administrators already exists and cannot be deleted. The Users group is also
automatically created when installing Online Filing, but can be edited as required.
Creating groups
 In the Groups tab, click the New button.
 In the middle panel enter a name in the Group Name field.
 If required, also enter a Description for the group.
Page 76 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click the Save All button.
Figure 87: New group created
As a new group does not have any privilege profiles, No privileges assigned yet appears on
the right under Summary. Privileges are assigned on the Mapping tab (see "Mapping profiles
to groups" p. 83).
Adding users or subgroups to a group
You can add individual users or even complete groups to a group.

It is not recommended to create complex group structures, i.e. groups that contain
groups containing other groups. This kind of right management can become very
confusing and may result in the authorisation of users for certain tasks they should not
be allowed to perform.
 Click the Add button in the middle of the Groups tab.
 Select Add Users or Add Groups.
The list of all registered users or groups is created. The list does not include blocked
users.
 Select all users or groups you want to add to the selected group.
Page 77 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click Add.
Figure 88: Selecting users to add to a group
 Click the Save All button.
The users or groups added inherit all authorisations of the group you just edited.
If a user tries to carry out an action in the software that is not within his rights, he will receive a
message warning him that he does not have the appropriate rights. Thus, if a user's access
rights are not sufficient to perform certain operations, the Administrator should move him or
her to a more appropriate group.
4.11.5 Profiles for group authorisations
The Profiles tab allows you to create different lists of privileges and assign them to groups.
You can use profiles to define authorisations for specific activities in the company, combine
them as required and assign them to the various user groups. You can also select individual
privileges from the list of all available privileges and modify profiles again at any time.
Changes to profile-specific privileges only take effect after you save and quit user
administration.
The privileges are grouped into four headings:
 Address Book Management
 Application Workflow
 Folder/Data Management
 User Management
Three standard profiles are created when you install the software:
 Administrators profile – this profile is mapped to the Administrators group. You cannot
deactivate the privileges under User Management nor can you delete the Administrators
profile.
Page 78 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Default administrator profile – this profile can be used as a template to provide
additional user groups with administrator rights as well as to set specific rights restrictions.
The settings under User Management can therefore be edited.
 Default user profile – this profile is suitable for user groups mainly involved in processing
applications. The Edit Maintenance Fees privilege under Folder/Data Management is
deactivated.
Apart from the restrictions specified above, you can edit and rename these three profiles as
required.

Figure 89: Individual privileges for "Default user profile" are deactivated under "Folder/Data Management"
Creating profiles
 In the Profiles tab, click the New button.
 In the middle panel enter a name in the Profile Name field.
 Click the Save All button.
Selecting privileges
The list of all privileges in the middle is available after a save. No privileges are selected by
default.
 Under Privileges for "<profile name>", double-click the text of the heading you wish to
modify.
or
Double-click the small black pointer
to the left of the heading.
 Select the check boxes you require for this profile.
 You can select an entire group of privileges by selecting the check box next to the
relevant heading.
 To close the list again, double-click the pointer .
or
Double-click the text of the heading.
Page 79 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Enter a short description of the new profile in the Description field.
Figure 90: Edit privileges for profile
4.11.6 List of privileges
Privilege
Description
Address Book Management
Create, delete and edit entries in the Address Book.
Create Contact
Add entry to Address Book.
Delete Contact
Remove entry from Address Book.
Edit Contact
Change details for an existing Address Book entry.
Application Workflow
Control tracking and management of all activities
from start to finish.
Application
Control activities on forms which can no longer be
edited.
Delete Application in "Ready to Send" state
Place application with "Ready to Send" status in Trash
folder.
Delete Application in "Ready to Sign" state
Place application with "Ready to Sign" status in Trash
folder.
Delete Application in "Sent" state
Place application with "Sent" status in Trash folder.
Move Application Back from "Ready to Send" Change status to "Ready to Sign". This action removes
to "Ready to Sign"
all signatures from application.
Page 80 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Privilege
4 File Manager
Description
Move Application Back from "Ready to Sign" Return application to "Draft" status. The application may
to "Draft"
then be edited.
Move Application from "Ready to Sign" to
"Ready to Send"
Change status to allow sending.
Remove Signature/Signatures
Allow use of Remove button for individual signatures in
signing window.
Send Application
Transmit application to EPO.
Sign Application
Apply alphabetical/facsimile/digital signature according
to signing methods supported in File Manager > Tools >
System Preferences.
View Application in "Ready to Send" State
Open application with "Ready to Send" status to display
data entered. Status cannot be changed.
View Application in "Ready to Sign" State
Open application with "Ready to Sign" status to display
data entered. Status cannot be changed.
View Application in "Sent" State
Open application with "Sent" status to display data
entered. Status cannot be changed.
Draft
Control activities relating to applications which can
still be edited.
Create Draft
Add new application based on a procedural form.
Delete Draft
Place application with "Draft" status in Trash folder.
Edit Draft
Change data entered in application with "Draft" status.
Move Draft to "Ready to Sign"
Change status of application to allow signing.
Once the application has been moved to "Ready to
Sign" it can only be edited if it is moved back to "Draft".
View Draft
Open application with "Draft" status to display data
entered. Status cannot be changed.
Template
Control activities relating to templates used to
create new drafts.
Copy template
Add a copy of an existing template.
Create template
Use an existing application or draft to save as template.
Delete template
Move a template to Trash folder.
Edit template
Open a template to modify data.
Folder/Data Management
Control activities relating to external information,
file maintenance and reference settings.
Export/Import
Control activities relating to information stored
outside the Online Filing software application.
Export Address Book
Send Address Book data to external CSV file.
Export XML (GUI)
Back up and archive Online Filing data. Send Online
Filing data to external XML files in folder or ZIP format.
Import Address Book
Bring external CSV data into Address Book.
Import XML (GUI)
Bring external XML data into Online Filing.
File Manager
Control activities related to file maintenance and
preference settings.
Change Global File Manager Settings
Set preferences for overall system usage.
Page 81 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Privilege
Description
Change Personal File Manager Settings
Set preferences for individual system usage.
Create Folder
Add a new folder for storing applications in File
Manager.
Delete Folder
Remove a folder from File Manager. The "Default"
folder cannot be deleted.
Edit Maintenance Fees
Change fees in File Manager > Tools > Fee
Management.
Empty Trash
Permanently delete any items in Trash folder.
Move To Folder
Change location where application is stored.
Rename Folder
Edit folder name.
Live Update/Start Application
Control activities relating to Online Filing system
updates.
Use Live Update - Apply
Check for software updates.
Use Live Update - Download
Bring suggested updates into your local storage area.
User Management
Control activities relating to setting up user and
group profiles and assigning system privileges in
Tools > Administration.
Group
Control activities relating to defining and managing
groups of users.
Create Group
Add a new group name.
Delete Group
Remove an existing group name.
Edit Group
Add individual users to a group or remove them.
Rename Group
Change a group name.
Modify Mapping
Control activities relating to applying privileges to
groups and individuals.
Profile
Control activities relating to assigning and
maintaining lists of privileges for users and groups.
Create Profile
Add a profile name and assign privileges to it.
Delete Profile
Remove a profile name.
Edit Profile
View and change privileges assigned to a profile.
This privilege is required for any activity relating to
creating sets of privileges, mapping privileges to users
or groups, or changing privileges.
Rename Profile
Change a profile name.
User
Control activities relating to maintaining list of
system users.
Create User
Add an individual name, enter login name and initial
password for user and assign to group.
Delete User
Remove an individual name.
Edit User
Change login name and password for user and change
group assignments.
Rename User
Change an individual's first name / last name.
Page 82 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
4.11.7 Mapping profiles to groups
The Mapping tab is where you assign the required privilege profiles to groups. The
Administrators group is mapped by default to the Administrators profile. This assignment
cannot be revoked.
 Click a group name on the left.
 Select the check box in the middle panel to assign the associated profile.
 You can assign multiple profiles to a group. This means that the group will inherit all
privileges contained in the individual profiles.
 Click the Save All button.
 To make sure each group has the privileges you intend, click each group name in turn,
and then scroll down the summary of privileges on the right.
Figure 91: Check privileges after mapping profiles to groups
4.11.8 Sharing folders with groups
In the Folders tab, you can define which of the user-defined folders in File Manager may be
accessed by which user group.
The Folders tab is only active if the Enable Folder Management check box is selected in the
System Preferences; see Security and user management (p. 62).
Page 83 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
Default folder rights
(1) The system folders All Applications, Default Folder, Forms, Templates and Trash are
visible to all users.
(2) The items contained in the Default Folder and Templates folder are accessible to all
users.
(3) The items contained in All Applications and Trash are only accessible to the user
who created them and to the Administrators group. For example, if a user creates an
application and moves it to the Trash folder, only this user or a member of the
Administrators group can see that item.
(4) The user-defined folders are accessible only to the user who created them and to the
Administrators group. The same applies for sub-folders in user-defined folders and
for sub-folders in the Templates folder.
Assigning folders to a group
To make a user-defined folder and its contents accessible to other users, a user with user
management authorisation can assign this folder to a specific user group.
 In User Administration, click the Folders tab.
All user-defined folders that were created in File Manager are listed in the window's
central pane.
 Click a group name on the left.
The folders and sub-folders that are currently accessible to the selected group are shown
on the right.
 To assign another folder to the selected group, select the corresponding check box in the
central pane.
If a parent folder is selected, all of its sub-folders are also selected, even those yet to be
created.
 To assign individual sub-folders to the selected group, double-click the relevant parent
folder.
The sub-folders are displayed.
 Select the check boxes for the relevant sub-folders, including sub-folders in the
Templates folder.
 Finally click the Save All button.
Page 84 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
The selected folders and sub-folders are then displayed on the right. This sequence
corresponds to the order in which the selected user group will see the folders in File Manager.
Figure 92: Assigning folders to a group
The assigned folders are then displayed for the users from the selected user group when they
log on to File Manager.
Page 85 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
In this example, the sub-folder 2013 was subsequently created. Because its parent folder,
Nano Enterprise, has been assigned to the Assistants group, the new sub-folder is also
automatically shared to the Assistants group.
Figure 93: Folders visible to a user through group sharing
4.12
Fee management
The Fee Management option shows you which fees are valid in Online Filing at a given date.
Fees are displayed from the effective date on the Fee Payment tab of the EP forms when a
new application is created.
Online Filing version 5.09 does not allow you to either create your own fee tables or delete
EPO fee tables. The
and
buttons are therefore deactivated.
Viewing fee tables
 In the File Manager menu, click Tools > Fee Management.
The fees are grouped on the left by type of fee and creation date.
 Click a group to see the list.
Page 86 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
The new fees that were added as supplementary options following the various fee reforms
can be found at the end of the list. The codes for these fees have a lower-case e suffix.
The forms may display both fee variants for selection, depending on the options selected
for fee payment.
Figure 94: Fee groups
Modifying fee amounts
The EPO always releases the latest revision of fees for manual download and for installation
via Live Update (p. 418). This means that you normally are not supposed to change any of the
fee information. If, however, you do need to change fees for operational reasons, you can edit
the individual amounts in the fee table. Your Online Filing user account must have the
necessary rights for this.

Attention: Once you have saved your changes, you cannot automatically reload the
original amounts in the fee tables. However, you can manually change the fees to bring
them into line with the EPO's latest schedule of fees.
 Select the fee you want on the right-hand side of the list.
 Click the amount you want to change in the New amount column.
The field is opened for editing.
 Enter the new amount as a whole number.
 Click the Revert All button to discard changes.
Page 87 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 Click the Save All button to apply the changes.
Figure 95: New fee amount entered
4.13
Maintenance table viewer
The maintenance tables allow you to view lists of standard data, e.g. filing offices and
depositary institutions. Maintenance tables cannot be edited. The EPO makes changes
available via Live Update.
 In the File Manager menu, click Tools > Maintenance Table Viewer, and then select the
option you require:
– Common Maintenance for a list of countries with country codes and regional
divisions.
– EP Maintenance for filing offices and other data
– PCT Maintenance for receiving offices and other data.
Depending on the national plug-ins installed, additional options are displayed.
 Select an entry on the left to display any associated data from the maintenance table on
the right, for instance, select Filing Offices.
This table also contains the URLs (internet addresses) of the production server and demo
server in the filing offices involved.
Page 88 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
4 File Manager
 To retrieve information relevant at a date in the past or in the future, select a different date
in the box in the top right corner.
Figure 96: Common Maintenance, Filing Offices Table
Page 89 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5
5 Processing applications
Processing applications
After a new draft has been created, more actions are required before the application can be
submitted to the receiving office.
This section describes the submission workflow common to all standard procedures (EP and
PCT) and explains some additional functions for data handling in Online Filing.
 The patent specification and all other accompanying documents are made available in an
appropriate format for electronic filing; see Preparing documents for attachment (p. 90).
 The application is signed by one of the methods accepted by the receiving office. A digital
signature, usually with a personal smart card and PIN, is always required in addition to
alphabetical or facsimile signatures; see Signing applications (p. 92).
 The application is sent to the receiving office, either electronically or physically; see
Sending applications (p. 106).
 Applications and templates can be exported from Online Filing for backup and archiving
purposes; see Exporting data from Online Filing (p. 109).
 Going in the other direction, previously exported items can be imported back into Online
Filing for use as a basis for new applications or for looking up information; see Importing
data into Online Filing (p. 115).
5.1
Preparing documents for attachment
Depending on the selected procedure and the type of document requested, you can select
from several file types when attaching electronic documents to a form.
File type
Document type
Procedure
PDF
All document types, default option
EP, PCT
XML (PatXML)
Patent specification; prepared with the PatXML Software,
including referenced JPG or TIF images
EP(1001E2K),
PCT/RO/101
TIFF (TIF)
Facsimile signature
EP
JPEG (JPG)
Facsimile signature
EP, PCT
TIFF (TIF)
All document types
PCT
JPEG (JPG)
All document types
PCT
TXT
Sequence listing
EP, PCT
APP, SEQ
Sequence listing, compliant with WIPO Annex C/ST.25
EP, PCT
ZIP
Pre-conversion archive, sequence listing
EP, PCT
Generating XML files
Various software products are available from national and international patent offices which
allow users to generate XML files which meet their standards:
 PatXML (EPO) is based on Microsoft Word®. Users can prepare their documents in the
familiar Word environment or import documents formatted using standard sections. The
file type of the finished XML files is .pxml.
Page 90 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
More information about PatXML can be found on the EPO website at Applying for a
patent > Online services > Online Filing > Download auxiliary software
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/auxiliary.html).
 PCT-SAFE Software (WIPO)
For information about this product see the WIPO website at IP Services > PCT > PCT
Electronic Filing (http://www.wipo.int/pct-safe/en/).
Images which are part of the technical documents are referenced in the XML file to be
attached and are automatically uploaded in the background. You will see these files later in
Online Filing's PDF Viewer.
Generating PDF files
The PDF format is suitable for all documents containing text or images. For example, you can
save additional descriptions and notes relating to your application to PDF files or scan original
documents not available in electronic form and convert them into PDF files.
To generate PDF documents for use in Online Filing, it is recommended that you use the
Amyuni® PDF Converter which is delivered free of charge with the Online Services starter kit
CD-ROM. The Amyuni® PDF Converter has been customised to embed all fonts (even the
copyrighted ones) and has been preset with the required paper size.
Besides Adobe Acrobat®, there are many other products on the market that generate PDF
documents. You may use any software which produces compliant PDF documents in a format
compatible with Adobe Portable Document Format version 1.4 (Acrobat version 5 or higher).
Compatibility requirements by the EPO and WIPO
The European Patent Office can only accept documents which are compliant with Annex F. A
full version of Annex F can be found on the WIPO website at IP Services > PCT > Legal Texts
(http://www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/).
Rules for Annex F-compliant PDF files
 PDF files must be compatible with Adobe PDF version 1.4 or higher.
 The text in the PDF files must not be encrypted.
 PDF files must not contain any embedded OLE objects.
 The text in PDF files must not be compressed.
 Any fonts used in the PDF file must be embedded.
 The paper size in the PDF file may exceed A4 or US letter format by up to 5%, so, sizes up
to 312 mm by 227 mm or 12.28" by 8.94" are accepted. Online Filing issues a warning if
the document's paper size is larger and will not attach the PDF file.
 A mixture of landscape and portrait formats is allowed in a file.
Rules for Annex F-compliant images
 TIFF (file type .tif)
– Only black and white images are allowed
– When saving an image as TIFF the following settings should be selected: TIFF V6.0
with Group 4 compression, single strip, Intel encoded (i.e. for IBM PC format, not
Macintosh).
Page 91 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

5 Processing applications
– Image resolution must be 300 or 400 dpi.
– The recommended maximum page size is 255 mm x 170 mm.
JPEG (file type .jpg)
– Image resolution must be 300 or 400 dpi.
– The recommended maximum page size is 255 mm x 170 mm.
Creating ZIP archives for attachment as pre-conversion archive
You can create ZIP files by using archiving software such as WinZip or WinRAR. However, the
easiest method is to use the Send to option in Windows Explorer:
 Select the files or folders you wish to archive.
 Right-click the selection and from the shortcut menu select Send to > Compressed
(zipped) folder.
The selected files or folders are packed into a new ZIP file.

5.2
The EPO does not recognise documents as legally binding if they are exclusively filed as
part of a ZIP archive. To be accepted as legally binding filings, the official patent
documents must always be attached as PDF or ST.25 files under the correct document
type.
Signing applications
Once all the mandatory information is completed, the application can be signed by users with
appropriate user rights in Online Filing.
Types of signature
The EPO accepts three legally recognised types of signature:
1. Alphabetical
The name of the signatory is entered in the electronic form via the computer keyboard;
see Alphabetical signatures (p. 95).
2. Facsimile
An electronic file containing a scanned image of a handwritten signature is attached to the
application; see Facsimile signatures (p. 97).
3. Enhanced digital signature with smart card
A personal smart card is inserted into the reader connected to the PC and the user's PIN
code is entered; see Smart cards (p. 99).
An application can contain multiple alphabetical and/or facsimile signatures. It cannot be sent,
however, until an enhanced digital signature has also been applied. No further signatures can
be added once an enhanced digital signature is added as this finalises the signing process.
Page 92 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

5 Processing applications
For more information on enhanced electronic signatures, please refer to Articles 7 and
Article 8 of the "Decision of the President of the European Patent Office dated 26
February 2009 concerning the electronic filing of documents", published in the Official
Journal EPO 3/2009, p. 182-187.
(http://archive.epo.org/epo/pubs/oj009/03_09/03_1829.pdf)
Applying a signature
A signature may be applied by any smart card user in any of the three accepted formats when
filing to the EPO.
A person applying an alphabetical or facsimile signature need not be party to or authorised in
proceedings but the signature applied must be of a person authorised and recognised by the
EPO to act in the proceedings in question. Any such signature will then need to be confirmed
by an enhanced digital signature for non-repudiation before it is sent. This confirms the identity
of the smartcard user applying any such signature (not applicable to appeal proceedings).
An enhanced digital signature using a smart card should only be applied for normal signing
purposes by a smart card holder who is authorised to act in proceedings before the EPO, for
the application being signed. The smart card signature of a smart card holder not authorised to
act in the proceedings for which that signature is applied will not be accepted as valid.
Preparing for signature
If you want an application to be signed, you must first move it to Ready to sign status in the
workflow process. There are two ways to do this while the application is still in Draft status:
 In the open application, click File > Save As > Ready to Sign.
The form view closes, leaving the application in Ready to sign status in File Manager.
or
In File Manager, select the application and click the Next button (the tool-tip indicates
"Ready to sign")
Figure 97: Moving an application from "Draft" to "Ready to Sign" status
Starting the signing process in File Manager
If the status of the application is Ready to sign, the signing process is automatically started as
the next stage in the workflow process as soon as you open the application or click the Next
button.
 Double-click the application.
or
Page 93 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
Select the application and click the Next button (the tool-tip indicates "Sign").
Figure 98: Starting the signing process from File Manager
Starting the signing process directly from draft status in the form
You can skip the Ready to sign status by activating the option Start signing immediately
when moving application forward from draft status under Confirmations (p. 58) in User
Preferences. This means that the signing dialog will be opened immediately.
 In the menu, click File > Save As > Ready to Sign and Sign.
or
Click the Next button (the tool-tip indicates "Move to Ready to Sign and Sign").
Figure 99: Tool-tip "Move to Ready to Sign and Sign"
Form PCT/RO/101 provides different functions; see Processing the PCT/RO/101 application
(p. 343) in the section on PCT/RO/101 or in the online help for form PCT/RO/101.
Signing
The PDF Viewer opens with a preview of the application. It is recommended that you use this
opportunity to check all documents for accuracy before the application is signed.
 To proceed, click Sign Now on the lower right of the PDF Viewer.
 To stop the signing process, click Cancel.
Page 94 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
This returns the application to the Ready to sign status in File Manager.
Figure 100: PDF Viewer with "Sign Now" button
5.2.1
Alphabetical signatures
In the example below, the proprietor of the patent files a submission in opposition
proceedings. The proprietor is represented by a patent attorney, whose secretary is going to
send the application to the EPO.
You, the secretary, apply an alphabetical signature on behalf of the attorney and then sign the
application with your own smart card for non-repudiation; i.e. you confirm the validity of the
alphabetical signature with your own smart card signature.
 Select the representative's name as signatory in the Sign Application window.
 Under Type of signature, select Alphabetical.
 In the Signature field, enter the name of the person enclosed in slashes, e.g. /David
Kilburn/.
 Enter the Place of signing (optional).
Page 95 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Click Sign.
Figure 101: Applying alphabetical signature for the representative
A warning appears if you accidentally remove or forget to enter the slashes in the Signature
field.
 Click OK.
The missing slashes are automatically inserted by the software.
Figure 102: Note on alphabetical signature
Other actions
 Add more signatures if required.
 To remove a signature, select the corresponding name and click Remove.
 To save the current selection for the type of signature, select the check box Save settings
as default.
This changes the Signing preferences (p. 58) in the User Preferences.
Page 96 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Click Close when ready.
Figure 103: Other options in the Sign Application window
The following message box appears while Online Filing is processing the text signature.
Figure 104: Message box that appears when a signature is being created
The Sign Application window closes automatically when the process finishes.
The status of the application remains in Ready to sign in File Manager because the sending
process cannot be initiated without an electronic signature.
5.2.2
Facsimile signatures
In this example, the applicant is a legal body and represented by an employee under Article
133(3) EPC. The facsimile signature of the employee is attached to the application.
 Prepare the signature as an image file by scanning a sheet of paper with the handwritten
text or using a pen tool to write the signature in a suitable graphics suite.
– You can use files in either TIFF (*.TIF) or JPEG (*.JPG) format. The default is TIFF.
– The file name must not contain any spaces or special characters.
Page 97 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
The signature file must be Annex F-compliant (see "Preparing documents for
attachment" p. 90).
In the Sign Application window select the relevant Applicant (if not already selected).
– The Employee name (Art. 133 EPC) field is automatically populated with the name
entered in the Names tab and cannot be edited.
– The Function of person signing field remains empty and is disabled.
Under Type of signature, select Facsimile.
Enter the Signatory Name.
To attach the image file with the signature, click Choose File, navigate to the file's storage
location and click Open to select it.
The button's label changes to Remove.
Enter the Place of signing (optional).
Click Sign.
Click Close when ready.
–







Figure 105: Facsimile signature for the applicant's employee attached in JPG format
The following message box appears while Online Filing is processing the facsimile signature.
Figure 106: Message box that appears when a signature is being created
Page 98 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
The Sign Application window closes automatically when the process finishes.
The status of the application remains in Ready to sign in File Manager because the sending
process cannot be initiated without an enhanced electronic signature.
5.2.3
Smart cards
The European Patent Office provides registered users of Online Services with smart cards for
digital signing. Smart cards are a very secure method for encrypting signatures.
Smart cards can be ordered free of charge from the EPO. Alternatively, you can register
existing smart cards with the EPO for filing. For more information, go to the EPO website at
Applying for a patent > Online services > Security > Smart cards
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/security/smart-cards.html).
The smart card is produced by a certification agency. It includes two certificates, a PKCS#7
certificate and a PKCS#11 certificate. Both contain a public and a private RSA key for the
user. The private key is only visible if a user logs on to the smart card administration tool
(GemSafe Toolbox) with the smart card PIN.
Figure 107: Inserting smart card into card reader
Security information
When an attorney leaves a company, the company should inform EPO User Support and have
the attorney's card revoked. It should also tell the EPO the identity of the attorney taking over
the relevant files. The files are then detached from the previous representative and attached to
the new one. After this has been done the previous attorney will no longer be able to see the
files as "his" assets.

Smart cards may not be shared. Each and every person in a company who has the right
to access Online Filing should apply for a personal smart card. These should not be
given to any other employee. The personal smart card allows the holder to use all EPO
Online Services for which he is authorised by his enrolment.
Signing with the smart card as an applicant or representative
A smart card signature is legally binding. You cannot add any more signatures after you sign
an application with the smart card.
Page 99 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
In this example, you, the representative, are a natural person and you sign the application
yourself.
 Select the representative in the Sign Application window.
 Under Type of signature, select Smart Card.
 Insert your personal smart card into the reader connected to your PC; see Checking the
smart card (p. 102).
 Enter your PIN code.
 Enter the Place of signing (optional).
 Click Sign.
Figure 108: Representative signing with her personal smart card and PIN code
Signing with the smart card as a legal applicant
The legal owner or director of a company may sign an application with a personal smart card,
if there is no authorised employee or representative. The function of the person signing can be
optionally specified in the signing dialog. However, the name of the smart card holder will
always appear on the PDF form to identify the signatory to the EPO.
In the example below, you, the director of a company, enter a function and sign as the
applicant.
 In the Sign Application window, select the role on the left.
The Employee name (Art. 133 EPC) field remains empty and is disabled.
 Enter the Function of person signing, e.g. Director (optional).
 Under Type of signature, select Smart Card.
 Enter the PIN code.
Page 100 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Enter the Place of signing (optional).
 Click Sign.
Figure 109: The director of a company signs as a legal applicant
Signing with the smart card as an employee under Article 133 EPC
Only an employee who is authorised to represent the applicant under Article 133 EPC is
allowed to sign an application for the applicant. That employee's name is indicated in the
Names tab of form EP(1001E2K), Euro-PCT(1200E2K) or EP(Oppo); see the corresponding
sections in this user guide.
For more legal information visit the EPO website to read the full text of Article 133 EPC
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/html/epc/2010/e/ar133.html).
The example below shows you, an employee authorised under Article 133 EPC, signing for
the opponent, legal person.
 Select the applicant on the left.
The Applicant Name and Employee Name (Art. 133 EPC) fields are automatically
populated and locked for editing.
The Function of person signing field remains empty and is disabled.
 Under Type of signature, select Smart Card.
 Enter the PIN code.
 Enter the Place of signing (optional).
Page 101 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Click Sign.
Figure 110: Employee signing for applicant/opponent under Article 133
The message box "The electronic signature is being applied …" appears while Online Filing is
processing the digital signature.
The Sign Application window closes automatically when the process finishes. The status of
the application changes to Ready to send in File Manager.
5.2.4
Checking the smart card
The Smart Card Checker tool is automatically installed together with File Manager, i.e. the
Online Filing client.
Smart Card Checker makes work easier for users signing with different types of smart card
issued by different national patent offices. Smart Card Checker automatically checks the type
and manufacturer of the smart card as soon as it is inserted in the reader, automatically finds
the correct smart card driver software on the computer and checks the registered certificates.
Smart Card Checker starts at the same time as File Manager. When active, the Smart Card
Checker icon is displayed on the Windows toolbar. The icon for the smart card reader shows a
small certificate when the user data has been successfully read from the smart card.
Figure 111: Programme icons in the Windows system tray
 Make sure that the smart card reader is connected to your computer and working properly.
Page 102 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Insert your smart card into the reader.
The green LED stops flashing and lights continuously when the smart card is operational.
 Right-click the system tray icon and select Check Smartcard.
Figure 112: Check smart card
The smart card is checked. Smart Card Checker displays the message "Smart Card
recognized".
Figure 113: Smart card recognized
If no smart card reader is connected to your computer, if the smart card is not properly inserted
or if it is invalid, Smart Card Checker will tell you that the smart card has not been recognized.
The green LED on the reader flashes if the smart card was not inserted correctly or cannot be
read. The reader's icon also shows that there is no smart card in the reader, indicating that
certificates could not be read.
Figure 114: Smart card not recognized
5.2.5

Soft certificates
The EPO does not currently accept soft certificates as an electronic signature for filings
to the EPO server. Other offices may, however, accept them for online filing. See the
website of the office concerned for details.
Signature with a soft certificate
In this example, a PCT/RO/101 application to the International Bureau as the receiving office
is digitally signed with a soft certificate issued by WIPO.
 Select the signatory in the list.
 Under Type of signature, select Soft Certificate.
 Click Choose File.
Online Filing accepts PKCS#12 certificates as files of type .p12 or .pfx.
Page 103 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
 Select the soft certificate file and click Open.
Figure 115: Selecting the soft certificate for digital signing
The button label changes to Remove.
 Enter the PIN code.
 Enter the Place of signing (optional).
 Click Sign.
Figure 116: Applicant signing with soft certificate and PIN code
Page 104 of 436
5 Processing applications
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
The following message box appears while Online Filing is processing the digital signature.
Figure 117: Message window that appears when the electronic signature is being created with a soft certificate
The Sign Application window closes automatically when the process finishes and the status
of the application changes to Ready to send in File Manager.
5.2.6
Non-repudiation signature
An application without an enhanced digital signature, i.e. which has been signed with an
alphabetical or facsimile signature but not with a smart card, must be manually changed to
Ready to send status in File Manager.
Before the application can be sent, a signature for non-repudiation is required. Applying a
non-repudiation signature not only validates the sender but also time-stamps the transaction,
so it cannot be claimed subsequently that the transaction was not authorised or was not valid.
A non-repudiation signature can only be applied with a valid smart card.
 Select the application in Ready to sign status.
 Click the Next button ("Ready to send" is displayed as the tool-tip).
The application switches to Ready to send status.
 Click the Next button ("Send" is displayed as the tool-tip).
Figure 118: Moving the application to "Send" in the workflow requires the signature for non-repudiation
The window Please sign for non-repudiation opens.
 Select the type of signature you want: Smart Card or Soft Certificate.
The default setting is Smart Card.
 Enter the PIN code of your smart card.
Page 105 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Click Sign.
Figure 119: Signing for non-repudiation
The application is signed for non-repudiation and the sending dialog appears.
5.3
Sending applications
Once you have added a digital signature to your application it is ready to be sent to the EPO. It
has moved from Ready to sign to Ready to send status.
 In File Manager, click the Ready to send status button.
 Select the application you wish to send.
 Click the Next workflow button ("Send" is displayed as the tool-tip).
The next dialog allows you to verify the selected method of sending.
 Modify the filing option or signing option, if required.
 Ensure that the transmission is going to the location you intend (demo server or
production server).
 Click Continue Sending.
Figure 120: Sending application to demo server
Page 106 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 In the Please enter PIN window, enter your PIN and then click OK.
Figure 121: Entering PIN
The application is now sent to the EPO.
A progress indicator lets you know what stage the transmission is at.
Figure 122: Progress indicator while sending application
5.3.1
Viewing receipts
When the transmission is finished, a message appears notifying you that filing has been
completed and asking if you want to view the receipt.
 Click Yes to see the PDF version of the receipt.
Figure 123: Message with option to view receipt
The acknowledgement of receipt opens in the PDF Viewer. The acknowledgement contains
the EPO application number and is stamped with the exact data and time of receipt.
You can print the receipt by clicking the Print file icon in the PDF Viewer, or you can save a
copy to your PC using the Save file icon.
 Click Close to quit the PDF Viewer.
 Any time you want to view a receipt again, select the application in File Manager and click
View... in the info pane.
or
Page 107 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
In the menu, click View > List of attached documents.
Figure 124: Viewing the acknowledgement of receipt after filing
5.3.2
Batch sending
Online Filing enables you to send more than one application at the same time.
 In File Manager, click the Ready to send status button.
 Select the first application you want to send with a click and all other individual
applications with CTRL+click.
or
Select the first application and then press SHIFT+click the last one to select all of them.
Page 108 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Click the Next workflow button ("Send" is displayed as the tool-tip).
Figure 125: Applications with "Ready to send" status selected for batch sending
The batch sending process and the process for sending single applications are basically
identical save for the following modifications:
 The warning window and the window for PIN entry only appear once.
 The window to sign for non-repudiation appears if one of the applications has not yet been
digitally signed.
 As each application is being sent, a progress indicator lets you know what stage the
transmission is at.
 The window prompting you to view the acknowledgement of receipt does not appear.
5.4
Exporting data from Online Filing
Online Filing provides different functions for exporting data from File Manager, from the form
and from Server Manager. Exporting can also be used to reduce database size by archiving
and removing applications that are no longer needed for your current work.
Exporting from File Manager
The export functions in File Manager allow the export of both multiple applications/templates
and individual items. Three options are available:
 Export Forms - select one or multiple items (EP forms, templates and PCT/RO/101
forms) in the Forms Export dialog; see Exporting items (p. 110).
Page 109 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide


5 Processing applications
Export XML to File(s) - select one or multiple items (only EP forms) in one of the File
Manager's folders. Each item is exported as a ZIP file; see Exporting data as XML to ZIP
file (p. 113).
Export XML to Folder(s) - select one or multiple items (only EP forms) in one of the File
Manager's folders. Each item is exported to a new folder; see Exporting data as XML to
folder (p. 114).
Exporting from the form view
You can export the last saved status of an application (or a template) that is currently open in
the form view. Exporting from the form is only possible while an application is still in Draft
status.
 For EP forms, two options are available:
– Export - creates a ZIP file.
– Export XML to folder - exports the data into an existing folder in your file system.
 For PCT/RO/101 forms, please refer to Exporting and importing a form (p. 347) in the
section on PCT/RO/101 or in the online help for form PCT/RO/101.
Exporting from Server Manager
The Export function in Server Manager offers extended filtering and sorting options for
preparing the range of applications to be exported; see Exporting items (p. 408) in the Server
Manager section.
Note that the Export function of Server Manager is not available for data created in the File
Manager's demo mode.
Archiving database content
Keeping a large number of applications in the Online Filing database may eventually affect the
system performance. It is therefore recommended to clear out the folders occasionally by
archiving your application data to other storage locations on your computer system.
Selecting the option Delete items from database after archiving in the Forms Export
dialog removes all selected applications from Online Filing after backup copies are made; see
Deleting items from the database after archiving (p. 112).
5.4.1
Exporting items
If you want to export any sent applications, templates, or previously prepared EP and/or PCT
forms at the same time, the recommended procedure is described below.
 In the File Manager menu, click File > Export > Forms.
All available applications are shown by default.
 Select the check boxes of the items you wish to export.
Page 110 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 Click OK.
Figure 126: Selecting individual applications for export
Online Filing navigates to the working directory specified for export in User Preferences.
 Navigate to the destination folder you require.

Each time you export an application, the Export function creates a new ZIP file and
names it according to the application's user reference. If a ZIP file of the same name
already exists in the export folder, e.g. sample_oppo.zip, the following ZIP files will be
named sample_oppo_001.zip, sample_oppo_002.zip and so on. The same applies if
two or more applications have the same user reference.
 Click OK to confirm the file location.
Figure 127: Select location for export
Page 111 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
 In the Export complete message, click OK.
 View the ZIP files in the selected export folder.
An exported ZIP file contains a number of PDF files and XML files that have been created
internally by Online Filing. In this example, the ZIP file also contains DAT files that have been
generated by the packing and signing process.
Figure 128: Exported ZIP file contents
5.4.2
Deleting items from the database after archiving
In order to free up database space, it is recommended to archive submitted applications on a
regular basis.
In this example, all Sent applications are marked for archiving. They will be removed from the
Online Filing database.
 Select the Sent folder on the left.
 Click the green check label in the list heading to select all forms.
 Select the check box Delete items from database after archiving.
 Click OK and then proceed as described in Exporting items (p. 110).
Figure 129: Select all applications with Sent status for export and deletion from the database
Page 112 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
The data can always be imported back into Online Filing via the Import functions of File
Manager or Server Manager.
After deleting applications from the database, it is advisable to use the Empty Database
function in Server Manager to clean the database and physically free up the additional space;
see Creating a new empty database (p. 408).
5.4.3
Exporting data as XML to ZIP file
Individual applications can be exported as XML files packed into a compressed ZIP file. This
operation can be carried out from File Manager or directly from an opened form.
 When in File Manager, select the application and, in the menu, click File > Export > XML
to File(s).
or
When in the form, click File > Export.
Online Filing navigates to the working directory specified for export in User Preferences.
 Edit the File name as required.
– If you are exporting from File Manager, the application's user reference is already
entered by default.
– If you are exporting from the form view, the File name field will be empty.

If the destination folder already contains a ZIP file with the same name, a warning
message will be displayed asking you if you want to replace the existing file.
 Click Save to start exporting.
The ZIP file is saved on your computer.
Figure 130: Enter file name for exporting XML to ZIP
Page 113 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5.4.4
5 Processing applications
Exporting data as XML to folder
Individual applications in Online Filing can be exported as XML files to an external folder. This
operation can be carried out from either the main File Manager interface or directly from the
form view.
 When in File Manager, select the application(s) and, in the menu, click File > Export >
XML to folder(s).
or
When in the form, click File > Export XML to folder.
Online Filing navigates to the working directory specified for export in User Preferences.
 Specify the target folder for export.
– If exporting from File Manager, the new folder will be created automatically with the
same name as the application's user reference.
– If exporting from the form view, click Make New Folder and enter a name for this
folder. If you do not do this, the exported files will be stored in the specified destination
but will not have a separate sub-folder for unique identification.
 Click OK to start exporting.
Figure 131: Export application as XML to folder
 In the Export complete message, click OK.

If the destination folder already contains folders or files with the same names, a warning
message will be displayed asking you whether existing files should be overwritten.
Page 114 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
The new folder now contains XML and PDF files created by Online Filing.
Figure 132: Exported folder containing XML and PDF files
5.5
Importing data into Online Filing
Previously exported applications can be imported back into Online Filing in File Manager or
Server Manager and through the form.
Importing applications generally resets their status to Draft. This means that Online Filing also
removes all signatures or acknowledgements of receipt from re-imported applications which
had Ready to send or Sent status before they were exported. Only when re-imported via
Server Manager do sent applications retain their Sent status.
Importing via File Manager
The Import function in File Manager allows you to import one application at a time. Importing
creates a new draft and immediately opens the form for editing.
Importing in the form view
You can create a new blank draft form and then import an application which is based on the
same procedure. Note that importing into an opened form will delete any previously entered
data.
This import function is not available for the PCT/RO/101 form.
Importing via Server Manager
The most convenient way to import multiple applications at once is to use the Import function
in Server Manager. For more details, see Importing items (p. 411) in the Server Manager
section.
The Import function of Server Manager is not available for data created in the File Manager
demo mode.
Page 115 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5.5.1
5 Processing applications
Importing data as XML from ZIP file
 When in File Manager, click File > Import > XML from File.
or
When in the form, click File > Import.
Online Filing navigates to the working directory specified for import in User Preferences.
 Select the ZIP file and click Open to start importing.
Figure 133: Import XML from ZIP file
The Create a New Application window opens.
 Enter a new user reference.
 When importing a PCT application, only unique user references are accepted.
 Select a folder, and then click Create.
Figure 134: Specify reference and folder for imported application
Page 116 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
5 Processing applications
The application then opens in the form view.
 Continue with the application and save your work as you require.
5.5.2
Importing data as XML from folder
 In the menu (File Manager or form view), click File > Import > XML from folder.
Online Filing initially navigates to the working directory specified for import in User
Preferences.
 Select the folder containing the application to be imported.
 Click OK.
Figure 135: Select folder to import application
The Create a New Application window opens.
 Enter a new user reference.
 When importing a PCT application, only unique user references are accepted.
 Select a File Manager folder and click Create.
The application then opens in the form view.
 Continue with the application and save your work as you require.
Page 117 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6
6 EP(1001E2K)
EP(1001E2K)
Form EP(1001E2K) is the default form used for requesting the grant of a European patent and
examination of the application under Article 94 EPC. The application can be filed directly to the
EPO or via one of the participating national offices.
More information about the EPC can be found on the EPO website at Law & practice > Legal
texts > European Patent Convention (http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/epc.html).
Data input in form EP(1001E2K)
Form EP(1001E2K) is organised into eight tabs. It is recommended to enter the data in the tab
sequence given, i.e. starting with the Request tab. Certain options and conditions in the
Documents tab, for instance, are determined by the selections you make in the Request tab.
Tab
What you can do
Request
Select the filing office, request examination in admissible non-EPO language,
select the procedural language, enter the title of invention, enter details of
divisional application or reference to a previously filed application.
Names
Enter details of applicant(s), representative(s), inventor(s) and authorisations.
States
Designate contracting states, extension states and validation states.
Priority
Declare national, regional or international priorities.
Biological Material
Enter details of deposited microorganisms and the depositary institution.
Documents
Attach the specification documents, their translations and other electronic files.
Fee Payment
Enter the mode of payment, select fees according to the appropriate fee
schedule.
Annotations
Supply additional information for the EPO.
Mandatory fields
A red triangle in the upper right-hand corner of a field indicates mandatory information. You
must either manually fill out this field or select one of the options provided. If mandatory fields
are not completed, the corresponding tab will show a red validation icon. Consult the
validation messages for more information.
Figure 136: Filing Office is a mandatory field in the Request tab and is marked with a red triangle
Page 118 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Elements in Form EP(1001E2K)
Figure 137: Form EP(1001E2K) - Overview
Element
Description
Menu Bar
Provides all options to edit, save, import and export applications, set
the display and change the status, as well as other tools.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Location Indicator Bar
Shows the selected procedure, the current status and the user
reference for an application.
Navigation Bar
Displays tabs corresponding to the sections of the form. These tabs
can contain sub-tabs, which are a sub-division of the main tab
sections within the form.
Details Area
Displays data entry fields appropriate to the selected tab.
Status Bar
Displays information about the current activity. Shows the total
number of validation messages for the open application.
Page 119 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6.1
6 EP(1001E2K)
EP(1001E2K) Request
The Request tab of Form EP(1001E2K) features three sub-tabs, in which you enter the
following information:
Request
 Filing office
 Language in which the request for examination is made
 Declaration under Rule 6(4)
 Waiver pursuant to Rule 70(2)
 Procedural language, i.e. language in which the form is being submitted to the EPO
 Filing language, i.e. language in which the attached application is being filed or in which a
previous application has been filed (technical documents)
 Title of the invention in English, French and German
Divisional
 Indication that it is a divisional EP application
 Application number of earlier application
 Date of filing of earlier application
 Generation of the divisional application
Reference
 Declaration that the application is an Article 61(1)(b) application
 Reference to a previously filed application
 Data relating to the previously filed application
 Various options as to how the referenced application is to be used in the procedure
6.1.1
Request details
The basic details relating to an EP(1001E2K) application are entered in the Request sub-tab
of the Request tab.
Filing office
 Select the relevant patent office from the Filing office drop-down list or enter the two
letter country code.
This information is mandatory.
 The list of filing offices includes the EPO and all national patent offices that allow
online filing with the EP(1001E2K) procedure.
Language in which the request for examination is made
Applicants who are nationals of an EPC contracting state or who have their residence or
principal place of business in an EPC contracting state can request examination in an official
Page 120 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
language of that state, if this language is an admissible non-official EPO language, i.e. if it is
not English, French or German (Article 14(4) EPC).
 If appropriate, select the check box Request for examination in admissible
non-official EPO language.
 Select the relevant language from the drop-down list.
The text "Examination of the application under Art. 94 EPC is hereby requested" is
displayed in the selected language.
Declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC
The check box for the declaration under Rule 6(4) becomes available if you select one of
these options:
 Request for examination in admissible non-official EPO language
 Admissible language of an EPC contracting state (under Filing language of
attached or previous application)
The validation messages in the Request tab (severity level 2) provide further details. If each
applicant fulfils the conditions of Rule 6(4) EPC, then you should select the corresponding
check box intended for the declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC to enable the Online Filing
software to calculate the fee reduction.
Under Rule 6(3) EPC, the EPO grants a reduction in the examination fee and filing fees if
applicants referred to in Article 14(4) EPC belong to one of the following groups specified in
Rule 6(4) EPC:
(a) small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs);
(b) natural persons; or
(c) non-profit organisations, universities or public research organisations.
 To declare that the applicant(s) fulfil the conditions of Rule 6(4), select the check box
The/Each applicant hereby declares that he is an entity or a natural person under
Rule 6(4) EPC.
 When you enter the relevant data in the Names tab, please verify that all applicants fulfil
the conditions of both Article 14(4) EPC and Rule 6(4) EPC; see Applicants (p. 129) for
more details.
If the declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC is selected and all applicants fulfil the conditions of
Article 14(4) EPC, then the reduced fees will become available in the Fee selection sub-tab:
 The examination fee (006) will be reduced by 30%.
 The filing fee (001), the additional divisional fees (522 to 525) and the additional filing fee
for the 36th and each subsequent page (501) will be reduced by 30%.
Waiver pursuant to Rule 70(2)
 If you wish, select the check box The applicant waives his right to be asked whether
he wishes to proceed further with the application (Rule 70 (2)).
This waiver does not apply until after payment of the examination fee. If you select
Automatic debit order in the Fee Payment tab, fee 006 will be paid automatically. If you
select another mode of payment, you should select fee 006 manually in the Fee selection
Page 121 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
sub-tab. A validation message to that effect (Severity 3) is displayed in the Fee Payment
tab.
Figure 138: Request for examination in Italian
Procedural language
At the time of creating a new application, you select the procedural language from the three
official languages: English, French or German.
The application form will be created in this language. However, this setting has no effect on
the language of the Online Filing graphical user interface.
 If required, change the procedural language now by selecting another language from the
drop-down list.
Filing language
The filing language is the language in which the attached application is being filed or in which
a previous application has been filed, i.e. it is the language that is used in the technical
documents.
Applicants who are nationals of an EPC contracting state or who have their residence or
principal place of business in an EPC contracting state can file their application in an official
language of that state, if this language is an admissible non-official EPO language, i.e. if it is
not English, French or German (Article 14(4) EPC).
 Select the Filing language of attached or previous application from one of the three
options.
The default option is the selected procedural language.
 Select either Admissible language of an EPC contracting state or Other language to
activate the corresponding drop-down list.
 Select the appropriate language.
Figure 139: Example in which the procedural language is English and the technical documents are in an admissible
language of an EPC contracting state (in this case Italian)
Page 122 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Title of invention
The title of invention must be a clear and concise technical designation of the invention in the
procedural language you selected. It is advisable to supply translations in the other two official
languages so that the title of invention can be published in all three languages (Article 14
EPC). If you do not enter any translations, these will be supplied by the EPO.
 Please enter the title of invention and the translations in capital letters.
 To harmonise patent bibliographic data, as of 1 April 2015 the EPO’s systems will
automatically convert all titles and their translations to uppercase for all new applications
filed.
 In the Request sub-tab enter the Title of invention in English.
 Enter the Translation into French and the Translation into German.
 The sequence in which the fields for the title of invention and the translations appear
will change if you change the procedural language. You should therefore make sure that
each language version is in the correct field.
Figure 140: Title of invention in English, French and German
6.1.2
Divisional application
Divisional applications can only be filed with the EPO. If you selected a different filing office in
the Request sub-tab, you will not be able to enter any data in the Divisional sub-tab.

European divisional applications must be filed while the earlier European application is
still pending (Rule 36 EPC).
 Select the Divisional application check box.
This activates the sub-tab for editing. All fields are mandatory.
 Enter the Application number of earlier application.
 Enter the Date of filing (Art. 80/Rule 40 EPC).
 From the drop-down list next to This divisional application is of the following
generation, select the appropriate option.
 The EPO charges an additional fee as part of the filing fee for divisional applications of
the second or any subsequent generation; see Fee selection (p. 168).
Page 123 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Figure 141: Entering details of divisional application

If you change the Date of filing (Art. 80/Rule 40 EPC) in the Divisional sub-tab under
the Request tab, all of the designation states and none of the extension and validation
states will be selected, i.e. the default settings appear and any states previously
expressly selected in respect of the applicant(s) are lost. If this happens, please click the
States tab and select the states again as appropriate. The yellow validation icon in the
States tab notifies you of a warning message to this effect.
Requesting the EPO to copy the sequence listing from the parent application for
search purposes
Under Rule 40(1)(c) EPC, a sequence listing that is part of the description of the divisional
application must be submitted together with the other documents making up the divisional
application, unless reference is made to a previously filed application containing a sequence
listing as part of the application (OJ EPO 2013, 542).
If you have submitted a Standard-compliant sequence listing in computer-readable format
together with the parent application, however, you can ask the EPO to use that sequence
listing for search purposes only (i.e. not as part of the description) in respect of the
divisional application.
 To ask the EPO to add a copy of the sequence listing filed for the earlier application to the
dossier and to declare that the sequence listing does not extend beyond the content of the
divisional application as originally filed, select the check box labelled The Office is
requested to add a copy [...].
6.1.3
Reference
In the Request tab's Reference sub-tab, you can make a reference to a previously filed
European or international application.
 Select the check box Reference is made to a previously filed application.
This activates the tab's other fields for editing.
Page 124 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Reference to an application previously filed with the EPO
 Select the EPO as the Office where previous application was filed.
 Select patent application as the Kind of application.
 Enter the Filing date of the previous application.
 Enter the EP application number of the previous application into the Application number
field in the format YYnnnnnn.d, i.e. including the check digit.
Figure 142: Reference to a previously filed EP application
Reference to a previous PCT application
 Select the Office where previous application was filed.
 Select PCT application as the Kind of application.
 Enter the Filing date.
 Enter the Application number of the previous PCT application in the format
PCT/CCYYYY/nnnnnn or PCT/CCYY/nnnnn.
 The 2-digit country code (CC) is automatically pre-set in the Application number field
when you select the international office from the drop-down list.
Figure 143: Reference to a previous PCT/US application
Reference to a previous international or national application
 Select the Office where previous application was filed.
 Select the Kind of application (the available options depend on the office where the
application was filed).
 Enter the Filing date.
 Enter the Application number of the previous application.
Page 125 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Hints for the correct format of this application number are shown to the right of this
field.
Figure 144: Reference to a previous international or national application
Additional options depending on other application-specific data
Figure 145: Additional options in the "Reference" sub-tab
Reference replaces claims
 Select the check box It is hereby declared that the reference to the previously filed
application also replaces the claims (Rule 57(c)), if applicable.
 Enter the appropriate Number of claims in previous application.
 Enter the Number of claims you intend to pay for (including first 15 claims).
 This indication is exclusively for the purpose of fee calculation. If you do not intend to
pay for any claims with this application, please enter 0 (zero) in this field.
If you do not enter a reference to the claims in the Request tab, you will be notified of this
oversight by an error message in the Documents tab (red validation icon). You can attach a
file with claims here or indicate that you intend to file the claims later; or you reference the
claims.
Figure 146: Error message: Claims required
Previous application is the priority document
 Select the check box Previously filed application is also a priority application, if
applicable.
Page 126 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
The warning (yellow validation icon) in both the Request and Documents tabs indicates that
a copy of the search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC must be provided.
The related document can be attached in the Documents tab; see Additional documents
(p. 162).
Figure 147: A copy of the search results must be provided
A copy of the search results does not need to be supplied if it can be assumed that it is
available to the EPO. This is the case if the previous application was filed with the EP, JP, US,
AT, GB, KR, DK or ES office (exempted offices). A message to this effect (grey validation
icon) appears.
Figure 148: Earlier applications filed with one of the exempted offices are not required to file search results
Certified copy
The check box A certified copy will be filed later is available if the selected filing office is not
the EPO. In this case, a warning (yellow validation icon) appears, indicating that a certified
copy of the previously filed application must be supplied within two months.
The warning disappears as soon as you select the check box A certified copy will be filed
later.
Figure 149: A certified copy of the previously filed application must be supplied
Sequence listing
You can specify that a sequence listing from the previously filed application should be used in
the EP procedure.
 Select the check box The description contains a sequence listing in accordance with
Rule 30(1) EPC.
In this case, you can only attach a sequence listing that complies with WIPO Standard ST.25
in the Documents tab; PDF formats are not allowed; see Sequence listings (p. 159).
Page 127 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Re-establishing rights
The check box Re-establishment of rights is active if the date of the earlier application is
more than 12 months but less than 14 months prior to the date of the present filing and you
have selected the check box Previously filed application is also a priority application. An
appropriate warning (yellow validation icon) indicates that you must request the
re-establishment of rights.
 Select the check box Re-establishment of rights.
You can attach the reasons for re-establishment in the Documents tab (see Additional
documents (p. 162)) or enter the text in the Annotations tab.
Figure 150: Re-establishment of rights must be requested and the fee paid
Art. 61(1)(b) application of earlier application
The check box Art. 61(1)(b) application of earlier application is only active if the EPO is
selected as the filing office in the Request tab and the Divisional application check box is
not selected in the Divisional tab.
6.2
EP(1001E2K) Names
The Names tab of EP(1001E2K) is where you enter details of applicants, representatives and
inventors. At least one applicant is required. Details of the inventor(s) may be filed later.
Adding names
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select a role.
Figure 151: Options for adding names
 Complete the details in the entry fields on the right or copy a name from the Address Book.
Exchanging names with the Address Book
Online Filing provides an Address Book to help you organise your names and addresses. You
can copy information from the current form to the Address Book or call up existing data from
your Address Book.
Page 128 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
(1) Storing data entered in the form in the Address Book
 Select a name (e.g. one of the applicants) and click the Copy to Address Book button.
If the data is successfully copied this is indicated in the status bar of the form.
(2) Copying data from the Address Book to the form
 Open the Address Book by clicking the Copy from Address Book button.
 Select the required name.
 Copy the data to the form by clicking the Copy records to form button.
The Address Book closes.
Removing names from the form
 Select the name to be removed on the left-hand side of the form.
 Click the Delete button.
6.2.1
Applicants
At least one applicant is required for filing. You can designate multiple natural and legal
persons as applicants. The applicant you add to the form first will also be the first-named
applicant in the patent application.
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select Applicant, Legal or Applicant, Natural.
 Enter the details for the applicant or use the Copy from Address Book button.
Page 129 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Add more applicants if required by repeating the above procedure.
Figure 152: Details of legal applicant
Address for correspondence
You can specify a separate address for correspondence with the first-named applicant if you
have not added a representative to the form. The country in the address for correspondence
must be an EPC contracting state. The address for correspondence is only valid if the country
in the applicant's main address is also an EPC contracting state.
The Address for correspondence check box is unlocked after the mandatory fields for the
first-named applicant have been completed, i.e. First Name, Last Name (or Company), City
and Country.
 Select the first-named applicant.
 Select the Address for correspondence check box.
Address for correspondence then appears in the list on the left.
Page 130 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Entering the address for correspondence is now mandatory. The red validation icon in the
Names tab notifies you of a validation message to that effect.
Figure 153: A red validation icon is visible if the address for correspondence has not yet been provided
 Click the Add button and select Address.
Note that the Representatives options have disappeared.
Figure 154: Adding address for correspondence with the first-named applicant
The first applicant's name appears under Address for Correspondence on the left and the
data entry fields become available on the right.
 Edit the address information as required.
– The applicant's name cannot be edited in the address for correspondence. The
Company field (legal applicant) and the Last Name and First Name field (natural
applicant) are locked.
– If you subsequently modify the first-named applicant's name under Applicants, the
name in the address for correspondence will be updated accordingly.
Page 131 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
6 EP(1001E2K)
If you delete the first-named applicant, the address for correspondence will also be
removed from the form.
Figure 155: Separate address for correspondence with the first-named applicant
Applicant is represented by an employee
If the applicant is a company (legal person) with principal place of business in an EPC
contracting state, it can be represented by an employee. An employee can only be selected as
a representative if no other representative (legal or natural person) has been added to the
form.
 Select the check box [Company] is represented by the following employee acting
pursuant to Art. 133(3) EPC.
 Enter Last Name (mandatory field), First Name (mandatory field) and Title.
The name of this employee will be automatically filled into the Sign Application dialog
and cannot be modified. Only an employee who is authorised by the applicant under
Article 133 EPC is entitled to sign an application.
 Enter the General Authorisation number (where applicable).
Figure 156: Authorised employee representing the applicant
Page 132 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Conditions under Article 14(4) EPC for making the declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC
Under Rule 6(3) EPC, the EPO grants a reduction in the examination fee and filing fees if
applicants referred to in Article 14(4) EPC belong to one of the following groups specified in
Rule 6(4) EPC:
(a) small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs);
(b) natural persons; or
(c) non-profit organisations, universities or public research organisations.
If the check box The/Each applicant hereby declares that he is an entity or a natural
person under Rule 6(4) EPC in the Request tab is selected, the Online Filing software will
validate the data that you enter for the applicants in the Names tab and cross-check these
with the languages that you indicated in the Request tab.
To qualify for the fee reduction, all applicants have to fulfil both the above-mentioned
conditions under Rule 6(4) EPC and the following conditions under Article 14(4) EPC:
 Natural applicants must be nationals of an EPC contracting state having an admissible
non-official EPO language or residents in an EPC contracting state having an admissible
non-official EPO language.
 Legal applicants must have their principal place of business in an EPC contracting state
having an admissible non-official EPO language.
 The selected language must be both an official language of the EPC contracting state of at
least one of the applicants and an admissible non-official EPO language (i.e. it must not
be English, French or German).
The validation messages in the Request tab and Names tab will tell you how to correct your
data if these conditions are not met.
Examples
The following examples demonstrate whether the applicants indicated in the Names tab fulfil
the conditions of Article 14(4) or not – always in relation to the languages selected in the
Request tab. If the answer is yes, the applicants can select the declaration under Rule 6(4) in
order to get the fee reduction.
1. A company from the Netherlands selects Dutch as the language of the request for
examination.
Yes: Dutch is the official language in the Netherlands.
2. A natural person is a Swiss national and selects Italian as the filing language.
Yes: Italian is one of the official languages in Switzerland, along with French and
German.
3. A natural person is a national of Italy with residence in the UK and files a request for
examination in Italian.
Yes: Italian is the official language in Italy and the applicant is an Italian national.
4. A company has its principal place of business in the United Kingdom and files the request
for examination in Italian.
No: The UK is an EPC contracting state which does not have an admissible
non-official EPO language and Italian is not an official language in the UK. The
applicant does not fulfil the conditions under Article 14(4).
Page 133 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
5. The applicants are a company from Poland and a company from Italy. They select Italian
as the filing language.
Yes: Both applicants are from an EPC contracting state and Italian as the official
language of Italy is an admissible non-official EPO language. In this example, the
applicants could also choose between Polish and Italian because both languages are
admissible.
6. The applicants are a company from Poland and a company from Germany. They select
Polish as the filing language.
No: Germany is an EPC contracting state which does not have an admissible
non-official EPO language. The applicant from Germany does not fulfil the conditions
under Article 14(4).
6.2.2
Representatives
The Representative option is only available if no address for correspondence has been
entered and if the applicant is not being represented by an employee under Article 133(3)
EPC. The country of the representative must be an EPC contracting state.
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select Representative, Association, Representative, Legal Practitioner or
Representative, Authorised.
 In the Name and Address sub-tab, complete the details or copy the name from the
Address Book.
 You can add more than one representative.
Figure 157: Details of representative
Details relating to the representative's authorisation
The Authorisation sub-tab is used to provide details relating to each representative.
 Select the General Authorisation check box.
Page 134 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Select the appropriate option.
 Related documents can be attached in the Documents tab; see Additional
documents (p. 162).
Figure 158: Details relating to the general authorisation of the representative
6.2.3
Inventors
The yellow validation icon in the Names tab indicates that details of the inventor are required,
but may be filed later. You can name any number of inventors.
Applicant is also inventor
If an applicant is a natural person, the same person can also be named as an inventor.
 Select the name of the applicant on the left.
 Select the check box Applicant is also inventor at the bottom of the form.
Figure 159: The applicant is also the inventor
Page 135 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Designating one or multiple inventors
If none of the applicants is a natural person and also inventor, the inventor(s) must be named
separately.
 Click the Add button.
 Select Inventor.
or
Press CTRL+I.
 Complete the fields in the Name and Address tab or copy an entry from the Address
Book.
 Select the appropriate option to describe the legal relationship between first-named
applicant and inventor.
Figure 160: Details of inventor
Page 136 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Deceased inventor
 If one of the inventors to be designated is no longer alive, select the Deceased check box.
All the address fields except the Country field (mandatory) are locked.
Figure 161: Designating a deceased inventor
Inventor waivers Rule 19(3) and Rule 20(1) EPC
An inventor is entitled to waive both his right to be notified by the EPO under Rule 19(3) EPC
and his right to be mentioned as an inventor under Rule 20(1) EPC.
 Select the inventor concerned.
 Select the required options.
The corresponding validation messages (yellow icon) explain that each waiver must be
signed by the inventor and filed as an additional document.
Figure 162: Options for inventor waivers with corresponding validation messages
Page 137 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Online Filing automatically generates a PDF document which is pre-filled with the inventor's
and applicant's data.
 Open the PDF Viewer; see Viewing attached documents (p. 164).
 Print the waiver using the Print file icon in the PDF Viewer.
 Have the waiver signed by the inventor.
 Create a new PDF document from the signed waiver.
 Attach the waiver to the application under Additional documents (p. 162) in Form
EP(1001E2K).
or
Submit it as a subsequently filed document with Form EP(1038E) (p. 211).
Figure 163: Inventor waiver (Rule 20(1) EPC) generated by Online Filing
Public and non-public inventors
In this example, four inventors have been added to the form. One of the inventors has signed
the waiver under Rule 20(1) EPC and is therefore designated as a non-public inventor.
Note that the waiver under Rule 19(3) EPC is a non-public document in this example, because
that waiver is signed by the same non-public inventor for whom the waiver under Rule 20(1)
EPC is being filed.
Online Filing generates two separate Designation of inventor PDF forms: one for the public
inventors and one for the non-public inventors.
Page 138 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
File f1002-1.pdf lists the public inventors.
Figure 164: PDF form 1002-1with designation of public inventors
File f1002-2.pdf lists the non-public inventors.
Figure 165: PDF form 1002-2 with designation of non-public inventors
Page 139 of 436
6 EP(1001E2K)
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6.3
6 EP(1001E2K)
EP(1001E2K) States
In the States tab you can designate the countries in which you require patent protection.
 You can specify all contracting states to the EPC in the Designation sub-tab.
 You can specify the extension states you want in the Extension sub-tab.
 You can specify the validation states you want in the Validation sub-tab.
The available states displayed in the three sub-tabs are determined by
 your version of the Online Filing software (its release date and whether you have installed
any relevant updates).
 the filing date of the earlier application if your application is a divisional application. The
states available are those which were contracting states, extension states or validation
states at the time of filing of the earlier application.
 the date on which the validation agreement with the national patent office of the relevant
state has entered into force.
For the latest list of EPC contracting states, extension states and validation states see the
EPO website at About us > European Patent Organisation > Member states
(http://www.epo.org/about-us/organisation/member-states.html). The EPC contracting states
include all overseas departments and territories.

If you change the Date of filing (Art. 80/Rule 40 EPC) in the Divisional sub-tab under
the Request tab, all of the designation states and none of the extension and validation
states will be selected, i.e. the default settings appear and any states previously
expressly selected in respect of the applicant(s) are lost. If this happens, please click the
States tab and select the states again as appropriate. The yellow validation icon in the
States tab notifies you of a warning message to this effect.
Page 140 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6.3.1
6 EP(1001E2K)
Designating contracting states
In the Designation tab a list of the contracting states can be found under the heading All
states which are contracting states to the EPC at the time of filing of this application
are hereby designated. All states are automatically selected and cannot be edited.
Figure 166: All contracting states to the EPC designated
If you selected the check box Divisional application in the Divisional sub-tab you will see a
message to the effect that the list of states corresponds to the states valid for the earlier
application at the time of filing the divisional application.
Figure 167: Reference to contracting states valid at the time of filing of the earlier application
Different designations for different applicants
If more than one applicant is entered in the Names tab, you can define the designated states
for each one. You can designate all states for each applicant, or exclude certain states for one
or more applicants.
 In the Designation sub-tab select the check box Different designations for different
applicants.
Page 141 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Select an applicant from the list.
All states are automatically selected.
 Clear the check boxes for those states which you wish to exclude for the selected
applicant.
In this example AT, DE and IT have been cleared.
Figure 168: Designating different states for different applicants
 Select another applicant from the list.
All states are once again automatically selected.
 Clear the boxes for the states you wish to exclude for the selected applicant.
In this example all the check boxes have been cleared except for AT, DE, IT, MC and MT.
MC and MT are therefore designated for both applicants.
Figure 169: Designating individual states for further applicant

Payment of the designation fee means that all contracting states are designated for an
application, regardless of the individual states designated on the form. If you expressly
do not wish to designate one or more specific states for the entire application, you must
submit your request in writing to the EPO. You can attach this document to the
application in electronic format; see Attaching documents (p. 222).
Page 142 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6.3.2
6 EP(1001E2K)
Extension states
In the Extension sub-tab, select the states with extension agreements to which the patent
application filed should also be extended. Appropriate fees are payable for this extension.
 Click the Extension sub-tab.
 Select the required option and, where appropriate, the individual states required.
 Make sure you also select the extension fees for these states in the Fee Payment tab.
Figure 170: Selecting extension states
6.3.3
Validation states
In the Validation sub-tab, select the states with validation agreements to which the patent
application filed should also be extended. Appropriate fees are payable for the selected
validation states.
 Click the Validation sub-tab.
 Select the required option and, where appropriate, the individual states required.
 Make sure you also select the validation fees for these states in the Fee Payment tab.
Figure 171: Selecting validation states
Page 143 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6.4
6 EP(1001E2K)
EP(1001E2K) Priority
In the Priority tab of EP(1001E2K) you can give details of the priorities you wish to claim. You
can declare more than one priority.
Translations of priority documents can be attached in the Documents tab.
 In the Priority tab click the Add button and select National, Regional or International.
 Select the office, the type of application and the filing date.
 Enter the Application Number.
For international and regional priorities the Application Number field offers a pre-set
format for the application number, e.g.:
– PCT/US____/_____ when you select US as the receiving office of the international
application.
After the letters US enter the four digits for the year and the six digits of the application
number. The pre-set slash remains in place.
– EP________._ when you select EP as the regional office.
After the letters EP enter eight digits and the check digit for the application number.
The pre-set full stop remains in place.
For national priorities the format (where known) is shown to the right of the Application
Number field. For example, if Italy (IT) is selected as the national office, different formats
apply:
– LL YYYY A nnnnnn for patent applications from 01.01.1991 until 30.06.2016.
LL stands for the province (e.g. TO for Torino/Turin), YYYY for the year, A for patent
application and nnnnnn for the number.
– LL YYYY U nnnnnn for utility models from 01.01.1991 until 30.06.2016.
U stands for utility model.
– 10 YYYY nnnnnnnnn for patent applications from 01.07.2016 onwards.
– 20 YYYY nnnnnnnnn for utility models from 01.07.2016 onwards.
When entering national priority numbers you need not be concerned about the correct
splitting format within data strings, i.e. you can use hyphens or commas instead of spaces
as the format of the punctuation is not critical.
 Select the check box Re-establishment of rights is hereby requested if the date of
filing of the priority application is between 12 and 14 months prior to the current date.
Applications should normally be filed within 12 months of the date of filing of the claimed
priority. A yellow validation icon appears if you do not select the check box for
re-establishment of rights.
Page 144 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 To initiate accelerated processing under the PACE programme, select the check box It is
not intended to file a (further) declaration of priority.
Figure 172: Priority of a regional application with request for re-establishment of rights

To complete the priority claim, a certified copy of the previous application containing the
original of the certificate as issued by the receiving authority must be submitted within
sixteen months of the earliest priority date claimed (Rule 53(1) EPC). See also the
Decision of the President of the European Patent Office dated 17 March 2009 on the
filing of priority documents, published in OJ EPO 4/2009, 236-237.
Filing search results for priority claims
A copy of the search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC for a priority claim does not have
to be provided if the results are already available to the EPO; see also Reference (p. 124).
 If the selected office is not exempted from the obligation to file the search results, a yellow
validation icon appears in the Priority tab.
 If the selected office is exempted from the obligation, a grey validation icon appears. At
present (July 2016), these offices are EP, JP, US, AT, GB, KR, DK and ES.
 Click Choose file to attach the file with the search results.
The file is renamed PRSR-1.pdf.
The caption on the button changes to Detach file.
Page 145 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 If necessary, click Detach file to remove this file and attach a different document for this
priority declaration.
Figure 173: Declaration of national priority, reference to the search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC
6.5
EP(1001E2K) Biological Material
In the Biological Material tab of EP(1001E2K) you can give details pertaining to the biological
material used in/related to by the invention.
Sequence listings are attached in the Documents tab.
Details of the deposit of biological material
 Click the Add button and select Biology.
 In the Deposit details sub-tab enter the identification reference.
 Select the Depositary institution from the list (sorted alphabetically).
The data in the name and address field is automatically added.
Page 146 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 The corresponding reference is entered in the accession number field and all you have
to do is add your individual number.
 Under the Further details sub-tab you can attach a copy of the receipt issued by the
depositary institution and other electronic documents.
Figure 174: Details of deposited biological material
6.6
EP(1001E2K) Documents
In the Documents tab of form EP(1001E2K) you can add the mandatory parts of the
application as well as other documents. Various options are available for your documents in
the three sub-tabs Specification, Sequence listings and Additional documents.
In order to file your application, you must attach a description of the invention. The abstract,
claims and any translations required can be filed later.
The attached documents are copies of the originals. If the original changes and you wish to
include the changes in the patent application, you will need to reattach the document.
File formats
The Online Filing software offers a number of ways of attaching your technical documents in
electronic form:
1. Technical documents (description, claims, abstract and drawings) in one or more PDF
files
2. Technical documents as XML or PatXML files
3. Pre-conversion archives as ZIP files
Page 147 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
File names
On attachment, all documents are automatically renamed with standard system names, but
for ease of recognition, the original file names are stored in Online Filing and appear later both
on the form (next to the system names) as well as on the confirmation of receipt issued by the
EPO.
Attaching documents
 Click the Add button.
A list of the documents which may be attached is shown.
Figure 175: Document types for attached files
Language of the documents
The default language of the documents is English. Depending on the procedural language
selected in the Request sub-tab and the language of the application, translations into the
procedural language may additionally be requested.
In the example shown, German has been selected as the procedural language. The
application itself is in Italian. The applicant must therefore file the original application
documents in Italian along with translations into German.
Figure 176: Attaching documents in another language
Translations may be filed later if required.
 Select the check box A translation will be supplied later on the left-hand side below the
list of attached documents.
Page 148 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
The list of documents which may be attached changes accordingly.
Figure 177: Attaching documents in another language - translations to be filed later
Removing documents
 Select the document you want to remove.
 Click the Delete button.
The copy of the file stored in the database is deleted. You can then add new documents
again.
6.6.1
Attaching PDF files
You can attach one or more PDF files to your application as technical documents. For
example, you can combine all components in a single file, create a separate file for each
component or attach a number of components to multiple files. To do this, first attach a file in
the Specification sub-tab, then specify the type of document and, where applicable, enter the
page numbers for the individual components.
Example 1 - All technical document components are attached as individual PDF files
 Click the Specification sub-tab in the Documents tab.
 Click the Add button and select Technical document(s) in English.
 Navigate to the folder on your computer where you already saved the files.
 Online Filing opens the working directory that was created under Tools > User
Preferences in File Manager.
 Select the required file.
Page 149 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Click Open.
Figure 178: Navigating to where the documents you want to attach are saved
The file is attached and renamed SPECEPO-1.pdf.
 Select the check box for the component you attached (Description, for instance).
The page numbers are automatically entered in the From page: and to: fields.
Figure 179: Description added as a PDF file in the "Specification" sub-tab
Page 150 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Attach the next PDF file.
The file is renamed SPECEPO-2.pdf.
 Select the check box for the component you attached (Claims, for instance).
 When attaching claims, enter the additional data in the two mandatory fields:
– Number of claims
– Number of claims you intend to pay for (including first 15 claims).
 This indication is exclusively for the purpose of fee calculation. If you do not intend to
pay for any claims with this application, please enter 0 (zero) in this field.

If the number of claims you intend to pay for is lower than the number of claims
indicated, a yellow validation icon will appear in the Documents tab. In this case, please
specify the claims for which you intend to pay by writing a note to the EPO in the
Annotations tab.
Figure 180: Claims added – number of claims and number of claims you intend to pay for (including first 15 claims)
are entered
 Repeat the process until all components are attached.
The software automatically recognises and enters all page numbers.
 Select the appropriate check boxes for the attached documents.
 You can only attach Description, Claims or Abstract once; these check boxes are
disabled once you have attached a PDF file and you go to attach the next file. However,
you can add as many drawings as you wish.
 Enter additional data for the individual documents:
Page 151 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
–
6 EP(1001E2K)
If the abstract also contains a drawing: Figure to be Published with Abstract
If you attach drawings: Number of Drawings
Figure 181: All four technical document components are added as PDF files
Example 2 - A PDF file with more than one component is attached
 Click the Add button and select Technical document(s) in English.
 Attach the required PDF file.
The file is renamed SPECEPO-1.pdf.
 Select the check boxes for those components contained in the file (Description and
Abstract, for instance).
 Enter the page numbers in the appropriate fields.
– All pages in the document must be accounted for and there must be no overlaps.
– The order of the individual components is not important, that is, the description does
not have to appear as the first section on page 1 but can be the last section in the
document.
– Every element in the attached document must start on a new page.
Page 152 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Claims may be filed later if required.
 Select the check box It is intended to submit claims later on the left-hand side below
the list of attached documents.
Figure 182: Option to submit claims later selected
6.6.2
Attaching XML and PatXML files
You can add XML files with the file extension .xml or .pxml. The file extension .pxml indicates
that the file was generated using the PatXML software. XML files generated in accordance
with EPO standards contain the prescribed components: description, claims, abstract and
(embedded) drawings, so that no further files need to be attached. For more information about
generating XML documents see Preparing documents for attachment (p. 90).
 In the Documents tab click the Specification sub-tab.
 Click the Add button and select Technical documents in English (XML).
 Go to where your file is stored.
 Select the appropriate file type: PatXML files or XML files.
 Select the required file.
 Click Open.
The file is attached and renamed to application-body.xml.
 If applicable, enter the number of the Figure to be published with abstract.
The number of claims is identified by the software and automatically inserted.
 Enter the number of claims you intend to pay for (including first 15 claims). This data
is not imported from the XML file.
Page 153 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 This indication is exclusively for the purpose of fee calculation. If you do not intend to
pay for any claims with this application, please enter 0 (zero) in this field.
However, the number of figures is identified by the software and automatically inserted.
Figure 183: Attaching technical documents as an XML file
6.6.3
Technical documents in other languages
The options available for adding technical documents depend on the procedural language and
the filing language selected in the Request tab.
Where the language of the technical documents differs from the selected procedural
language, each document in another language must be translated into the procedural
language. Various combinations of files are available.
Example 1: Original-language technical documents are attached as a PDF file and the
translation is attached as an XML file
 In the Documents tab, click the Specification sub-tab.
 Click the Add button and select Original in Italian.
 In this example, Italian was selected as the filing language in the Request tab.
 Navigate to your PDF document and attach it.
The file is renamed SPECNONEPO.pdf.
 Enter the number of claims.
 Enter the number of claims you intend to pay for (including first 15 claims).
Page 154 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 This indication is exclusively for the purpose of fee calculation. If you do not intend to
pay for any claims with this application, please enter 0 (zero) in this field.
 Enter the number of figures.
If your document does not have any drawings, enter 0.
 If applicable, enter the number of the Figure to be published with abstract.
Figure 184: Attaching the Italian original
 Click the Add button again and select Translations into German (XML).
 In this example, German was selected as the procedural language in the Request
tab, so a translation of the original application into German is required.
 Navigate to the XML document containing the translation and add it.
Page 155 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
The file is renamed application-body.xml.
Figure 185: Attaching translation into German as XML
Example 2: Multiple PDF files are attached for originals and translations
You can attach up to two files for documents in the original language, i.e. either a PDF file
containing the complete set of documents (including drawings) or one file with the documents
and another with the drawings. If you would like to attach the drawings separately, we strongly
recommend performing the following steps in the order shown:
 Attach Drawings in Italian.
The file is renamed DRAWNONEPO.pdf.
 Enter the Number of figures.
 Next, select Original in Italian and attach the file.
The file is renamed SPECNONEPO.pdf.
 Enter all additional data.
Page 156 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 The Number of figures field is deactivated if you already attached a file with
drawings.
Figure 186: Documents added in the original language
 To attach the two documents with the translations, select the option Translation of
technical document(s) into German for each document.
 Attach the translated drawings first.
The file is renamed SPECTRANEPO-1.pdf.
 Select the check box for Drawings.
The page numbers are automatically entered in the From page: and to: fields.
 Attach the translated specification.
The file is renamed SPECTRANEPO-2.pdf.
Page 157 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Select the check boxes for Description, Claims and Abstract and enter the page
numbers for the components.
Figure 187: Documents in Italian and translations in German attached
6.6.4
Pre-conversion archive
The pre-conversion archive option allows you to add your original documents, before
converting them into PDF or XML files, as a compressed ZIP archive file. This may be helpful
if you wish to provide the EPO with your original documents in colour. The documents
contained in the ZIP file will not be publicly available nor will they be an integral part of the
visible internal procedural file, but they can be accessed for reference, e.g. in the event of
quality issues.

The EPO does not recognise documents as legally binding if they are exclusively filed as
part of a ZIP archive. To be accepted as legally binding filings, the official patent
documents must always be attached as PDF or ST.25 files under the correct document
type.
Attaching pre-conversion archive
 In the Documents tab under the Specification sub-tab click the Add button.
 Select Pre-conversion archive.
Page 158 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Navigate to where you have stored your ZIP file and select it.
 Click Open to add the file.
The file is renamed to OLF-ARCHIVE.zip.
The names of the original files from the attached pre-conversion archive are listed on the
right.
Figure 188: Attaching pre-conversion archive
6.6.5
Sequence listings
For a first filing, sequence listings must always be submitted in computer-readable format in
accordance with WIPO Standard ST.25. If the sequence listing is not available in
computer-readable format, you can submit it to the EPO first as a PDF file and subsequently
as an ST.25 file, together with an additional fee.
Computer-readable sequence listings can be attached as the following text-only file types:
 Nucleotide and Amino Acid Sequence Listing (file type .app or .seq)
 ASCII Text (file type .txt)
 Archive File Format (file type .zip)
 Click the Sequence Listings sub-tab under Documents.
 Select the check box for The European patent application contains a sequence
listing as part of the description.
Page 159 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
A red validation icon appears in the Documents tab, indicating that in order to file your
application you must attach a sequence listing either as a computer-readable file or in
PDF format.
Figure 189: A sequence listing must be filed as part of the description
Sequence listing in computer-readable format
 Select the check box In computer-readable format in accordance with WIPO
Standard ST.25.
This deactivates the In PDF format check box.
 Click Choose file...
Page 160 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Select the appropriate file type.
Figure 190: Selecting file type for sequence listing in computer-readable file format
 Navigate to the required file and attach it.
Depending on the file type selected, the file is renamed SEQLTXT.app, SEQLTXT.seq,
SEQLTXT.txt or SEQLTXT.zip.
The button's caption changes to Detach file.
Figure 191: Sequence listing in APP format attached
Sequence listings in PDF format
 Select the In PDF format check box.
This deactivates the check box In computer-readable format in accordance with
WIPO Standard ST.25.
 You cannot file a sequence listing in PDF format if you selected The description
contains a sequence listing in accordance with Rule 30(1) EPC in the Reference
(p. 124) tab under Request. In this case, the check box is deactivated and you can only
attach a file in computer-readable format.
 Click Choose file....
 Navigate to the required PDF file and attach it.
Page 161 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
The file is renamed SEQLTXT.pdf.
The button's caption changes to Detach file.
Figure 192: Sequence listing in PDF format attached
The warning (yellow validation icon) indicates that the sequence listing has to be filed later in
computer-readable format and an additional fee has to be paid to the EPO.
Figure 193: Warning following the attachment of a sequence listing in PDF format
Changing the sequence listing format
If you attach a PDF file and then decide to replace it with a computer-readable file (or vice
versa), proceed as follows:
 First, clear the check box for the currently selected format.
This detaches the current file; both check boxes are now available for selection.
 Select the check box for the required format and attach the corresponding file.
6.6.6
Additional documents
In the Additional documents sub-tab you can attach all other documents you wish to send to
the EPO, including authorisations, translations of priority documents or other documents.
Example
In this example you are going to add three documents: a translation of the priority documents,
an additional information sheet and the search results for an earlier application.
 Click the New button.
 Navigate to the required PDF file and select it.
Page 162 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Click Open to attach the file.
 From the Document type list, select the option Translation of priority documents.
The file is renamed PRIOTRAN-1.pdf.
Figure 194: Attaching translation of priority documents as an additional document
 Click the New button again to add the second additional document.
 Navigate to the PDF file and attach it.
 Select <other document> from the Document type list.
The file is renamed OTHER-1.PDF.
 To describe this document, enter the words Additional information sheet in the Type
name field.
Figure 195: Attaching additional document with description
Search results for earlier application
If your application refers to an earlier application which has been declared a priority document,
under Rule 141(1) EPC you must file the search results obtained for said earlier application if
they are not already available to the EPO. The validation message for the yellow validation
icon in the Documents tab tells you what to do; see Reference (p. 124).
 Click the New button.
 Navigate to the PDF file and attach it.
 From the Document Type list select the option Search results required under Rule
141(1) EPC for previously filed application.
The file is renamed PRSR-REF.pdf.
Figure 196: Adding search results for earlier application
Page 163 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6.6.7
6 EP(1001E2K)
Viewing attached documents
Use the Preview option to check your application as it appears in print.
 In the tool bar click the Preview button.
or
Select Preview from the Tools menu.
The application is shown in the PDF Viewer.
The attached documents are listed in Section 44 of Form EP(1001E2K) with their original file
names. On the left you can see a list of the files with their respective system names. In this
example the form is in German, because German was selected as the procedural language.
Figure 197: Previewing the application (technical documents section) in the PDF Viewer
Page 164 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Click the name of a document to view it in the PDF Viewer. Do the same to view drawings
attached as linked images together with an XML document.
Figure 198: Attached drawings shown in the PDF Viewer
6.7
EP(1001E2K) Fee Payment
In the Fee Payment tab you can select the fees associated with your application and indicate
how you wish to pay them. All fees must be paid in euros.
The fees displayed in the Fee Payment tab reflect the fee schedules located in File Manager
> Tools > Fee Management.
Make use of the Live Update function in Online Filing to ensure that your fee schedule is
always up to date. You will find the most recent fee schedule on the EPO website at Applying
for a patent > Online services, following the link Interactive schedule of fees
(http://www.epoline.org/portal/portal/default/epoline.Scheduleoffees).
For more information on EPO deposit accounts and the automatic debiting procedure, please
refer to the Official Journal 2015, supplementary publications 3:
 Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA)
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p8.html)
 Notice from the European Patent Office dated 12 February 2015 concerning revision of
the Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA) and their annexes
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p2.html)
Page 165 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Online fee payment
The EPO offers a quick and secure online fee payment service designed for holders of EPO
deposit accounts. For more information, go to the EPO website and navigate to Applying for
a patent > Online services > Online fee payment
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/fee-payment.html).
6.7.1
Payment details
In the Payment details sub-tab you can specify the mode of payment and provide details of
the account number and account holder.
You have to specify the mode of payment before you can make a payment. If you do not, no
fees will appear in the form for the EPO, even if you have selected one or more fees in the Fee
selection sub-tab.
 Automatic debit order
If you select this option the check boxes in the Fee selection sub-tab are automatically
deactivated and the total amount of the fees is shown as EUR 0.00. The EPO will
calculate the amount of the fees payable using the information you provided in your
application and will debit this amount direct from your account. With this option you cannot
select the fees yourself in the form.
 Debit from deposit account
If you choose this mode of payment, the relevant fees will be debited directly from your
EPO deposit account. If you issue a debit order during normal working hours (08.00-18.00
hrs.), you can usually view it under pending orders within about 30 minutes. The actual
deduction from your account will appear 5 to 6 days later.
 Bank transfer
As of 1 September 2014, all payments in EUR can only be transferred to the EPO's bank
account with the Commerzbank AG in Munich, Germany. The IBAN and BIC codes of the
EPO's bank account are supplied automatically when you select the Commerzbank from
the drop-down list.
 Not specified
Choose this option if you do not intend to pay fees with this form or if you are not sure how
you will be paying your fees.
The grey validation icon in the Fee Payment tab indicates that the mode of payment is
required, but may be specified later.

You are not required to enter 28 as the leading digits of the deposit account number,
since these are automatically supplied by the software. Just enter the six remaining
digits. If the deposit account number is not entered correctly, e.g. you enter more than
six digits, you will see a red validation icon in the Fee Payment tab. The corresponding
validation message tells you to verify the deposit account number. The same rule
applies to the deposit account number for reimbursement.
Page 166 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Debit from deposit account
 Select Debit from deposit account as Mode of payment.
 Enter the deposit account number.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
 Enter the name of the account holder.
 If you wish to have the fees debited from your account later than the filing date of your
application, enter the date in the Deferred execution date field.
 Hover your mouse pointer over the symbol
to the right of the Deferred execution
date field to see the Important information:
This functionality allows you to indicate explicitly that your payment order is to be
executed at a later date than the submission date.
In this case, the payment date will be deemed to be the deferred execution date, provided
that you have sufficient funds on your deposit account on that date.
Please choose the deferred execution date option only if the fees are to be debited on a
future date, as otherwise the default execution date is the date of receipt.
The deferred execution date can be a maximum of 40 days in the future.
Please ensure that the deferred execution date lies within the time limit set for paying the
selected fees.
Please note that any debit orders (standard or deferred execution) can only be revoked
until 00.00 hrs CET on the date of submission (Arrangements for deposit accounts, 7).
Figure 199: Entering payment details for deposit account
Bank transfer
 Select Bank transfer as Mode of payment.
 Select DE, Commerzbank AG, München from the list.
 This information is mandatory.
Page 167 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
The IBAN and BIC codes of the EPO's bank account are supplied automatically.
Figure 200: Selecting bank transfer as mode of payment
Further options
The Fee Payment sub-tab offers some additional options at the bottom of the screen.
 If you wish the EPO to make any reimbursements to a deposit account with the EPO,
select the corresponding check box.
This information applies to all selected modes of payment. However, if you selected
automatic debit order or debit from deposit account, you are only required to enter an
account number here if that number is different from the account number used for
payment.
 Where applicable, enter the EPO deposit account number and supply the account
holder's name.
 If you want to request a refund of the search fee, select the corresponding check box and
enter the application number of the earlier search report.
 If you need additional copies of the documents cited in the European search report,
select the corresponding check box and enter the number of copies required.
The validation message (yellow icon) informs you that the corresponding fee 055 should
also be selected. You should therefore select the check box for fee 055 in the Fee
selection sub-tab (it is not selected by default).
Figure 201: Other options for fee payment in Form EP(1001E2K)
6.7.2
Fee selection
Frequently paid fees such as the Filing fee (001) and the Fee for a European search (002)
are automatically selected and calculated by the software.
Other fees such as extension fees or the fee for additional copies of documents cited in
the search report (055) become applicable based on the selections you make in the form.
Page 168 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
The validation messages indicate which fees are to be paid.
Figure 202: Validation messages with information on the fees to be paid
 Select the check boxes of the fees to be paid.
– The relevant quantity is already entered.
– The amount to pay is automatically calculated.
– The check boxes for fees not applicable in this application are locked.
Figure 203: Selecting fees
Filtering the fees displayed
You can filter the list of fees by selecting one of the options in the Show list:
 All fees
 Selected fees only: all fees selected for the current application.
The claims fees, 015 and 015e, are selected by default and always locked. The quantity for
both fees is determined by the Number of claims you intend to pay for (including first 15
claims) field in the Documents tab and cannot be edited in the Fee selection sub-tab.
Page 169 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
Selecting the appropriate generation in the Divisional sub-tab immediately triggers the
selection of the correct fee in the Fee selection sub-tab, e.g. Additional fee for 2nd
generation (552). The check box for this fee cannot be cleared.
Figure 204: Showing selected fees only
Changing the fee quantity
The value in the Quantity column can only be edited for the following fees:
 002 - Fee for a European search - Applications filed on/after 01.07.2005
 029 - Certified copy of application; priority document
 055 - Add. copy of docs cited in search report
 501 - Additional filing fee for the 36th and each subsequent page
Editing fee amounts and reductions
If you wish to edit a fee amount or apply a specific reduction, you have to select the Edit fee
amounts check box. If you do so, please note that there will be no automatic fee correction for
this application. Depending on your selected mode of payment, the total amount shown will be
debited from your deposit account or is payable by bank transfer.
 Select the Edit fee amounts check box.
This activates the Amount EUR and Reduction fields for editing.
 Select the fee you wish to edit.
 Click in the field to be edited, in our example Amount EUR.
Page 170 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6 EP(1001E2K)
 Enter the new amount.
Figure 205: Selecting the "Edit fee amounts" option and editing the fee
 Click anywhere on the form.
The value in the Amount to pay EUR column and the total amount of the fees are
automatically recalculated.
Figure 206: Edited fee amount and updated fee total
If you want to undo changes to the fee amounts, you can restore the values from the fee table
in Online Filing.
 Clear the Edit fee amounts check box.
The original values for all fees are restored in the form.
Page 171 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
6.8
6 EP(1001E2K)
EP(1001E2K) Annotations
In the Annotations tab you can enter notes to be transmitted to the EPO.
Creating notes for the EPO
 Click the Add button and select New Note.
 Enter the relevant information in the Author, Subject and Note fields.
Figure 207: Adding a new note for the EPO
 To add notes that are not intended for the EPO, use the Internal notes (p. 43) function on
the form's toolbar.
Page 172 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is the form used for entry of an international application into the
European phase before the EPO as designated or elected office.
To file an application via the Euro-PCT procedure it must previously have been filed as an
international application via the PCT route. For more information visit the WIPO website and
go to IP Services > PCT > Legal Texts (http://www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/).
Data input in form Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Form Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is organised into seven tabs. It is recommended to enter the data
in the tab sequence given, i.e. starting with the EP-Phase tab. Certain options and conditions
in the Documents tab, for instance, are determined by the selections you make in the
EP-Phase tab.
Tab
What you can do
EP-Phase
Select the EPO's role, request examination in admissible non-EPO language,
enter details of the international application, select the ISA and IPEA
Names
Enter changes concerning applicant(s), representative(s) and authorisations
named in the international application.
States
Designate contracting states, extension states and validation states.
Biological Material
Enter details of deposited microorganisms and the depositary institution.
Documents
Attach amendments, translations of priority applications and other electronic
files.
Fee Payment
Enter the mode of payment, select fees according to the appropriate fee
schedule.
Annotations
Supply additional information for the EPO.
Mandatory fields
A red triangle in the upper right-hand corner of a field indicates mandatory information. You
must either manually fill out this field or select one of the options provided. If mandatory fields
are not completed, the corresponding tab will show a red validation icon. Consult the
validation messages for more information.
Figure 208: The PCT application number is a mandatory field in the EP Phase tab and is marked with a red triangle
Page 173 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Elements in Form Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Figure 209: Euro-PCT(1200E2K) - Overview
Element
Description
Menu Bar
Provides all options to edit, save, import and export applications, set
the display and change the status, as well as other tools.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Location Indicator Bar
Shows the selected procedure, the current status and the user
reference for an application.
Navigation Bar
Displays tabs corresponding to the sections of the form. These tabs
can contain sub-tabs, which are a sub-division of the main tab
sections within the form.
Details Area
Displays data entry fields appropriate to the selected tab.
Status Bar
Displays information about the current activity. Shows the total
number of validation messages for the open application.
Page 174 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.1
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) EP Phase
The EP Phase tab of Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is where you request examination of your
application under Article 94 EPC.
For the latest version of the EPC see the EPO website at Law & practice > Legal texts >
European Patent Convention (http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/epc.html).
The EP Phase tab contains two sections for entering data:
 Entry into the European phase (EPO as designated or elected office)
 Past Record
7.1.1
Entry into the European phase
 Select the EPO as either designated office or elected office.
Language in which the request for examination is made
Applicants who are nationals of an EPC contracting state or who have their residence or
principal place of business in an EPC contracting state can request examination in an official
language of that state, if this language is an admissible non-official EPO language, i.e. if it is
not English, French or German (Article 14(4) EPC).
 If appropriate, select the check box Request for examination in admissible
non-official EPO language.
 Select the relevant language from the drop-down list.
The text "Examination of the application under Art. 94 EPC is hereby requested" is
displayed in the selected language.
Declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC
The check box for the declaration under Rule 6(4) becomes available if you select the check
box Request for examination in admissible non-official EPO language.
The validation message in the EP Phase tab (severity level 2) provides further details. If each
applicant fulfils the conditions of Rule 6(4) EPC, then you should select the corresponding
check box intended for the declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC to enable the Online Filing
software to calculate the fee reduction.
Under Rule 6(3) EPC, the EPO grants a reduction in the examination fee and filing fees if
applicants referred to in Article 14(4) EPC belong to one of the following groups specified in
Rule 6(4) EPC:
(a) small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs);
(b) natural persons; or
(c) non-profit organisations, universities or public research organisations.
 To declare that the applicant(s) fulfil the conditions of Rule 6(4), select the check box
The/Each applicant hereby declares that he is an entity or a natural person under
Rule 6(4) EPC.
Page 175 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
To qualify for the fee reduction, all applicants have to fulfil both the above-mentioned
conditions under Rule 6(4) EPC and the following conditions under Article 14(4) EPC:
 Natural applicants must be nationals of an EPC contracting state having an admissible
non-official EPO language or residents in an EPC contracting state having an admissible
non-official EPO language.
 Legal applicants must have their principal place of business in an EPC contracting state
having an admissible non-official EPO language.
 The selected language must be both an official language of the EPC contracting state of at
least one of the applicants and an admissible non-official EPO language (i.e. it must not
be English, French or German).
 Please verify that all applicants, both those already available to the EPO from the
international application and those for whom you indicate changes in the Names tab, fulfil
these conditions. For more details, see Applicants (p. 129) in the Form EP(1001E2K)
section.
The reduction in the examination fee (006/006e) is determined by the role(s) selected for the
EPO in the Past Record (p. 177) section:
– 30% if the EPO is the designated office
– 30% if the EPO is the elected office and the IPEA is not the EPO
– 65% if the EPO is the elected office and the IPEA is the EPO.
Waiver, Rule 70(2)
 If the EPO is not selected as the International Searching Authority (ISA) and if appropriate,
select the check box The applicant waives his right to be asked under Rule 70(2) EPC
whether he wishes to proceed further with the application.
 This waiver does not apply until after payment of the examination fee; see Fee
selection (p. 206).
Waiver, Rules 161(1) or (2) and 162
 If applicable, select the check box The applicant waives his right to the
communication under Rules 161(1) or (2) and 162 EPC.
Page 176 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 This waiver does not apply until after payment of the claims fees. Account holders
participating in the automatic debiting procedure should pay any claims fees due on entry
into the European phase using another permitted mode of payment; see Payment details
(p. 204).
Figure 210: Information on entry into the European phase
7.1.2
Past Record
 Select the language of the international publication from the drop-down list.
This information is mandatory.
 Enter the number of the previous application under PCT application number.
This information is mandatory.
 Enter the PCT publication number and the EP application number where applicable.
 Enter the corresponding international filing date.
or
Select the date using the calendar icon.
The international filing date is mandatory and should match the year of the PCT
application number.
 If the year of filing is different from the year in the PCT application number, a yellow
validation icon is displayed. You can file your application to the EPO nevertheless, but
please ensure that the data you enter is correct.
 Select the appropriate International Searching Authority (ISA).
This information is mandatory.
 If the EPO is the elected office, select the appropriate International Preliminary
Examining Authority (IPEA).
Page 177 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The default option is IPEA is EPO.
Figure 211: Information on the past record in the EP Phase tab
7.2
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Names
The Names tab of Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is where you can make changes to applicant and
representative details. You can also specify an extra address for correspondence with the
first-named applicant or add a new representative. You are not required to enter any extra
data if there are no changes to either the applicant or the representative.
Additional information about applicant
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select Applicant, Legal or Applicant, Natural.
Page 178 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 Enter the details for the applicant or use the Copy from Address Book button.
Figure 212: Applicant details
Removing names from the form
 Select the name to be removed on the left-hand side of the form.
 Click the Delete button.
Address for correspondence with the applicant
You can specify a separate address for correspondence with the first-named applicant if you
have not added a representative to the form. The country in the address for correspondence
must be an EPC contracting state. The address for correspondence is only valid if the country
in the applicant's main address is also an EPC contracting state.
The Address for correspondence check box is unlocked after the mandatory fields for the
first-named applicant have been completed, i.e. First Name, Last Name (or Company), City
and Country.
 Select the first-named applicant.
 Select the Address for correspondence check box.
Address for correspondence then appears in the list on the left.
Entering the address for correspondence is now mandatory. The red validation icon in the
Names tab notifies you of a validation message to that effect.
Page 179 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 If there is no change of applicant and you just want to add a different address for
correspondence, select the check box The applicant has earlier been recorded by the
International Bureau.
 Click the Add button and select Address.
Note that the Representatives options have disappeared.
Figure 213: Adding address for correspondence with the applicant
The first applicant's name appears under Address for Correspondence on the left and the
data entry fields become available on the right.
 Edit the address information as required.
– The applicant's name cannot be edited in the address for correspondence. The
Company field (legal applicant) and the Last Name and First Name field (natural
applicant) are locked.
– If you subsequently modify the first-named applicant's name under Applicants, the
name in the address for correspondence will be updated accordingly.
Page 180 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
If you delete the first-named applicant, the address for correspondence will also be
removed from the form.
Figure 214: Address for correspondence with the applicant
Applicant is represented by an employee
If the applicant is a company (legal person) with principal place of business in an EPC
contracting state, it can be represented by an employee. An employee can only be selected as
a representative if no other representative (legal or natural person) has been added to the
form.
 Select the check box [Company] is represented by the following employee acting
pursuant to Art. 133(3) EPC.
 Enter Last Name (mandatory field), First Name (mandatory field) and Title.
The name of this employee will be automatically filled into the Sign Application dialog
and cannot be modified. Only an employee who is authorised by the applicant under
Article 133 EPC is entitled to sign an application.
 Enter the General Authorisation number (where applicable).
Figure 215: Applicant is represented by an employee
Page 181 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Representative
The Representative option is only available if no address for correspondence has been
entered and if the applicant is not being represented by an employee under Article 133(3)
EPC. The country of the representative must be an EPC contracting state.
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select Representative, Association, Representative, Legal Practitioner or
Representative, Authorised.
 In the Name and Address sub-tab, complete the details or copy the name from the
Address Book.
Figure 216: Representative (association) information entered
Authorisation
The Authorisation sub-tab is used to give details relating to the representative.
 Select the General Authorisation check box.
 Select the appropriate option.
 Related documents can be attached in the Documents tab; see Additional
documents (p. 197).
Figure 217: Entering details of authorisation for representative
Page 182 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.3
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) States
The States tab of Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is where you designate the countries in which you
wish to obtain patent protection.
For the latest list of EPC contracting states, extension states and validation states see the
EPO website at About us > European Patent Organisation > Member states
(http://www.epo.org/about-us/organisation/member-states.html). The EPC contracting states
include all overseas departments and territories.

Under the automatic debiting procedure, extension fees and validation fees will be
debited only for the states indicated here, unless the EPO is instructed otherwise before
expiry of the period for payment.
Designation
You do not have to select the designated states. All the contracting states party to the EPC at
the time of filing of the international patent application and designated in the international
application are deemed to be designated (see Article 79(1) EPC).
Figure 218: All contracting states designated
Page 183 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Extension
 Select the appropriate option.
 If required, select individual states.
 Make sure you also select the extension fees for these states in the Fee Payment tab.
Figure 219: Selection of extension states
Validation
In the Validation sub-tab, select the states with validation agreements to which the patent
application filed should also be extended. Appropriate fees are payable for the selected
validation states.
 Click the Validation sub-tab.
 Select the required option and, where appropriate, the individual states required.
 Make sure you also select the validation fees for these states in the Fee Payment tab.
Figure 220: Selecting validation states

If you change the international filing date in the EP Phase tab, none of the extension
states and validation states will be selected, i.e. the default settings appear and any
states previously expressly selected are lost. If this happens, please click the States tab
and select the states again as appropriate. The yellow validation icon in the States tab
notifies you of a warning message to this effect.
Page 184 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.4
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Biological Material
The Biological Material tab of Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is where you input details of any
biological material filed and give the name the depositary institution.
The form assumes that the invention relates to and/or uses biological material deposited
under Rule 31 EPC. For the latest version of the EPC see the EPO website at Law & practice
> Legal texts > European Patent Convention
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/epc.html).
Adding biological material details
 In the Biological Material tab, click the Add button and select Biology.
 In the Deposit details sub-tab, enter the Identification Reference.
 Select the Depositary institution from the list.
The Name and Address field data is supplied automatically.
 Enter the depositary institution code followed by your individual number in the Accession
number field.
 You can add a copy of the acknowledgement of receipt from the depositary institution or a
waiver of the right to an undertaking from the requester pursuant to Rule 33(2) EPC in the
Further details tab.
Figure 221: Deposit details for biological materials
Page 185 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.5
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Documents
The Documents tab of Euro-PCT(1200E2K) is where you confirm the documents to be used
in proceedings before the EPO. This is also where you can attach amendments, translations,
sequence listings and any additional documents.
Proceedings
In the Proceedings tab, specify which documents are to be used as a basis for proceedings in
addition to the published international application documents.
 Select the check box Enclosed amendments under Proceedings if you plan to attach
amendments.
 You can also file documents with subsequent annotations or highlighted
annotations/amendments to amended technical documents as the document type
Amendments with annotations in the Additional documents (p. 197) tab.
 Select the declaration on the priority documents, if appropriate.
The Use of Test reports check box is automatically selected and cannot be edited. It is only
selected if the options EPO as designated office and IPEA is EPO were selected on the EP
Phase tab.
Figure 222: Options for documents in proceedings
Page 186 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.5.1
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Amendments and translations
Add amendments and translations for the international application, translations of
amendments, translations of the priority application or translations of the annexes to the
international preliminary examination report in the Amendments and Translations tab.
Documents containing highlighted annotations/amendments can be attached as
Amendments with annotations in the Additional documents (p. 197) tab.
 Click the Add button.
 Select the appropriate type of document, e.g. Amendments.
The option Amendments only appears if Enclosed amendments has been selected in
the Proceedings sub-tab.
There are various different translation options depending on the data entered in the
Request tab on the role of the EPO (designated or elected office) and on the language of
the international application.
Figure 223: Selecting document category for amendments and translations
 Navigate to the PDF file location.
 Select the file and click Open to attach it.
Figure 224: Find and open a PDF file
Page 187 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 Select the check box for the component you added to the amended document, e.g.
Amended claims.
The file is renamed AMSPECEPO-1.pdf. The original file name is displayed for reference.
The number of pages is supplied automatically.
 Repeat the process to attach additional documents, e.g. the translation of the priority
application.
Figure 225: Attaching amended claims
Proceed as follows to attach a PDF file containing multiple components of the international
application's translation:
 Click the Add button and select Translation of international application.
 Attach the PDF file.
The file is renamed SPECTRANEPO-1.pdf.
Page 188 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 Select the check boxes one at a time for the components contained in the file and enter
the appropriate page numbers.
Figure 226: Amended abstract and translations attached
7.5.2
Document Overview
Enter the number of pages the individual documents contain in the Document Overview tab.
If you make reference to already-published parts of the international application, but do not
attach them, please make sure that the location and number of pages are also entered for
these documents.
This information is needed for the purpose of calculating the correct fee because the EPO
charges an extra fee for each page from the 36th onwards.
The Document Overview tab is organised into four sub-tabs:
1. Overview
2. Description
3. Claims
4. Drawings
The document part options in the various tabs differ depending on the role you selected for the
EPO (designated or elected office) and the language of the international application; see Entry
into the European phase (p. 175).
Page 189 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Overview
In the beginning, a red validation icon appears in the Documents tab if there are no
amendments or translations attached. The validation messages indicate that information on
the relevant documents is mandatory in the Description and Claims tabs.
Irrespective of the other data, the software calculates a single page by default as the minimum
page count.
Figure 227: Overview of documents' pages, one page calculated by default
Description
In this example, you have made reference to an already-published description.
 Select the check box International application as published.
 Enter the number of pages.
Page 190 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The software automatically calculates the total number of pages - description.
Figure 228: Information on the description
Claims
The EPO needs the number of patent claims for the purpose of calculating the correct fee.
Please include all claims from both the international application and subsequent amendments.
In this example, you attached a file with amended patent claims in the Amendments and
Translations tab.
 Enter the number of claims on entry into the European phase.
 Enter the number of claims you intend to pay for (including the first 15 claims).
 This indication is exclusively for the purpose of fee calculation. If you do not intend to
pay for any claims with this application, please enter 0 (zero) in this field.

If the number of claims you intend to pay for is lower than the number of claims
indicated, a yellow validation icon will appear in the Documents tab. In this case, please
specify the claims for which you intend to pay by writing a note to the EPO in the
Annotations tab.
 Select the check box Amendments on entry into the European phase and specify the
Pages from... to...
 Enter the number of pages.
Page 191 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The software automatically calculates the total number of pages - claims.
Figure 229: Information on the claims
Drawings
In this example, you make reference to the drawings in the international application.
 Select the check box International application as published.
 Use the Pages from ... to ... field to specify the location of the drawings in the
international application.
Page 192 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 Enter the number of pages.
Figure 230: Information on drawings in the international application
Total number of pages
 Finally, go to the Overview tab and check if all relevant documents are entered with the
correct number of pages.
Page 193 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
In this example, the total number of pages to be examined is 20.
Figure 231: Calculation of the total number of pages in the Document Overview tab
7.5.3
Sequence listings
The Sequence Listings tab lets you specify whether or not the international application
contains nucleotide and/or amino acid sequences. If a computer-readable sequence listing file
has not yet been submitted to the EPO, please attach the relevant electronic sequence listing
here also.
Sequence listings must always be submitted in computer-readable format in accordance with
WIPO Standard ST.25. If the sequence listing is not available in computer-readable format,
you can submit it to the EPO first as a PDF file and subsequently as an ST.25 file, together
with an additional fee.
Computer-readable sequence listings can be attached as the following text-only file types:
 Nucleotide and Amino Acid Sequence Listing (file type .app or .seq)
 ASCII Text (file type .txt)
 Archive File Format (file type .zip)
 In the Documents tab, click the Sequence Listings sub-tab.
 Select the check box for The international application discloses nucleotide and/or
amino acid sequences.
This activates the associated group of tab options for editing.
Page 194 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Reference to an existing sequence listing
The default setting is The sequence listing was filed under Rule 5.2(a) PCT, or furnished
to the EPO as ISA under Rule 13ter.1a) PCT, or it is otherwise available to the EPO, in
computer-readable format in accordance with WIPO-ST.25.
 If this is selected, there is no need to submit a sequence listing.
The options for attaching files are therefore deactivated.
No error or warning validation icon is on display in the Documents tab.
Figure 232: Reference to the sequence listing already submitted in computer-readable format
Attaching a sequence listing
 Select the check box The sequence listing is attached.
This activates the other options for editing.
A red validation icon shows in the Documents tab because, in this case, attaching a
document is mandatory.
Figure 233: Option for attaching a sequence listing selected
Page 195 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Sequence listings in computer-readable format
 Select the check box In computer-readable format in accordance with WIPO
Standard ST.25.
This deactivates the In PDF format check box.
 Click Choose file...
 Select the appropriate file type.
 Navigate to the required file and attach it.
Depending on the file type selected, the file is renamed SEQLTXT.app, SEQLTXT.seq,
SEQLTXT.txt or SEQLTXT.zip.
The caption on the button changes to Detach file.
Figure 234: Sequence listings in computer-readable format attached
Sequence listings in PDF format
 Select the In PDF format check box.
This deactivates the In computer-readable format in accordance with
WIPO-Standard ST.25 check box.
 Click Choose file...
 Navigate to the required file and attach it.
The file is renamed to SEQLTXT.pdf.
The caption on the button changes to Detach file.
Figure 235: Sequence listing in PDF format attached
Page 196 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The warning (yellow validation icon) indicates that the sequence listing has to be filed later in
computer-readable format and an additional fee has to be paid to the EPO.
Figure 236: Warning following the attachment of a sequence listing in PDF format
Changing the sequence listing format
If you attach a PDF file and then decide to replace it with a computer-readable file (or vice
versa), proceed as follows:
 First, clear the check box for the currently selected format.
This detaches the current file; both check boxes are now available for selection.
 Select the check box for the required format and attach the corresponding file.
Declarations
 If the sequence listing you attached is identical to the listing from the international
application, select the check box The sequence listing does not include matter that
goes beyond the content of the application as filed.
7.5.4
Additional documents
In the Additional Documents tab, attach all other documents that you want to submit to the
EPO:
 Authorisations
 Other documents
 Reply to written opinion
 Search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC
 Amendments with annotations
Authorisations
 Click the Add button.




Select Other document.
Navigate to the required PDF file and select it.
Click Open to attach the file.
In the Document Type list select General Authorisation or Specific Authorisation.
Page 197 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The document is renamed GENAUTH-1.pdf and SPECAUTH-1.pdf, respectively.
Figure 237: Attaching specific authorisation document
Other documents
 Click the Add button and select Other document to attach another document.
 Navigate to the required PDF file and attach it.
 Select the document type <other document> from the list.
 The file is renamed OTHER-1.pdf.
 Enter a description of the document in the Type Name field, e.g. Assignment documents.
Figure 238: Attaching a document for the change of representative as <other_document>
Replies
Provided it was chosen to act as the IPEA in the EP phase, the EPO considers all
amendments filed as a substantive reply to the written opinion on the international preliminary
examination report (IPER).
If the EPO was chosen as the designated office upon entry into the EP phase, the
amendments filed under Article 19 PCT are considered a substantive reply to the written
opinion of the International Searching Authority (ISA).
If you have drafted your own written reply, you can attach it as an additional document.
 Click the Add button.
 Select Reply to written opinion/IPER.
 Navigate to the required file and select it.
 Click Open to attach the file.
Page 198 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The file is renamed REPLYWO-1.pdf.
Figure 239: The reply to the written opinion on the international preliminary examination report (IPER) is attached
Search results
Under Rule 141(1) EPC applicants claiming a priority must on entry into the European phase
file a copy of the search results drawn up by the office of first filing if these results are not
already available to the EPO.
 Click the Add button.
 Select Search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC.
 Navigate to the required file and select it.
 Click Open to attach the file.
The file is renamed to PRSR-1.pdf.
Figure 240: Adding search results from the office of first filing
Amendments with annotations
Use this document category to file documents with subsequent annotations or highlighted
annotations/amendments to amended technical documents:
 Amended claims with annotations
 Amended description with annotations
 Amended drawings with annotations

Documents with handwritten amendments are no longer accepted (for exceptions to this
rule see the EPO Official Journal 2013, 603-604)
(http://archive.epo.org/epo/pubs/oj013/12_13/12_6033.pdf).
Page 199 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 Click the Add button.




Select Amendments with annotations.
Navigate to the required file and select it, e.g. the amended drawings with annotations.
Click Open to attach the file.
Select the document type Amended drawings with annotations from the list.
The file is renamed DRAW-HWA.pdf.
Figure 241: Amended document with annotations attached
7.5.5
Pre-conversion archive
The pre-conversion archive option allows you to add your original documents, before
converting them into PDF files, as a compressed ZIP archive file. This may be helpful if you
wish to provide the EPO with your original documents in colour. The documents contained in
the ZIP file will not be publicly available nor will they be an integral part of the visible internal
procedural file, but they can be accessed for reference, e.g. in the event of quality issues.

The EPO does not recognise documents as legally binding if they are exclusively filed as
part of a ZIP archive. To be accepted as legally binding filings, the official patent
documents must always be attached as PDF or ST.25 files under the correct document
type.
Attaching pre-conversion archive
 In the Documents tab under the Amendments and Translations sub-tab, click the Add
button.
 Select the option Pre-conversion archive.
 Navigate to your ZIP file and select it.
 Click Open to attach the file.
The file is renamed OLF-ARCHIVE.zip.
Page 200 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The names of the original files from the attached pre-conversion archive are listed on the
right.
Figure 242: Pre-conversion archive containing original documents attached
7.5.6
Previewing attached documents
You can view the list of all attached documents in the form preview.
 Click the Preview button in the toolbar.
The application is displayed in the PDF Viewer. The enclosed documents are listed with their
original file names in Section 12 of the form (epf1200.pdf).
All files are listed with their system names on the PDF Viewer's left pane.
Page 201 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 Click the name of a document in the list to the left to display it in the PDF Viewer.
Figure 243: Attachments in the PDF viewer
The number of claims and information on documents intended for proceedings before the
EPO are provided in section 6 of the PDF form. If a copy of the search results has been
attached, this is indicated in section 6.3.
Page 202 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The various translations attached are listed in section 7.
Figure 244: Number of claims and information on the use of documents in the PDF preview of Form
Euro-PCT(1200E)
7.6
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Fee Payment
In the Fee Payment tab you can select the fees associated with your application and indicate
how you wish to pay them. All fees must be paid in euros.
The fees displayed in the Fee Payment tab reflect the fee schedules located in File Manager
> Tools > Fee Management.
Make use of the Live Update function in Online Filing to ensure that your fee schedule is
always up to date. You will find the most recent fee schedule on the EPO website at Applying
for a patent > Online services, following the link Interactive schedule of fees
(http://www.epoline.org/portal/portal/default/epoline.Scheduleoffees).
For more information on EPO deposit accounts and the automatic debiting procedure, please
refer to the Official Journal 2015, supplementary publications 3:
 Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA)
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p8.html)
Page 203 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Notice from the European Patent Office dated 12 February 2015 concerning revision of
the Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA) and their annexes
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p2.html)
Online fee payment
The EPO offers a quick and secure online fee payment service designed for holders of EPO
deposit accounts. For more information, go to the EPO website and navigate to Applying for
a patent > Online services > Online fee payment
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/fee-payment.html).
7.6.1
Payment details
In the Payment details sub-tab you can specify the mode of payment and provide details of
the account number and account holder.
You have to select a mode of payment before you can pay any fees, even if you have selected
one or more fees in the Fee selection tab.
 Automatic debit order
If you select this option the check boxes in the Fee selection sub-tab are automatically
deactivated and the total amount of the fees is shown as EUR 0.00. The EPO will
calculate the amount of the fees payable using the information you provided in your
application and will debit this amount direct from your account. With this option you cannot
select the fees yourself in the form.
 Debit from deposit account
If you choose this mode of payment, the relevant fees will be debited directly from your
EPO deposit account. If you issue a debit order during normal working hours (08.00-18.00
hrs.), you can usually view it under pending orders within about 30 minutes. The actual
deduction from your account will appear 5 to 6 days later.
 Bank transfer
As of 1 September 2014, all payments in EUR can only be transferred to the EPO's bank
account with the Commerzbank AG in Munich, Germany. The IBAN and BIC codes of the
EPO's bank account are supplied automatically when you select the Commerzbank from
the drop-down list.
 Not specified
Choose this option if you do not intend to pay fees with this form or if you are not sure how
you will be paying your fees.
The grey validation icon in the Fee Payment tab indicates that the mode of payment is
required, but may be specified later.
Debit from deposit account
 Select Debit from deposit account as Mode of payment.
 Enter the deposit account number.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
 Enter the name of the account holder.
Page 204 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 If you wish to have the fees debited from your account later than the submission date of
your entry into the European phase, enter the date in the Deferred execution date field.
 Hover your mouse pointer over the symbol
to the right of the Deferred execution
date field to see the Important information:
This functionality allows you to indicate explicitly that your payment order is to be
executed at a later date than the submission date.
In this case, the payment date will be deemed to be the deferred execution date, provided
that you have sufficient funds on your deposit account on that date.
Please choose the deferred execution date option only if the fees are to be debited on a
future date, as otherwise the default execution date is the date of receipt.
The deferred execution date can be a maximum of 40 days in the future.
Please ensure that the deferred execution date lies within the time limit set for paying the
selected fees.
Please note that any debit orders (standard or deferred execution) can only be revoked
until 00.00 hrs CET on the date of submission (Arrangements for deposit accounts, 7).
Figure 245: Payment details entered

You are not required to enter 28 as the leading digits of the deposit account number,
since these are automatically supplied by the software. Just enter the six remaining
digits. If the deposit account number is not entered correctly, e.g. you enter more than
six digits, you will see a red validation icon in the Fee Payment tab. The corresponding
validation message tells you to verify the deposit account number. The same rule
applies to the deposit account number for reimbursement.
Further options
The Fee Payment sub-tab offers some additional options at the bottom of the screen.
 If you wish the EPO to make any reimbursements to a deposit account with the EPO,
select the corresponding check box.
This information applies to all selected modes of payment. However, if you selected
automatic debit order or debit from deposit account, you are only required to enter an
Page 205 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
account number here if that number is different from the account number used for
payment.
 Where applicable, enter the EPO deposit account number and supply the account
holder's name.
 If you need additional copies of the documents cited in the European search report,
select the corresponding check box and enter the number of copies required.
This check box is only available if the EPO was not selected as the International
Searching Authority (ISA) in the EP Phase tab.
Figure 246: Other options for fee payment in Form Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The validation message (yellow icon) informs you that the corresponding fee 055 should also
be selected. You should therefore select the check box for fee 055 in the Fee selection
sub-tab (it is not selected by default).
7.6.2
Fee selection
Frequently paid fees are automatically selected and calculated by the software.
The number of claims for calculating the claims fee for the 16th to the 50th claim (015), for
example, and the total number of pages used as the basis for calculating the additional filing
fee for the 36th and each subsequent page (520) are provided in the Document Overview
(p. 189) tab.
Other fees such as extension fees or the fee for additional copies of the search report (055)
become applicable based on the selections you make in the form.
The validation messages indicate which fees are to be paid.
Figure 247: Validation messages with information on the fees to be paid
 Select the check boxes of the fees to be paid.
– The relevant quantity is already entered.
– The amount to pay is automatically calculated.
Page 206 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
The check boxes for fees not applicable in this application are locked.
Figure 248: Selecting fees for payment
Filtering the fees displayed
You can filter the list of fees by selecting one of the options in the Show list:
 All fees
 Selected fees only: all fees selected for the current application.
The claims fees, 015 and 015e, are selected by default and always locked. The quantity
for both fees is determined by the Number of claims you intend to pay for (including
first 15 claims) field in the Documents tab and cannot be edited in the Fee selection
sub-tab.
Changing the fee quantity
The value in the Quantity column can only be edited for the following fees:
 002 - Fee for (supplementary) European search for applications filed on/after 01.07.2005
 002e - Fee for (supplementary) European search for applications filed before 01.07.2005
 055 - Add. copy of docs cited in search report
 121 - Fee for further processing (late performance as of acts R. 71(3))
 122 - Fee for further processing (non-fee-related cases)
 123 - Fee for further processing (late payment of a fee - 50%)
 400 - Surcharge for extension fees
 520 - Additional filing fee for the 36th and each subsequent page - entry into EP phase
Editing fee amounts
If you wish to edit a fee amount or apply a specific reduction, you have to select the Edit fee
amounts check box. If you do so, please note that there will be no automatic fee correction for
this application. Depending on your selected mode of payment, the total amount shown will be
debited from your deposit account or is payable by bank transfer.
 Select the Edit fee amounts check box.
Page 207 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
This activates the Amount EUR and Reduction fields for editing.
 Select the fee you wish to edit.
 Click in the field to be edited, in our example Reduction.
 Enter the new value.
Figure 249: Editing a fee after selecting the option to edit fee amounts
 Click anywhere in the form.
The value in the Amount to pay EUR column and the total amount of the fees will be
automatically recalculated.
Figure 250: Amount to pay and total amount of the fees updated after editing
If you want to undo changes to the fee amounts, you can restore the values from the fee table
in Online Filing.
 Clear the Edit fee amounts check box.
The original values for all fees are restored in the form.
Page 208 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.7
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) Annotations
In the Annotations tab you can enter notes to be transmitted to the EPO.
Creating notes for the EPO
 Click the Add button and select New Note.
 Enter the relevant information in the Author, Subject and Note fields.
Figure 251: Adding a new note for the EPO
 To add notes that are not intended for the EPO, use the Internal notes (p. 43) function on
the form's toolbar.
Page 209 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
7.8
7 Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
Reusing previous data for filing with Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
You can use an application already sent with the PCT/RO/101 form to create a new
application with the Euro-PCT(1200E2K) form for entry into the regional phase.
 Open File Manager and select the folder where the sent application is saved.
 Click the Sent status button.
 Select the required application - the PCT application number is displayed in the
App.number column.
 Right-click to select the option Reuse data for a subsequent filing.
Figure 252: Creating a new application for entry into the European phase (Euro-PCT(1200E2K) form) using a PCT
application already sent
The Create a New Application window opens. Enter a new user reference of your choice or
use the existing one. The Euro-PCT(1200E2K) form then opens with the following data from
the PCT application previously sent:
 PCT application number and international application date
 Designated office and international searching authority (ISA)
 Name of the first applicant
 Name of the first representative
 Language of filing of the international application
Make your amendments or enter new data and save the application. Once the application has
been successfully sent, it appears in File Manager with the same PCT application number.
Page 210 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8
8 EP(1038E)
EP(1038E)
Form EP(1038E) is used for submitting documents filed subsequently in the European patent
procedure and for other purposes:
 All subsequently filed documents should be submitted using Form EP(1038E), except
within the opposition procedure, when they should be submitted with Form EP(Oppo)
(p. 239).
 Form EP(1038) can be used to submit appeals and/or subsequently filed documents in
appeal proceedings.
 At present, the online filing option is not available for priority documents, with the
exception of US certified priority documents.
 Non-public documents can be filed with Form EP(1038E). Please note that non-public
documents may not be filed at the same time as any other documents, i.e. public
documents, or when paying a fee other than fee code 025, 026, 027, 029 or 080.
 If you want to file documents subsequently for an application already sent using the
EP(1001E2K) procedure in Online Filing, you can re-use this data directly; see Reusing
previous data for filing with EP(1038E) (p. 237).
 You can use Form EP(1038E) exclusively either to pay a fee or to supply further
information to the EPO in the form of an annotation.
Minimum requirements for subsequent filing with Form EP(1038E)
When filing with Form EP(1038E), at least one of the following actions must be performed:
 attach a document
 indicate a payment
 write an annotation.
Data input in Form EP(1038E)
Form EP(1038E) is organised into five tabs. It is recommended to decide on the general type
of the submission first, i.e. public or non-public, and then proceed with attaching
corresponding documents and selecting fees.
Tab
What you can do
Application No
Enter the EP application number to which this subsequently filed data belongs.
Names
Enter details on applicant or representative.
Documents
Attach the subsequently filed documents.
Fee Payment
Enter the mode of payment, select a fee schedule and select fees.
Annotations
Supply additional information for the EPO.
Page 211 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
Mandatory fields
A red triangle in the upper right-hand corner of a field indicates mandatory information. You
must either manually fill out this field or select one of the options provided. If mandatory fields
are not completed, the corresponding tab will show a red validation icon. Consult the
validation messages for more information.
Figure 253: The Deposit account number is a mandatory field in the Fee Payment tab and is marked with a red
triangle
Elements in Form EP(1038E)
Figure 254: Form EP(1038E) - Overview
Page 212 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
Element
Description
Menu Bar
Provides all options to edit, save, import and export applications, set
the display and change the status, as well as other tools.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Location Indicator Bar
Shows the selected procedure, the current status and the user
reference for an application.
Navigation Bar
Displays tabs corresponding to the sections of the form. These tabs
can contain sub-tabs, which are a sub-division of the main tab
sections within the form.
Details Area
Displays data entry fields appropriate to the selected tab.
Status Bar
Displays information about the current activity. Shows the total
number of validation messages for the open application.
8.1
EP(1038E) Application Number
The Application No tab of EP(1038E) is where you enter the EP application number.
The red validation icon in the tab indicates that this information is mandatory.
 Enter your EP application number in the field provided.
Figure 255: Sample EP application number
An EP application number is made up of 8 digits and 1 check digit. A check digit contains an
algorithm that verifies the other numbers entered and prevents you from entering invalid
application numbers.
Once a correct application number has been entered, the validation icon in the tab will
disappear.
8.2
EP(1038E) Names
The Names tab of EP(1038E) is where you add details for an applicant or a representative.
You can add exactly one name to the form.
Adding a name
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
Page 213 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 Select a role, e.g. Applicant, Legal.
Figure 256: Adding a name
 Enter name and address or copy an entry from the Address Book.
Once a role has been selected, the Add button becomes unavailable
Applicant is represented by an employee
If the applicant is a company (legal person) with principal place of business in an EPC
contracting state, it can be represented by an employee.
 Where applicable, select the check box [Company] is represented by the following
employee acting pursuant to Art. 133(3) EPC.
 Enter Last Name (mandatory field), First Name (mandatory field) and Title.
The name of this employee will be automatically filled into the Sign Application dialog
and cannot be modified. Only an employee who is authorised by the applicant under
Article 133 EPC is entitled to sign an application.
 Enter the General Authorisation number (where applicable).
Figure 257: Applicant's details filled in
Page 214 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
Removing names from the form
 Select the name to be removed on the left-hand side of the form.
 Click the Delete button.
8.3
EP(1038E) Documents
The Documents tab of EP(1038E) is where you attach documents subsequent to your
original filing. Please find a list of all document types currently allowed for filing with
EP(1038E) in section Document types for EP(1038E) by category (p. 215).
Initially there is a red validation icon on the Documents tab. However, if you select an option
in the Fee Payment tab, the validation icon for the Documents tab disappears, since in this
case no document is necessary.

8.3.1
Form EP(1038E) may not be used for the PCT patent grant procedure. Please use Form
PCT-SFD for filing documents subsequent to a PCT application.
Document types for EP(1038E) by category
Where available, please select the correct document type for your file attachments. This
simplifies and speeds up the internal processing of the EPO's filings. If you are unable to find
an appropriate document type in Form EP(1038E), you can select the general purpose
General enquiry document type from the Search and Examination or the All Documents
category.
The most frequently used general categories appear at the top of the list, whereas the lesser
used, more specific options appear at the bottom. The All Documents category in the bottom
section lists all available document types.

In this list, a single document type may be assigned to multiple categories to facilitate
your selection.
Top section
Filing and search
 Amended claims (clean copy)
 Amended claims with annotations
 Amended description (clean copy)
 Amended description with annotations
 Amended drawings (clean copy)
 Amended drawings with annotations
Page 215 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide






















8 EP(1038E)
Amendments before examination
Designation of inventor
Designation of inventor (non-public)
Document concerning search matters
Document concerning the priority claims
Drawings
Inventor waiver – Rule 19(3) EPC
Inventor waiver – Rule 19(3) EPC (non-public)
Inventor waiver – Rule 20(1) EPC (non-public)
Missing parts of description
Missing parts of drawings
Modified abstract
Reply to request for clarification
Reply to search opinion/written opinion/IPER
Request for extension of time limit during search procedure
Search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC
Statement of non-availability of search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC
Subsequently filed claims
Translation of previously filed application
Translation of priority document
Translation of the international preliminary examination report
US certified priority document
Search and examination
 Acknowledgement
 Authorisation of representative
 Automatic debiting
 Claims
 Document concerning fees and payments
 Document concerning microorganisms and medical inventions
 Document concerning representation
 Document concerning sequence listing, PDF
 Document concerning sequence listing, TXT
 Document concerning the applicant
 Document concerning the designation and extension of states
 Document concerning the inventorship
 English translation of the claims
 French translation of the claims
 General enquiry
 German translation of the claims
 Grounds for re-establishment of rights
 Letter relating to the search and examination procedure
 Maintenance of the application
Page 216 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

















8 EP(1038E)
Request for a decision
Request for assignment
Request for change of address
Request for change of name
Request for change of representative
Request for correction of the documents (Rule 139 EPC)
Request for further processing
Request for re-establishment of rights
Request for suspension/interruption of the procedure
Request for transfer of rights
Translation of description
Translation of text in drawings
Translation of priority document
Translation of the abstract
Waiver in respect of communication under Rule 161/162 EPC
Withdrawal of an application
Withdrawal of designated or extension states
Examination
 Document filed during examination procedure
 Letter dealing with oral proceedings
 Reply to a communication under Rule 70b EPC
 Reply to examination report
 Reply to the communication under Rule 71(3) EPC
 Request for correction/amendment of the text proposed for grant sent from 01.04.2012
 Request for correction/amendment of the text proposed for grant sent until 31.03.2012
 Request for examination
 Request for extension of time limit during examination procedure
 Withdrawal of a request for oral proceedings
Non-public
 Designation of inventor (non-public)
 Inventor waiver – Rule 19(3) EPC (non-public)
 Inventor waiver – Rule 20(1) EPC (non-public)
 Medical certificate
 Non-public annex
 PPH: documents for examination
 PPH: documents for search
 Request for accelerated search/examination
 Request for certified copies of the application
 Request for inspection of the file
 Request for participation in the Patent Prosecution Highway
Page 217 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
Appeal
 Amended claims with annotations (appeal procedure)
 Amended description with annotations (appeal procedure)
 Amended drawings with annotations (appeal procedure)
 amicus curiae (statement by third parties in the proceedings before the Enlarged Board of
Appeal in accordance with Art. 10 RPEBA)
 Annexes (other than cited documents) regarding appeal procedure
 Annexes (other than cited documents) regarding review procedure
 Cited documents during appeal procedure
 Claims (appeal procedure)
 Description (appeal procedure)
 Drawings (appeal procedure)
 Evidence in support of the appeal
 Grounds for re-establishment of rights (appeal procedure)
 Incoming letter in referral procedure
 Intervention of the assumed infringer
 Letter dealing with oral proceedings during the appeal procedure
 Letter relating to appeal procedure
 Letter relating to the review procedure
 Non-patent literature cited during the appeal procedure
 Non-patent literature filed by a third party during the appeal procedure
 Notice of appeal
 Observations by third parties (Art. 115 EPC) during the appeal procedure
 Oral proceedings: request for postponement (appeal procedure)
 Patent document cited during the appeal procedure
 Patent document filed by a third party during the appeal procedure
 Reply to appeal
 Request for extension of time limit during appeal procedure
 Request for further processing (appeal procedure)
 Request for interpreters during oral proceedings (appeal procedure)
 Request for oral proceedings (appeal procedure)
 Request for re-establishment of rights (appeal procedure)
 Statement of grounds of appeal
 Translation of statement of grounds of appeal
 Translation of notice of appeal
 Withdrawal of a request for oral proceedings (appeal procedure)
 Withdrawal of an appeal
Third-party observations
 Citations filed by a third party
 Non-patent literature filed by a third party
 Observations by third parties (Art. 115 EPC)
 Patent document filed by a third party
Page 218 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide


8 EP(1038E)
Reply from applicant/patentee regarding third party observations
Reply to communication to third party
Limitation and revocation
 Citation for the limitation procedure
 Letter regarding the translation of the limited claims
 Letter/request relating to the limitation request
 Letter/request relating to the revocation procedure
 Reply to the limitation report
 Request for revocation of patent
 Withdrawal of limitation request
Bottom section
All documents
Amendments
The "with annotations" document type is to be used for amended documents with annotations
or highlighted annotations/amendments. Documents with handwritten amendments are no
longer accepted (for exceptions to this rule see the EPO Official Journal 2013, 603-604)
(http://archive.epo.org/epo/pubs/oj013/12_13/12_6033.pdf).
 Amended claims (clean copy)
 Amended claims with annotations
 Amended description (clean copy)
 Amended description with annotations
 Amended drawings (clean copy)
 Amended drawings with annotations
 Amendments before examination
 Drawings
 Modified abstract
Applicant-representative-inventor
 Designation of inventor
 Designation of inventor (Non-public)
 Document concerning representation
 Document concerning the applicant
 Documents concerning the inventorship
 Inventor waiver – Rule 19(3) EPC
 Inventor waiver – Rule 19(3) EPC (non-public)
 Inventor waiver – Rule 20(1) EPC (non-public)
Biology
 Document concerning micro-organisms and medical inventions
Page 219 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide


Document concerning sequence listing, PDF
Document concerning sequence listing, TXT
 Use this document type for the file types .txt, .app or .seq.
Fees
 Automatic debiting
 Document concerning fees and payments
 Document concerning the designation and extension of states
Filing
 Missing parts of description
 Missing parts of drawings
 Subsequently filed claims
 Translation of previously filed application
Forms
 Authorisation of representative
 Designation of inventor
Legal Remedies
 Grounds for Re-establishment of Rights
 Request for a decision
 Request for further processing
 Request for Re-establishment of Rights
Other
 Document concerning search matters
 Letter dealing with Oral proceedings
 Letter relating to the search and examination procedure
 Withdrawal of a request for oral proceedings
Priorities
 Document concerning the priority claims
 Translation of priority document
 US certified priority document
Replies
 Acknowledgement
 Claims
 Document filed during examination procedure
 Reply to a communication under rule 70b EPC
 Reply to examination report
 Reply to request for clarification
 Reply to search opinion/written opinion/IPER
Page 220 of 436
8 EP(1038E)
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide





8 EP(1038E)
Reply to the communication under rule 71(3) EPC
Request for correction/amendment of the text proposed for grant sent from 01.04.2012
Request for correction/amendment of the text proposed for grant sent until 31.03.2012
Search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC
Statement of non-availability of search results required under Rule 141(1) EPC
Request
 General enquiry
 Maintenance of the application
 Request for assignment
 Request for certified copies of the application
 Request for change of address
 Request for change of name
 Request for change of representative
 Request for correction of the documents (Rule 139 EPC)
 Request for examination
 Request for extension of time limit during examination procedure
 Request for extension of time limit during search procedure
 Request for suspension/interruption of the procedure
 Request for transfer of rights
 Waiver in respect of communication under Rule 161/162 EPC
Translations
 English translation of the claims
 French translation of the claims
 German translation of the claims
 Translation of description
 Translation of previously filed application
 Translation of priority document
 Translation of text in drawings
 Translation of the abstract
 Translation of the international preliminary examination report
Withdrawals
 Withdrawal of an application
 Withdrawal of designated or extension states
Page 221 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8.3.2
8 EP(1038E)
Attaching documents
 In the Documents tab of EP(1038E), click the Add button.
 Navigate to the storage location of your file.
 Note this special case: If you want to attach a sequence listing file, change the option
in the files of type drop-down list from Portable Document Format (default) to ASCII
Text (file type .txt) or Nucleotide and Amino Acid Sequence Listing (file type .app or
.seq).
 Select the file and click Open.
Figure 258: Selecting document for attachment
The file is attached to the application under its original file name.
 Select the appropriate document category from the Category drop-down list.
Figure 259: Selecting category for attached document
Page 222 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 Select the appropriate document from the Document type drop-down list.
Figure 260: Selecting document type from the selected category
The file is renamed to the Online Filing default file name.
Figure 261: The attached document is renamed to the default OLF file name
Example: Designation of contracting states is withdrawn
 Click the Add button.
 Navigate to your file and attach it.
 Select the Withdrawals category.
 In the Document type list, select the option Withdrawal of designated or extension
states.
Figure 262: Request for withdrawal of designated or extension states
The document is renamed WDRADEST-1.pdf. The original file name is displayed for
reference.
Page 223 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 Repeat the process for additional documents if you want to withdraw multiple designated
states.
Figure 263: Withdrawal documents attached
8.3.3
Filing non-public documents
The Online Filing software lets you submit documents in non-public proceedings to the EPO.

You can only attach either public or non-public documents to Form EP(1038E). If you
attach non-public documents, you cannot select a fee which is only applicable for public
submissions. Please use separate forms for public and non-public submissions to the
EPO.
Click the Add button.
Navigate to your file and attach it.
Select the Non-public category.
In the Document type list, select the appropriate document type, e.g. Request for
accelerated search/examination.
 The file is renamed 1005.pdf.




Figure 264: Request for accelerated search/examination attached as non-public document
Page 224 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
If, after having attached your non-public document, you proceed to attach one of the files from
the assortment of public document types, a red validation icon appears on the Documents
button. The validation message explains the error.
Figure 265: Validation message after attaching public and non-public documents
8.3.4
Filing appeal documents
You can use the Online Filing software to file a notice of appeal and submit documents in
appeal proceedings to the EPO.

You can only attach either appeal documents or non-appeal documents to Form
EP(1038E). If you want to attach an assortment of documents, please send two
separate forms.
Click the Add button.
Navigate to your file and attach it.
Select the Appeal category.
In the Document type list, select the appropriate document type, e.g. Statement of
grounds of appeal.
 The file is renamed APPEAL-GRDS-1.pdf.




Figure 266: Statement of grounds of appeal attached under the appeal document category
Page 225 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
If, after having attached your appeal document, you then attach one of the other document
types, a red validation icon appears on the Documents button. The validation message
explains the error.
Figure 267: Validation message after attaching appeal and non-appeal documents
8.3.5
Viewing attached documents
 Click the Preview button in the toolbar.
This opens the PDF Viewer.
 Click a file name in the list on the left of the screen to display the attached document.
The example below shows two subsequently filed non-public documents.
Figure 268: Attached files in the PDF Viewer
Page 226 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8.4
8 EP(1038E)
EP(1038E) Fee Payment
Select the fees that you want to subsequently pay for the application on the EP(1038E) form's
Fee Payment tab and specify the mode of payment. The currency for all fees is EUR.

If the date of filing or of entry into the regional phase of your application is earlier than
1 April 2009 it is your responsibility to ensure that you have selected the correct
schedule of fees for the application; see Payment details (p. 227).
The fees displayed in the Fee Payment tab reflect the fee schedules located in File Manager
> Tools > Fee Management.
Make use of the Live Update function in Online Filing to ensure that your fee schedule is
always up to date. You will find the most recent fee schedule on the EPO website at Applying
for a patent > Online services, following the link Interactive schedule of fees
(http://www.epoline.org/portal/portal/default/epoline.Scheduleoffees).
For more information on EPO deposit accounts and the automatic debiting procedure, please
refer to the Official Journal 2015, supplementary publications 3:
 Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA)
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p8.html)
 Notice from the European Patent Office dated 12 February 2015 concerning revision of
the Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA) and their annexes
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p2.html)
Online fee payment
The EPO offers a quick and secure online fee payment service designed for holders of EPO
deposit accounts. For more information, go to the EPO website and navigate to Applying for
a patent > Online services > Online fee payment
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/fee-payment.html).
8.4.1
Payment details
In the Payment details sub-tab you can select a mode of payment and the schedule of fees
applicable to your application.
Mode of payment
 Select the appropriate option from the Mode of payment list.

Automatic debit order
If you select this option the check boxes in the Fee selection sub-tab are automatically
deactivated and the total amount of the fees is shown as EUR 0.00. The EPO will
calculate the amount of the fees payable using the information you provided in your
application and will debit this amount direct from your account. With this option you cannot
select the fees yourself in the form.
Page 227 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide



8 EP(1038E)
Debit from deposit account
If you choose this mode of payment, the relevant fees will be debited directly from your
EPO deposit account. If you issue a debit order during normal working hours (08.00-18.00
hrs.), you can usually view it under pending orders within about 30 minutes. The actual
deduction from your account will appear 5 to 6 days later.
Bank transfer
As of 1 September 2014, all payments in EUR can only be transferred to the EPO's bank
account with the Commerzbank AG in Munich, Germany. The IBAN and BIC codes of the
EPO's bank account are supplied automatically when you select the Commerzbank from
the drop-down list.
Not specified
Choose this option if you do not intend to pay fees with this form or if you are not sure how
you will be paying your fees.
Debit from deposit account
An EPO deposit account is required to use the options Automatic debit order or Debit from
deposit account.
 Enter the number of your deposit account and the name of the account holder.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.

You are not required to enter 28 as the leading digits of the deposit account number,
since these are automatically supplied by the software. Just enter the six remaining
digits. If the deposit account number is not entered correctly, e.g. you enter more than
six digits, you will see a red validation icon in the Fee Payment tab. The corresponding
validation message tells you to verify the deposit account number. The same rule
applies to the deposit account number for reimbursement.
 If you wish to have the fees debited from your account later than the submission date,
enter the date in the Deferred execution date field.
 Hover your mouse pointer over the symbol
to the right of the Deferred execution
date field to see the Important information:
This functionality allows you to indicate explicitly that your payment order is to be
executed at a later date than the submission date.
In this case, the payment date will be deemed to be the deferred execution date, provided
that you have sufficient funds on your deposit account on that date.
Please choose the deferred execution date option only if the fees are to be debited on a
future date, as otherwise the default execution date is the date of receipt.
The deferred execution date can be a maximum of 40 days in the future.
Please ensure that the deferred execution date lies within the time limit set for paying the
selected fees.
Page 228 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
Please note that any debit orders (standard or deferred execution) can only be revoked
until 00.00 hrs CET on the date of submission (Arrangements for deposit accounts, 7).
Figure 269: Selecting mode of payment
Selecting the correct fee schedule
The fee schedule shown in Form EP(1038) depends on the date of filing or entry into the
regional phase of the patent application to which this subsequently filed application belongs.
 Select the appropriate fee schedule option.
– (a) Date of filing or entry into regional phase on or after 01.04.2014
This is the default option.
– (b) Date of filing or entry into the regional phase from 01.04.2009 to 31.03.2014
inclusive
– (c) Date of filing or entry into the regional phase before 01.04.2009 or Euro-PCT
application with date of filing or earliest priority before 01.09.2006
Declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC
The check box for the declaration under Rule 6(4) EPC is available if the option Date of filing
or entry into the regional phase on or after 01.04.2014 is selected.
Applicants who are nationals of an EPC contracting state or who have their residence or
principal place of business in an EPC contracting state can request examination or file their
application in an official language of that state, if this language is an admissible non-official
EPO language, i.e. if it is not English, French or German (Article 14(4) EPC). They can also file
their request subsequently using Form EP(1038E).
Under Rule 6(3) EPC, the EPO grants a reduction in the examination fee and filing fees if
applicants referred to in Article 14(4) EPC belong to one of the following groups specified in
Rule 6(4) EPC:
(a) small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs);
(b) natural persons; or
(c) non-profit organisations, universities or public research organisations.
 To declare that the applicant(s) fulfil the conditions of Rule 6(4), select the check box
The/Each applicant hereby declares that he is an entity or a natural person under
Rule 6(4) EPC.
Page 229 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 To select the reduced fees applicable to your application, go to the Fee selection sub-tab.
The Fee selection (p. 230) sub-tab displays the standard fees and the optional extra fee
options with either a 30% or 65% reduction.
Figure 270: Options for selecting the correct fee schedule
Further options
The Fee Payment sub-tab offers some additional options at the bottom of the screen.
 If you wish the EPO to make any reimbursements to a deposit account with the EPO,
select the corresponding check box.
This information applies to all selected modes of payment. However, if you selected
automatic debit order or debit from deposit account, you are only required to enter an
account number here if that number is different from the account number used for
payment.
 Where applicable, enter the EPO deposit account number and supply the account
holder's name.
8.4.2
Fee selection
There is no fee selected by default in Form EP(1038E).
 Select the check boxes of the fees to be paid.
The total fee amount is automatically calculated.
Filtering the fees displayed
You can filter the list of fees by selecting one of the options in the Show list:
 All fees
Page 230 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

8 EP(1038E)
Selected fees only
Figure 271: Selecting fees
Applying fee reductions
If the declaration under Rule 6(4) check box in the Payment details sub-tab is selected, the
extra fees reduced by 30% or 65% are displayed in the fee selection table.
 The 30% reduction applies to:
– 001r - Filing fee - EP direct - online
– 001er - Filing fee - EP direct - not online
– 006r1 - Examination fee - For applications filed on/after 01.07.2005
– 006er1 - Examination fee - For applications filed before 01.07.2005 and for
international applications filed on/after 01.07.2005 without supplementary European
search report
– 501r - Additional filing fee for the 36th and each subsequent page
– 552r - Additional fee for divisional 2nd generation
– 553r - Additional fee for divisional 3rd generation
– 554r - Additional fee for divisional 4th generation
– 555r - Additional fee for divisional 5th or subsequent generation
 The 65% reduction applies to:
– 006r2 - Examination fee - For applications filed on/after 1.07.2005
– 006er2 - Examination fee - For applications filed before 01.07.2005 and for
international applications filed on/after 01.07.2005 without supplementary European
search report
Page 231 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
You can combine both standard fees and reduced fees in one application, provided that you,
the applicant(s), fulfil the conditions for fee reduction under Article 14(4) and Rule 6(4) EPC.
However, if you select a specific reduced fee, all other fee options for this fee, e.g. the
examination fee, are locked.
 Select the reduced fees individually as appropriate.
Figure 272: Selecting reduced fees for applicants under Rule 6(4)
Selecting fees when filing non-public documents
When attaching non-public documents to your application, only certain fees can be selected at
the same time. These are:
 025 - Duplicate copies of the patent certificate
 026 - Extracts from the Europ. Patent Register
 027 - Inspection of files (paper copies max. 100 pgs, electr. storage medium)
 029 - Certified copy of application; priority document
 080 - Certification of other documents
For all other fees, a separate submission is required. If you select a fee that is incompatible
with non-public filings, a red validation icon will appear in the Documents tab.
Changing the fee quantity
The value in the Quantity column can be edited for the following fees:
 002 - Fee for (supplementary) European search for applications filed on/after 01.07.2005
 002e - Fee for (supplementary) European search for applications filed before 01.07.2005
 005 - Designation fee (for applications filed before 01.04.2009)
 008 - Printing fee for 36th and each subsequent page
 015 - Claims fee for the 16th to the 50th claim (for applications filed on/after 01.04.2009) /
for the 16th and each subsequent claim (for applications filed before 01.04.2009)
 015e - Claims fee - For the 51st and each subsequent claim
 016 - Claims fee in accordance with R. 71(4) - For the 16th to the 50th claim (for
applications filed on/after 01.04.2009) / Claims fee in accordance with R. 71(4) (for
applications filed before 01.04.2009)
Page 232 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide











8 EP(1038E)
016e - Claims fee in accordance with R. 71(4) - For the 51st and each subsequent claim
025 - Duplicate copies of the patent certificate
029 - Certified copy of application; priority document
055 - Add. copy of docs cited in search report
121 - Fee for further processing (late performance as of acts R. 71(3))
122 - Fee for further processing (non-fee-related cases)
123 - Fee for further processing (late payment of a fee - 50%)
400 - Surcharge for extension fees
501 - Additional filing fee for the 36th and each subsequent page
501r - Additional filing fee for the 36th and each subsequent page (30% reduction)
520 - Additional filing fee for the 36th and each subsequent page - entry into EP phase
 Select the fee you wish to change.
 Click the Quantity field.
 Enter the new amount.
Figure 273: Changing the quantity for a selected fee
 Click anywhere on the form.
The value in the Amount to Pay EUR column and the total amount of the fees are
automatically recalculated.
Figure 274: Recalculated total of the fees selected
Page 233 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
Editing fee amounts and reductions
If you wish to edit a fee amount or apply a specific reduction, you have to select the Edit fee
amounts check box. If you do so, please note that there will be no automatic fee correction for
this application. Depending on your selected mode of payment, the total amount shown will be
debited from your deposit account or is payable by bank transfer.
 Select the Edit fee amounts check box below the fee selection table.
 Select the fee you wish to modify.
 Click in the field to be edited, Amount EUR or Reduction.
 Enter the new value.
 Click anywhere in the form.
The amounts in the column Amount to pay EUR and the total amount of the fees are
automatically recalculated.
Figure 275: Recalculated amount shown
If you want to undo changes to the fee amounts, you can restore the values from the fee table
in Online Filing.
 Clear the Edit fee amounts check box.
The original values for all fees are restored in the form.
The value in the Quantity column will not be reset, however.
8.4.3
Designation of states
The options for the designation fees depend on the fee schedule selected in the Payment
details sub-tab.
If Date of filing or entry into regional phase on or after 01.04.2014 or Date of filing or
entry into the regional phase from 01.04.2009 to 31.03.2014 inclusive is selected:
Page 234 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 Select fee 005e - Designation fee - For all Contracting States designated in the Fee
selection sub-tab.
Figure 276: All contracting states designated
If Date of filing or entry into the regional phase before 01.04.2009 or Euro-PCT
application with date of filing or earliest priority before 01.09.2006 is selected:
 Select fee 005 - Designation fee for each state designated (max. 7x).
The Designation states sub-tab becomes visible.
Figure 277: Selecting fee 005 makes the "Designation states" sub-tab visible
Page 235 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 Click the Designation states sub-tab.
 Select the appropriate option: All states or Fewer than seven.
 Select the states for which designation fees should be paid.
The number of fees and the amount to be paid are then automatically calculated in the
Fee selection tab.
Figure 278: Selecting states for designation fees
8.5
EP(1038E) Annotations
You can use Form EP(1038E) to send an annotation to the EPO without supplying any other
data or attaching a document.
In the Annotations tab you can enter notes to be transmitted to the EPO.
Creating notes for the EPO
 Click the Add button and select New Note.
Page 236 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 Enter the relevant information in the Author, Subject and Note fields.
Figure 279: Adding a new note as an annotation for the EPO
 To add notes that are not intended for the EPO, use the Internal notes (p. 43) function on
the form's toolbar.
8.6
Reusing previous data for filing with EP(1038E)
Instead of creating a new application with the EP(1038E) form, you can simply re-use the data
from the first filing you created and sent with the EP(1001E2K) form and on which the
subsequent filing should be based.
 Open File Manager and select the folder where the sent application is saved.
 Click the Sent status button.
 Select the required application - the EP application number is displayed in the
App.number column.
Page 237 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
8 EP(1038E)
 Right-click to select the option Reuse data for a subsequent filing.
Figure 280: Creating a new application for subsequently filed documents (form 1038E) using an application already
sent
The Create a New Application window opens. Enter a new user reference of your choice or
use the existing one. The EP(1038E) form then opens with the following data from the
application previously sent:
 EP application number
 Name of the first applicant
 Payment details entered
 Selected fees
Make your amendments or enter new data and save the application. Once the application has
been successfully sent, it appears in File Manager with the same EP application number.
Page 238 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9
9 EP(Oppo)
EP(Oppo)
The EP(Oppo) form is used for filing an opposition and/or submitting subsequently filed
documents in opposition proceedings (not for appeal proceedings). It should be used by all
parties involved in opposition proceedings.
The following section describes how to draft the electronic form for both of these situations.
The different options available in Form EP(Oppo) are explained using four examples. The
options for attaching different documents are a prerequisite in the following for the designation
of persons and the selection of grounds and requests.
 Example 1: An opposition is filed by multiple opponents
 Example 2: An intervener with representatives files an opposition and designates a
witness
 Example 3: The proprietor of a patent responds to the opposition filed against her patent
 Example 4: A third party files evidence
First communication – filing the notice of opposition or intervention
All natural or legal persons can use Form EP(Oppo) to file an opposition to a patent with the
EPO, provided they have their residence or corporate headquarters in a contracting state to
the EPC. Opponents may be represented by one of their employees (example 1).
Further parties can join ongoing opposition proceeding as interveners and designate any
representatives they may have. Both opponents and interveners can designate other persons
as witnesses (example 2).
Persons who do not have their residence in a contracting state to the EPC must authorise a
professional representative or a legal practitioner entitled to act as a professional
representative.
The opponent must uniquely identify the opposed patent, specify his or her grounds for
opposition and submit a written reasoned statement. The time allowed for filing notice of
opposition is nine months from the publication of the mention of the grant of the patent in the
European Patent Bulletin.
For more information, see the EPO's Notes to the notice of opposition
(http://documents.epo.org/projects/babylon/eponet.nsf/0/7843500A258C080CC125725D004
F1CF5/$File/2300_notes_en.pdf).
Second communication – other actions
Proprietors of an opposed patent can use Form EP(Oppo) to respond to the opposition and
designate their own witnesses and submit documents (example 3).
Third parties can lodge further objections (example 4).
When filing with Form EP(Oppo), at least one of the following actions must be performed by
the party who selected the Other action option:
 attach a document
 submit a request
 attach a piece of evidence
 indicate a payment
Page 239 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

9 EP(Oppo)
write an annotation.
Data input in Form EP(Oppo)
Form EP(Oppo) is organised into six tabs. It is recommended to enter the data in the tab
sequence given, i.e. starting with the Opposition tab. The options and conditions in the
Names tab, for instance, are determined by the selections you make in the Opposition tab,
and the options in the Documents tab depend on the selection in the Names tab.
Tab
What you can do
Opposition
Select the kind of communication, enter reference to the patent opposed,
specify grounds for opposition
Names
Enter details of the persons involved: opponent(s), intervener(s),
representative(s), proprietor(s), witness(es) or third parties.
Requests
Select options for additional request: refer to withdrawal/revocation, to oral
proceedings, to extension of time limit, etc.
Documents
Attach facts and arguments, publications for evidence, other evidence and
other documents.
Fee Payment
Enter the mode of payment, select fees according to the appropriate fee
schedule.
Annotations
Supply additional information for the EPO.
Mandatory fields
A red triangle in the upper right-hand corner of a field indicates mandatory information. You
must either manually fill out this field or select one of the options provided. If mandatory fields
are not completed, the corresponding tab will show a red validation icon. Consult the
validation messages for more information.
Figure 281: The Patent No. of the patent opposed is a mandatory field in the Opposition tab and is marked with a
red triangle
Page 240 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Elements in Form EP(Oppo)
Figure 282: Form EP(Oppo) - Overview
Element
Description
Menu Bar
Provides all options to edit, save, import and export applications, set
the display and change the status, as well as other tools.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Location Indicator Bar
Shows the selected procedure, the current status and the user
reference for an application.
Navigation Bar
Displays tabs corresponding to the sections of the form. These tabs
can contain sub-tabs, which are a sub-division of the main tab
sections within the form.
Details Area
Displays data entry fields appropriate to the selected tab.
Status Bar
Displays information about the current activity. Shows the total
number of validation messages for the open application.
Page 241 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.1
9 EP(Oppo)
EP(Oppo) Opposition
The Opposition tab is where you basically choose the purpose for which you want to use
Form EP(Oppo). Your alternatives are either Notice of opposition or intervention or Other
action. All subsequent options are dependent on this selection. If you switch alternatives after
entering data, you will lose any data that does not apply to the new setting.
 Select the appropriate option.
The option Notice of opposition or intervention is selected by default (examples 1
and 2).
Figure 283: The option "Notice of opposition or intervention" is selected
 If you choose the Other action option (examples 3 and 4), you should also select the
check box following summons to oral proceedings if you have already received
communication of this kind from the EPO.
 This option guarantees that your filing is assigned the highest priority for internal
processing at the EPO.
Figure 284: The "Other action" option is selected
The red validation icon on the Documents button indicates that at least one document or
piece of evidence is missing in this case and needs to be attached or that an application,
payment or annotation needs to be made.
Enter information on the patent and your statement of grounds in the Reference and
Grounds sub-tabs.
Page 242 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.1.1
9 EP(Oppo)
Reference
Enter information about the opposed patent in the Reference sub-tab (examples 1 and 2).
 Enter the number of the opposed patent as published in the European Patent Bulletin in
the Patent No. field. This information is mandatory.
 Enter the number of the application in the Application No. field. This information is
mandatory.
 Enter the relevant date in the field under Date of mention of the grant in the European
Patent Bulletin. This helps the EPO to determine the possible time left for filing notice of
opposition.
 If the period between the date entered and the current processing data is more than
nine months, an appropriate message is output with a yellow validation icon in the list of
validation messages.
 Enter the name of the invention in the Title of invention field, using the same wording as
the title of the published specification.
 In the Proprietor of the patent field, enter the party named first as proprietor in the patent
specification.
 If you select the Other action option (examples 3 and 4), you only have to enter the
patent number in this sub-tab because this is the number that the EPO uses for the
administration of proceedings. All other settings are optional.
Figure 285: Information on the opposed patent entered in the "Reference" sub-tab
Page 243 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.1.2
9 EP(Oppo)
Grounds
Enter the grounds for your opposition to the patent as a whole or specific patent claims in the
Grounds sub-tab (examples 1 and 2).
 Select the claim(s) No(s). option and enter the numbers of the relevant claims in the field
provided if you only want to file an opposition to certain claims.
The option the patent as a whole is selected by default.
 Select at least one of the check boxes (a) to (c) under Grounds for opposition.
 Please note that a written reasoned statement is also to be attached in the
Documents tab.
If you selected non-patentability pursuant to Article 100 (a) EPC as the grounds for opposition,
please provide more details by choosing one or more of the reasons listed:
 Select the relevant grounds: it is not new, it does not involve an inventive step or
patentability is excluded on other grounds.
 Enter the relevant EPC articles such as 53 (c) in the other grounds field.
Figure 286: Stating the grounds for opposition
If you select the Other action option, all fields in the Grounds sub-tab become inactive
because grounds for opposition are not needed in this instance (examples 3 and 4).
Page 244 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.2
9 EP(Oppo)
EP(Oppo) Names
Use the Names tab on Form EP(Oppo) to enter the name of the persons who file the
opposition (first communication, examples 1 and 2) or perform other actions (second
communication, examples 3 and 4). There are number of different options available for these
two alternatives.

9.2.1
Attention: Be aware that you can only attach documents to the EP(Oppo) form if at
least one person is indicated in the Names tab. Please enter all names and their roles
before you proceed to the Documents tab. The options for attaching documents
depend on the roles chosen in the Names tab.
Persons in conjunction with "Notice of opposition or intervention"
If you selected the Notice of opposition or intervention option in the Opposition tab, you
must specify at least one opponent or intervener. Multiple opponents or interveners can be
specified. You can also designate one or more representatives and witnesses, or enter an
address for correspondence with the opponents/interveners.
 Click the Add button in the Names tab.
 Select the appropriate option.
Figure 287: Options for adding persons when "Notice of opposition" is selected
 Enter the details for the person or use the Copy from Address Book button.
 Repeat this procedure to add additional persons.
Removing names from the form
 Select the name to be removed on the left-hand side of the form.
 Click the Delete button.
Page 245 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Example 1: Multiple opponents are designated
In this example, two legal persons and one natural person were added as opponents. The
first-named opponent, a company, is represented by one of its employees.
 Select the first-named opponent.
 Select the check box [Company] is represented by the following employee acting
pursuant to Art. 133(3) EPC.
 Enter Last Name (mandatory field), First Name (mandatory field) and Title.
The name of this employee will be automatically filled into the Sign Application dialog
and cannot be modified. Only an employee who is authorised by the applicant under
Article 133 EPC is entitled to sign an application.
 Enter the General Authorisation number (where applicable).
Figure 288: Designation of multiple opponents; the first opponent is represented by an employee
Address for correspondence
You can specify a separate address for correspondence with the first-named opponent,
intervener or proprietor if you have not added a representative to the form. The country in the
address for correspondence must be an EPC contracting state.
The Address for correspondence check box is unlocked after the mandatory fields for the
first-named opponent (intervener or proprietor, respectively) have been completed, i.e. First
Name, Last Name (or Company), City and Country.
 Select the first-named opponent.
 Select the Address for correspondence check box.
Address for correspondence then appears in the list on the left.
Page 246 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Entering the address for correspondence is now mandatory. The red validation icon in the
Names tab notifies you of a validation message to that effect.
 Click the Add button and select Address.
The first opponent's name appears under Address for Correspondence on the left and the
data entry fields become available on the right.
 Edit the address information as required.
– The opponent's name cannot be edited in the address for correspondence. The
Company field (legal opponent) and the Last Name and First Name field (natural
opponent) are locked.
– If you subsequently modify the first-named opponent's name, the name in the address
for correspondence will be updated accordingly.
– If you delete the first-named opponent, the address for correspondence will also be
removed from the form.
Figure 289: Address for correspondence entered for the first-named opponent
Page 247 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Example 2: One intervener, his or her authorised representative and one witness are
designated
In this example, a natural person was designated as the intervener. The intervener is
represented by a legal practitioner.
 Use the check boxes beside Authorisation(s) to indicate how the representative's
authorisation is substantiated.
– If you select is/are enclosed, you have to attach the authorisation as an electronic file
in the Documents tab. The validation messages for the Documents tab indicate that
this document is mandatory.
– If you select has/have been registered under No., you have to enter the
authorisation number in the adjoining - now mandatory - data field.
Figure 290: Designation of the intervener's representative
 Click the Add button again and select Witness.
Only natural persons can be designated as witnesses.
 Enter the name of the witness.
 Select the address to which the witness summons should be sent. The options available
are:
– to the party (i.e. the intervener in this example)
Page 248 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
9 EP(Oppo)
to the following address.
Figure 291: Designation of the intervener's witness, summons via the party
9.2.2
Persons in conjunction with "Other action"
In addition to the options listed in the previous section, selecting the Other action alternative
in the Opposition tab lets you select one or more proprietors or third parties. You can
therefore add either opponents, interveners, proprietors or third parties in addition to
representatives and witnesses, or enter an address for correspondence with the
opponents/interveners/proprietors. It should be noted that third parties cannot remain
anonymous should they file with this option.
 Click the Add button in the Names tab.
Page 249 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
 Select the appropriate option.
Figure 292: Options for adding persons for the second communication
Example 3: Proprietor and representative are designated
In this example, the proprietor of the patent wants to submit additional information on her
opposed patent. The company is represented by an attorneys' office (association).
 Add the proprietor of the patent.
Because the proprietor's data is registered with the EPO, only the name is mandatory
(company name for legal proprietor, last name and first name for natural proprietor.
 Add the representative.
You can add exactly one representative.
 Enter information on the representative's authorisation; see example 2.
Figure 293: Designation of proprietor and representative
Page 250 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Example 4: A third party is designated
In this example, a third party who has not yet been involved in the proceedings makes
observations on the opposition to the patent.
 Enter the name and address of the third party.
 A witness cannot be added in this instance.
Figure 294: Designation of third party
9.3
EP(Oppo) Requests
Use the Requests tab to file additional requests that extend beyond the scope of the
opposition or, in the case of a second communication, respond or refer to the opposition.
The options available are directly dependent on the settings you chose or the data you
entered in the Opposition and Names tabs.
Example 1: The opponents submit an auxiliary request for oral proceedings with an
interpreter
 Select the check box Request for oral proceedings.
This automatically activates and selects the check box auxiliarily. This means that your
request for oral proceedings only applies if the EPO decides against your interests.
 Clear the check box auxiliarily if you want the request for oral proceedings to apply
irrespective of the EPO decision.
Page 251 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
 Select the check box Request for interpreting if you are only able to participate in oral
proceedings in a specific language.
 Select one of the EPO's three official languages (English, German and French) for the
options listening in and speaking in. These inputs are mandatory if you enter a request
for interpreting.
 Select the check box Request for accelerated processing as applicable.
 Type the reason for this request into the text box.
Figure 295: Request for oral proceedings with interpreting and request for accelerated processing
Example 2: The interveners submit a request for oral proceedings irrespective of the
EPO decision and a request for the taking of witness evidence
In this example, the Request for oral proceedings check box is selected and the check box
auxiliarily has been cleared.
The check box Request for the taking of evidence by the hearing of a witness is always
automatically selected if one or more persons were named as witnesses in the Names tab.
Page 252 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
 If you are expressly against the taking of witness evidence in oral proceedings, clear this
check box.
Figure 296: Request for oral proceedings irrespective of the EPO decision and request for the taking of witness
evidence
Example 3: The proprietor of the patent withdraws her request for oral proceedings
and submits a request for extension of the time limit
In this example, the proprietor of the patent responds to an opposition to her patent. A request
for oral proceedings has already been submitted.
 Select the check box Withdrawal of request for oral proceedings.
This deactivates the Request for oral proceedings option because the two options are
mutually exclusive.
The options for extending the time limit are only active if the field Date of mention of the
grant in the European Patent Bulletin in the Opposition tab was either left blank or the date
entered is more than nine months before the current date.
 Select the check box Request for extension of time limit by.
 Select the number of months – 1, 2, 3 or 4 – from the drop-down list labelled month(s) to
a total of.
 Enter the total number of months for the extension of time limit into the last field labelled
month(s). This information is mandatory.
 The maximum permitted time limit is six months. If you request an extension that
brings the time limit to over six months, a red validation icon appears in the Requests tab.
The validation message informs you that you must provide convincing reasons as to why
a reply in the period previously laid down is not possible.
Page 253 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
 Specify the Reason in the corresponding text field.
 If the total number of months requested for extension is six or fewer, this information is
optional.
Figure 297: Request by the proprietor of the patent for extension of the time limit and withdrawal of the request for
oral proceedings
Example 4: The proprietor of the patent requests revocation of the patent
The Request for revocation of the patent option is only active if you named one or more
persons as the proprietor of the patent in the Names tab.
If the check box is selected, all other options with the exception of Request for accelerated
processing and Other requests are deactivated.
 Select the check box Other requests as applicable.
Page 254 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
 Describe your request in greater detail in the text field provided.
Figure 298: Request for revocation of the patent by the proprietor
9.4
EP(Oppo) Documents
Use the Documents tab on Form EP(Oppo) to attach all documents needed in support of your
opposition. You can also submit data on publications as evidence, amendments to the patent
description, translations and authorisations as well as many other documents.

Attention: Be aware that you can only attach documents to the EP(Oppo) form if at
least one person is indicated in the Names tab. The Add button for document
attachment is disabled if no role has been added on the Names tab.
The Documents tab is split into the Documents, Evidence - publications and Evidence other sub-tabs. The options available in these sub-tabs for the type of documents to be
attached change depending on the communication type selected, the designated persons and
the requests entered.
 In the event of opposition (examples 1 and 2), Facts and Arguments is a mandatory
attachment. A red validation icon therefore appears on the Documents button.
Page 255 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
If you select the Other action option (examples 3 and 4), the attachment of documents is
optional, provided you enter data in the Requests, Fee Payment or Annotations tabs.
Otherwise, a red validation icon also appears here.
You can only attach PDF files. All electronic documents attached must be compatible with
Annex F; see Preparing documents for attachment (p. 90).

9.4.1
Document types for EP(OPPO) as defined by functional role
The options for the type of documents to be attached in the Documents sub-tab depend on
what you selected in the Opposition and Names tabs:
Notice of opposition or intervention – role: opponent or intervener
 Facts and Arguments
 Other documents:
– General authorisation
– Specific authorisation
– Document containing information about further representatives
– Request for change of address
– Request for change of name
– Request for change of representative
– Request for transfer of rights
– <other document>
Other action – role: proprietor
 Reply to notice(s) of opposition
 Reply to an examination report in opposition proceedings
 Main request document
 Separate auxiliary request document
 Acknowledgement
 Non-public documents:
– Medical certificate
– Non-public annex
– Request for certified copies of the application
– Request for inspection of the file
 Other documents:
– General authorisation
– Specific authorisation
– Document containing information about further representatives
– German translation of claims
– English translation of claims
– French translation of claims
– Request for change of address
– Request for change of name
Page 256 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Request for change of representative
Request for transfer of rights
Translation of priority document
Please provide the application number, for which the translation of the priority
document is filed, as a note to the EPO under Annotations (see "EP(Oppo)
Annotations" p. 267).
– Request for re-establishment of rights
– Grounds for re-establishment of rights
– Request for a decision
– Letter concerning the priority
– <other document>
Amendments
– Clean copy of amended description
– Clean copy of amended claim(s)
– Clean copy of amended drawing(s)
–
–
–

9 EP(Oppo)
Other action – role: opponent or intervener
 Facts and arguments
 Reply to the communication concerning admissibility of an opposition
 Reply to the observations made by the patent proprietor(s)
 Reply to an examination report in opposition proceedings
 Acknowledgement
 Non-public documents:
– Medical certificate
– Non-public annex
– Request for certified copies of the application
– Request for inspection of the file
 Other documents:
– General authorisation
– Specific authorisation
– Document containing information about further representatives
– Request for change of address
– Request for change of name
– Request for change of representative
– Request for transfer of rights
– Request for a decision
– <other document>
Other action – role: third party
 Observations/Citations filed by a third party
Page 257 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.4.2
9 EP(Oppo)
Attaching documents
Example 1: The opponents submit the facts and arguments and an authorisation
The grounds for opposition with an explanation of the facts should be presented pursuant to
Rule 76 (2) c) EPC in a separate file with the opposition.
In this example, the first-named opponent, a company, is represented, by an employee. The
specific authorisation for representation is presented as a separate document.
 In the Documents sub-tab, click the Add button.
 Select Facts and Arguments.
 Navigate to where your file is saved.
 Select the file and click Open to attach it.
The file is renamed OPPO.pdf.
The original file name and the number of pages are indicated on the form.
Figure 299: Facts and arguments document attached





Click the Add button again to attach the authorisation.
Select Other documents.
Navigate to where your file is saved.
Select the file and click Open to attach it.
Select an option - in this example Specific authorisation - in the Document type list.
Page 258 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
The file is renamed SPECAUTH-1.pdf.
Figure 300: Authorisation attached
Example 3: The proprietor of the patent submits a reply to the notice of opposition
filed, a translation of the claims and the acknowledgement
In this example, the proprietor responds to the notice of opposition filed against the patent. An
English translation of the claims is also filed.
 Click the Add button in the Documents sub-tab.
 Select Reply to notice(s) of opposition.
 Navigate to where your file is saved.
 Select the file and click Open to attach it.
The file is renamed OBSO3.pdf.
The original file name and the number of pages are indicated on the form.
Figure 301: Reply to notice of opposition attached





Click the Add button again to attach the translation.
Select Other documents.
Navigate to where your file is saved.
Select the file and click Open to attach it.
Select an option - in this example English translation of claims - in the Document type
list.
Page 259 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
The file is renamed CLMSTRAN-EN-1.pdf.
Figure 302: Translation of claims attached




Click the Add button again to attach the acknowledgement.
Select Acknowledgement.
Navigate to where your file is saved.
Select the file and click Open to attach it.
The file is renamed ADVOFDELIVRY.pdf.
Figure 303: Advice of delivery attached by the proprietor
9.4.3
Filing non-public documents
The filing of non-public documents is available for the opponent, intervener and proprietor role
if you selected Other action in the Opposition tab,

You cannot attach a combination of both public and non-public documents to Form
EP(Oppo). If you attach non-public documents in the same form, you cannot submit a
request by selecting one of the options in the Request tab or select a fee. Please use
separate forms for public and non-public submissions to the EPO.
 Click the Add button and select Non-public documents.
 Navigate to your file and attach it.
 In the Document type list, select the appropriate document type, e.g. Medical
certificate.
Page 260 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
 The file is renamed MEDA-1.pdf.
Figure 304: Non-public document attached
If, after having attached your non-public document, you then attach one of the files from the
assortment of public document types, a red validation icon appears on the Documents
button. The validation message explains the error.
Figure 305: Validation message after attaching public and non-public documents
9.4.4
Evidence - publications
You can attach the following documents in the Evidence - publications sub-tab:
 Patents
 Articles
 Books
 Database
 Internet publications
Additional details on the publication should be provided for every document attached,
including the date, author, publisher or URL.
Example 2: The interveners present multiple publications as evidence
In this example, the interveners present two publications as evidence: an article from a
periodical and a publication on the internet. Copies of both publications are provided as PDF
files.
 Click the Evidence - publications sub-tab.
 Click the Add button.
 Select Articles and attach the relevant PDF file.
 Enter information on the publication in the fields provided:
– Reference is an internal code under which you archived the publication or evidence.
 The maximum length of the reference is 8 characters.
– Author's surname and first name
Page 261 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
–
–
–
–
9 EP(Oppo)
Title of the published article
Periodical name of the periodical in which the article appeared, and where applicable
Volume number and Article No.
Publication date in the format DD.MM.YYYY or month and year
ISBN number, if appropriate
Particular relevance indicates items of particular relevance in the article
Figure 306: Example of an article attached as evidence
 Click the Add button again to attach the internet publication.
 Select Internet publications and attach the relevant PDF file.
 Enter information on the internet publication, particularly the reference, the exact wording
of the title and the date when you retrieved the publication.
Figure 307: Example of an internet publication as evidence
Page 262 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.4.5
9 EP(Oppo)
Evidence - other
You can attach all other evidence in the Evidence - other sub-tab:
 Affidavit
 Images or photo (PDF)
 Cover letter for non-scannable object
 Other evidence
 Translation of evidence
For every document, enter your internal reference for the evidence.
Example 4: The third party presents an affidavit and other evidence
In this example, the third party presents an affidavit. The third party has prepared a video
recording as evidence and sent a DVD with the digital video film to the EPO by mail. The copy
of the reference sheet to this DVD is presented as another piece of evidence in the online
proceedings.
 Click the Evidence - other sub-tab.
 Click the Add button.
 Select Affidavit and attach the relevant PDF file.
The file is renamed Affidavit-1.pdf.
 Enter your internal reference in the Reference field.
 The maximum length of the reference is 8 characters.
 Select Cover letter for non-scannable object and attach the second PDF file.
The file is renamed Model-Reference-1.pdf.
 Enter your internal reference in the Reference field.
Figure 308: Further documents attached as evidence
Page 263 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.5
9 EP(Oppo)
EP(Oppo) Fee Payment
Select the fees that you want to pay on Form EP(Oppo)'s Fee Payment tab and specify the
mode of payment. The currency for all fees is EUR.

No fees are due for observations filed by third parties under Art. 115 EPC; see Decision
of the President of the European Patent Office dated 10 May 2011 (Official Journal
7/2011, p. 418) (http://archive.epo.org/epo/pubs/oj011/07_11/07_4181.pdf). If you enter
any data in the Payment details sub-tab when filing as a third party, a red validation
icon will appear in the Fee Payment tab. Please reset all data entries, i.e. set the Mode
of payment to Not specified and clear the Reimbursement check box.
For more information on EPO deposit accounts and the automatic debiting procedure, please
refer to the Official Journal 2015, supplementary publications 3:
 Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA)
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p8.html)
 Notice from the European Patent Office dated 12 February 2015 concerning revision of
the Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA) and their annexes
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p2.html)
Online fee payment
The EPO offers a quick and secure online fee payment service designed for holders of EPO
deposit accounts. For more information, go to the EPO website and navigate to Applying for
a patent > Online services > Online fee payment
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/fee-payment.html).
Payment details
 Click the Payment details sub-tab.
 Select the Mode of payment in the drop-down list.
– The options Automatic debit order and Debit from deposit account assume that
you have an EPO deposit account.
The Automatic debit order option is only valid for the proprietor(s) of the patent.
– Select the Bank transfer option if you want to transfer the fees to the EPO's bank
account with the Commerzbank AG in Munich, Germany.
The IBAN and BIC codes of the EPO's bank account are supplied automatically when
you select the Commerzbank from the drop-down list.
– Select Not specified if you are not sure how you will be settling the fees.

You are not required to enter 28 as the leading digits of the deposit account number,
since these are automatically supplied by the software. Just enter the six remaining
digits. If the deposit account number is not entered correctly, e.g. you enter more than
Page 264 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
six digits, you will see a red validation icon in the Fee Payment tab. The corresponding
validation message tells you to verify the deposit account number. The same rule
applies to the deposit account number for reimbursement.
 If you wish to have the fees debited from your account later than the submission date,
enter the date in the Deferred execution date field.
 Hover your mouse pointer over the symbol
to the right of the Deferred execution
date field to see the Important information:
This functionality allows you to indicate explicitly that your payment order is to be
executed at a later date than the submission date.
In this case, the payment date will be deemed to be the deferred execution date, provided
that you have sufficient funds on your deposit account on that date.
Please choose the deferred execution date option only if the fees are to be debited on a
future date, as otherwise the default execution date is the date of receipt.
The deferred execution date can be a maximum of 40 days in the future.
Please ensure that the deferred execution date lies within the time limit set for paying the
selected fees.
Please note that any debit orders (standard or deferred execution) can only be revoked
until 00.00 hrs CET on the date of submission (Arrangements for deposit accounts, 7).
Once you select a mode of payment, a red validation icon appears on the Fee Payment tab.
The associated message indicates that the total fee amount is zero.
Figure 309: Details on fee payment
Page 265 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Further options
The Fee Payment sub-tab offers some additional options at the bottom of the screen.
 If you wish the EPO to make any reimbursements to a deposit account with the EPO,
select the corresponding check box.
This information applies to all selected modes of payment. However, if you selected
automatic debit order or debit from deposit account, you are only required to enter an
account number here if that number is different from the account number used for
payment.
 Where applicable, enter the EPO deposit account number and supply the account
holder's name.
Fee selection
 Click the Fee selection sub-tab.
 Select the check boxes for the fees to be paid.
– The fee amount is automatically calculated.
– The check boxes for fees not applicable in this application are locked.
Figure 310: Selecting the fees payable
Page 266 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.6
9 EP(Oppo)
EP(Oppo) Annotations
In the Annotations tab you can enter notes to be transmitted to the EPO.
Creating notes for the EPO
 Click the Add button and select New Note.
 Enter the relevant information in the Author, Subject and Note fields.
If you selected Other action in the Opposition tab, you can use Form EP(Oppo) for the sole
purpose of transmitting an annotation to the EPO. The red validation icon in the Documents
tab will disappear after you enter your text in the Note field. The application is ready for filing
and can be signed in the next workflow step.
Figure 311: Opponent annotation for the EPO
 To add notes that are not intended for the EPO, use the Internal notes (p. 43) function on
the form's toolbar.
Page 267 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9.7
9 EP(Oppo)
Previewing the completed form
Two different PDF views of Form EP(Oppo) are displayed in preview mode depending on
whether you started by selecting Notice of opposition or Other action.
 Click the Preview button in the toolbar.
Example 1: Multiple opponents
If you selected the Notice of opposition option, EPO Form 2300E entitled Notice of
opposition to a European patent is displayed.
Information on the opposed patent, the proprietor of the patent and the (first) opponent is
displayed on the first page. The address for correspondence and the employee under Article
133(3) EPC are indicated.
Figure 312: PDF view of the form "Notice of opposition to a European patent"
Page 268 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
The other opponents are listed on one or more additional sheets at the end of the PDF
document.
Figure 313: PDF view of the additional sheet to the opposition, listing additional opponents
Page 269 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Example 3: Reply of the proprietor of the patent
If you selected the Other action option, the form entitled Submission in opposition
proceedings is displayed.
Requests and attached documents are listed in the section after the information on the
proprietor of the patent and the patent.
Figure 314: PDF view of the form "Submission in opposition proceedings"
Page 270 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
9 EP(Oppo)
Example 4: A third party submits information
If you selected the Other action option and designated a third party, the form entitled
Observations by third parties (Art. 115 EPC) is displayed.
The attached documents and evidence are listed on the form.
Figure 315: PDF view of the "Observation by third parties (Art. 115 EPC)" form
Page 271 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10
10 PCT/RO/101
PCT/RO/101
The request form PCT/RO/101 allows you to submit an international application electronically
to the EPO, WIPO or any national office that accepts these online filings. The provisions of the
PCT and its regulations (PCT Rules) apply, supplemented where applicable by the provisions
of the EPC.

This document focuses on the EPO acting as receiving office. For more information
about the PCT, see the WIPO website at IP Services > PCT > Treaty
(http://www.wipo.int/pct/en/treaty/about.html).
Figure 316: PCT/RO/101 form overview
Element
Description
Menu bar
Provides commands to edit, save, preview, print, import and export
applications, switch to another section, view validation messages and
access help.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Navigation bar
Displays tabs corresponding to the sections of the form.
Details area
Displays data entry fields appropriate to the selected tab.
Traffic lights
Uses colours to indicate the completeness of each section.
Page 272 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Toolbar
The toolbar provides buttons for the most common tools you will need to access as you
prepare, sign and send your application. If the current status of your application does not allow
you to perform a particular task yet, the corresponding button is deactivated.
Button
Function
Description
Preview
Shows a preview of the application in the PDF Viewer.
Print
Prints the application to your default printer.
Sign
Prepares the application for submission and moves it to Ready to sign
status in File Manager.
If the option Start signing immediately when moving application
forwards from draft status is selected in the user preferences in File
Manager, the application immediately opens in the PDF Viewer to be
signed; see Signing the form (p. 344).
Save as Ready for
Signing
Prepares the application for submission and moves it to Ready to sign
status in File Manager.
Signing can then be done from File Manager; see Signing the form
(p. 344).
Help
Opens the online help in your default browser.
Validation
Opens the Validation Messages window for the currently selected
section (tab).
Navigation bar (sections)
Form PCT/RO/101 is split into ten administrative sections represented by corresponding tabs.
Tab
What you can do
Request
Request that the present international application be processed according to the
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT)
Select the receiving office, the International Searching Authority and the language
Enter a title for the application
States
Exclude certain designated states
Indicate reference to a parent application or grant
Names
Enter details of applicant, agent (representative) and inventor
Priority
Claim a national, regional or international priority
Biology
Enter details related to deposited microorganisms and the depositary institution
Indicate that the description contains a sequence listing
Declarations
Make applicant or inventor declarations
Contents
Attach specification documents and other electronic files
Fees
Calculate fees according to the selected fee schedule
Payment
Select a payment option and enter related data.
Annotate
Create remarks and private remarks
View the Validation Log
Designate inventor(s) for certain states only
Page 273 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Traffic lights (validation icons)
Validation messages are indicated by the traffic light icons. This way, you can see at a glance
if the data you have entered is complete or if additional information is required.
A red traffic light icon signals that mandatory information is missing (for example,
the description of the invention or the claims). You must supply this data before
submitting the form.
A PDF or XML document added in the Contents tab may also trigger a red traffic
light if it is deemed not to be of a sufficient quality to meet the filing criteria.
A yellow traffic light icon indicates that this information is required, but not
mandatory at this stage (for example, the abstract).
If a yellow light is displayed when you add a PDF or XML document in the Contents
tab this may also reflect compliance or quality issues that should be reviewed. In
this case, however, the documents are of sufficient quality to allow filing.
A green traffic light icon indicates that the information is complete.
Viewing validation messages
For example, if you are working in the Request section and the traffic light icon in the Request
tab is red, the validation window will provide you with more information about the data that is
missing.
 To open the Validation Messages window, click the Validation button in the toolbar.
or
Select Tools > Validation from the menu.
Figure 317: Validation messages relating to the Request tab
You can display the validation messages for each form section individually or you can view the
Validation Log for the application as a whole; see PCT/RO/101 Annotate (p. 338).
10.1
Creating a new PCT/RO/101 application
The most convenient way to create a new PCT/RO/101 application from scratch is by using
the PCT/RO/101 form in the Forms folder of File Manager.
For detailed information on working with folders, applications and templates in File Manager,
see the corresponding section in the Online Filing user guide or in the online help for File
Manager.
Page 274 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Launch the Online Filing Client 5.0.
By default, File Manager opens with the Forms folder displayed.
 Double-click the PCT/RO/101 form.
Figure 318: Selecting the PCT/RO/101 form in the Forms folder of File Manager
The Create a New Application window opens.
 Enter the User Reference for the new application.
 Select the language you want in the Language of proceedings list.
The form on which the application is transmitted to the EPO will be created in this
language.
By default, the language is English if your File Manager is also set to English.
 Select the folder where you want to save the new application.
Default Folder is selected by default.
Page 275 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click Create.
Figure 319: Entering data to create a new application
A warning message appears if the user reference you entered has already been assigned to
another PCT/RO/101 application.
Figure 320: Warning message if the user reference is already in use
Online Filing does not allow you to use the same user reference for multiple PCT/RO/101
applications.
 Edit your entry in the User Reference field.
 Click Create.
 The new PCT/RO/101 application opens in the form view.
10.1.1 Saving the form
The new application and all the data that you are going to enter are only stored in the Online
Filing database if you save the form. If you close the form without saving, all data will be lost.
Saving the draft application while keeping the form open
 From the menu, select File > Save as Draft.
The saving process will take a few moments. You can then continue working in the
application.
Page 276 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Closing the form and saving the application on exit
 From the menu, select File > Close Form.
or
Click the red closing button in the top right-hand corner of the form window.
or
Double-click the violet and white icon in the top left-hand corner of the form window.
Figure 321: Options for saving and closing an application
 In the following dialog, select Save as Draft.
 Click OK.
The application is saved and closed, returning you to File Manager.
Figure 322: Options in the closing dialog
10.1.2 Working with templates
Templates are user-defined forms, containing data that you need every time you prepare
certain applications, such as information relating to a particular applicant or to fee payments.
The only way to create a template for a PCT/RO/101 form is to use a draft saved in the Default
Folder of File Manager. If you create a template using any other folder, your template will not
be visible from the File Manager interface.
Creating a template from the open form
 From the menu, select File > Save as Template.
 In the following dialog, enter a unique user reference for the template.
Page 277 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click OK.
Figure 323: Entering user reference for a new template
Entering a description for the template
All templates based on form PCT/RO/101 are automatically saved in the Templates folder in
File Manager.
 To assign a description to a template, right-click it and select Properties from the shortcut
menu.
Figure 324: Editing the properties of a template
 In the following dialog, enter the Template description.
 Click Save.
Figure 325: Entering a description after a template has been created
Existing PCT/RO/101 templates cannot be edited. If you want to copy or edit a template,
create a new application based on this template, edit the data as required and save the form
as a new template.
Using the template for a new application
 Double-click the template in the Templates folder.
The Create a New Application window opens.
Page 278 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The template's name is already selected in the Based on Template drop-down list.
 Proceed as described in Creating a new PCT/RO/101 application (p. 274).
Figure 326: Creating a new application from a PCT/RO/101 template
10.2
PCT/RO/101 Request
Form PCT/RO/101 opens with the Request tab by default. This section provides data entry
fields for the most basic information of a new application.

The examples shown in this document are confined to applications where the EPO is
selected as both receiving office and International Searching Authority (ISA).
 Select EP as the Receiving Office.
 Select EP as the International Searching Authority.
 Select the Language of filing of the international application.
The available options are English, French and German.
 Enter the Title of invention using BLOCK CAPITALS.
Page 279 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The title should be the same as on the first page of the description.
Figure 327: Entering basic data for the application
Request to use results of earlier search
 If appropriate, select the check box Request to use results of earlier search.
This enables additional options for entering the required details.
 Double click the row Open to add reference to earlier search.
or
Click the Open button.
Figure 328: Adding a reference to an earlier search
The Details of Earlier Search window opens.
 Select the Country (or regional Office).
The European Patent Office (EPO) is selected by default if the EPO was selected as the
International Searching Authority.
 Enter the Filing date.
 Enter the Application number in the appropriate format.
 If applicable, select the check box for This international application is the same, or
substantially the same, as the application in respect of which the earlier search
was carried out, except, where applicable, that it is filed in a different language.
The two remaining options are mutually exclusive.
 If search-related documents are already available to the ISA, select The following
documents are available to the ISA in a form and manner acceptable to it and
therefore do not need to be submitted by the applicant to the ISA (Rule 12bis.1(f)).
 Select all applicable check boxes.
Page 280 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 The option The receiving Office is requested to prepare and transmit to the ISA
(Rule 12bis.1(c)) does not apply for applications where the EPO is the receiving office,
because the EPO is also the ISA in these cases.
Figure 329: Details of earlier search, documents available to the ISA
 Click OK.
The Details of Earlier Search window closes.
Back in the Request tab, you can continue editing references to earlier searches.
 Add another reference by clicking Open once again.
 Delete a reference by right-clicking it and selecting Cut from the shortcut menu.
Figure 330: Deleting reference to earlier search results
Page 281 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10.3
10 PCT/RO/101
PCT/RO/101 States
The States tab of form PCT/RO/101 allows you to exclude pre-defined designation states and
add references to parent applications or grants. The most recent list of PCT contracting states
(http://www.wipo.int/pct/guide/en/gdvol1/annexes/annexa/ax_a.pdf) is available on the WIPO
website.
By default, all contracting states bound by the PCT on the international filing date are
designated when a new request is filed. However, the designation of Germany, Japan or the
Republic of Korea can be excluded if a national priority of the particular state concerned is
claimed.
 To exclude a designation irrevocably, select the corresponding check box.
Reference to parent application or grant
 To add a reference, click Reference to parent application or grant.
 The check box to the left of the button cannot be edited manually.
Figure 331: Designation of states, adding reference to parent application or grant
The Reference to Continuation or Continuation-in-Part ... window opens, with the
National parent application or grant tab selected by default. All relevant countries are
displayed in the list. If you excluded individual countries (DE, JP or KR) from designation,
these are not listed.
Page 282 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 To enter or edit a reference, double-click the corresponding country in the list.
Figure 332: Adding reference to national parent application or grant
The National parent application or grant window opens.
 Select the Kind of parent application or grant.
 Enter the Parent application or grant number.
 Enter the Parent application or grant date.
 To add or edit another reference, click the corresponding country code on the left-hand
side and enter the relevant details.
 Click OK.
Figure 333: Entering details for national parent application or grant
The national references are now displayed in the country list. The abbreviation stands for the
kind of patent application or grant. For example, poa means patent of addition.
Page 283 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 To add an OAPI reference, click OAPI parent application or grant (OAPI = Organisation
Africaine de la Propriété Intellectuelle).
Figure 334: National parent applications entered, switching to OAPI parent application
 Enter the details.
 Click OK.
Figure 335: Entering details for OAPI parent application
Back in the States tab, the check box for Reference to parent application or grant is now
selected.
Figure 336: Check box is selected and indicates references to parent applications
Page 284 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10.4
10 PCT/RO/101
PCT/RO/101 Names
The Names tab of PCT/RO/101 is for adding contact details for all persons involved in this
application:
 Applicant
 Inventor
 Agent
 Common representative
In certain cases, an additional special address for correspondence can be added.
There are two different ways of adding names and addresses to the form. Choose the method
which is most convenient for your personal workflow.
(1) Copying names from the Address Book
 To browse the Online Filing Address Book, click Address Book.
 Define a single entry for one of the functions in the Names tab; see Adding names from
the Address Book to a form and vice versa (p. 299).
Figure 337: Options for adding persons in the Names tab
(2) Adding names in the Details window
 Open the details window for the applicant, inventor or agent, either by double-clicking the
corresponding row in the list or by selecting an entry and clicking Open.
 Enter the name and address data manually.
Page 285 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
or
Import an entry from the Address Book:
– Select the first address book entry by clicking the address book icon.
–
Browse the address book in sequence using the left and right buttons.
Removing names
 To delete a name, right-click the corresponding entry and select Cut from the shortcut
menu.
 Note: This action cannot be undone.
Figure 338: Removing person from the Names tab
10.4.1 Applicant
At least one applicant or applicant/inventor must be indicated for all designated states or
group of designated states. For the competence of the EP as the receiving office at least one
of the applicants must be resident in or have the nationality of one of the EPC states.
Applicant is a legal entity
The Details concerning Applicant or Applicant/Inventor window opens when you click
Open in the Names tab. Legal entity is selected by default.
 In the Name field, enter the company name (full official name) in BLOCK CAPITALS.
 Enter the remaining address information.
 If applicable, enter additional address information such as the floor, building etc. in the first
address field.
The second address field is intended for the street and house/building number.
 If you wish, you can select your preferred option for the use of e-mail to send notifications.
Page 286 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 At present, however, the EPO does not send any official communications by e-mail so
this option is redundant when filing with the EPO.
 To continue adding entities, click the corresponding button on the left-hand side. For
example, + App. adds a second applicant to the list.
 Click OK when ready to return to the Names tab.
 Click Cancel to close the Details window without saving data.
Figure 339: Details concerning applicant, legal entity
Applicant or applicant/inventor is a natural person
 Select Natural person.
This also unlocks the check box This person is also inventor to the right.
 Where appropriate, select the check box to designate this applicant as inventor.
 Enter the last name in BLOCK CAPITALS.
 Complete the address data.
Telephone, facsimile and e-mail information is only required for the first applicant, so the
corresponding fields are locked for the second and all further applicants.
Page 287 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The Rep. (common representative) option becomes available on the left-hand side.
Figure 340: Details concerning second applicant, natural person
Designated states
If you want to restrict the designated states for any applicant, you can specify the states
individually.
 Select Certain designated States only.
 Click select/modify.
Figure 341: Option for designating certain states only
 Select the desired countries by selecting the check boxes individually.
 Click Select All to select the complete list.
 Click Clear All to undo any selection.
Note that the list is ordered alphabetically by type and then country. A country may appear
more than once under these types:
 ARIPO patent
 Eurasian patent
 European patent
Page 288 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide


10 PCT/RO/101
OAPI patent
National patent
Figure 342: Designated states grouped by type
Common representative
If more than one applicant is entered, the common representative (Rep.) option becomes
available if no agent or correspondence address is used. The common representative must be
resident in or have the nationality of one of the EPC states.
Agent (Agt.), common representative (Rep.) and correspondence address (Corr.) are
mutually exclusive options, meaning that if one is chosen then the other two options are
unavailable. If none of these three options is used, the first named applicant will be considered
as the common representative and all correspondence will be addressed to him.
 Click Rep. on the left-hand side of the Details window.
or
Double-click the + Common Rep. row in the Names tab.
 Select one of the applicants from the Name drop-down list.
The address details are completed automatically.
Figure 343: Details concerning Common Representative, using data of 1. Applicant
Page 289 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Special address for correspondence
If no agent and no common representative are named, you can add an extra address for
correspondence which is different from an applicant's primary address.
 Click Corr. on the left-hand side of the Details window.
or
Double-click the + Corr. Address row in the Names tab.
By default, the details are completed automatically with the name and address information of
the first applicant.
 Modify this data where necessary.
Figure 344: Details concerning Special Address for Correspondence, legal entity
10.4.2 Inventor
You do not have to name the inventor(s) when you file your application, as the information can
be submitted subsequently, but it is strongly recommended that you do so.
Inventor only
 In the Names tab, double-click the + Inventor only row.
or
In the Details window, click + Inv.
 Fill in the data fields or retrieve an entry from the address book.
Page 290 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Remember to enter the inventor's last name in BLOCK CAPITALS.
Figure 345: Details concerning Inventor Only
Deceased inventor
The successor to the rights of the deceased inventor can be selected from defined applicants
provided that an applicant is designated for the US in the Names tab .The deceased person
remains the inventor.
 Select the Deceased check box in the Details concerning Inventor Only window.
The applicant names that appear on the list are those whose designations include the
United States of America.
 If no US designation is present under any of the applicants, then this list will be empty
and you cannot enter any data for succession rights in the US.
 Select the check box for the applicant who is successor to the rights of the deceased
inventor.
 Double-click in the corresponding Capacity box to open the list of options.
 Select the appropriate capacity.
Page 291 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Repeat these steps if there is more than one legal representative for the deceased
inventor.
Figure 346: Selecting capacity for the successor to the rights of the deceased inventor
10.4.3 Agent
If you don't specify a common representative or a special address for correspondence, you
can name one or more agents.
 In the Names tab, double-click the + Agent row.
or
In the Details window, click + Agt.
 Note that the options Common Representative and Corr. Address become
unavailable once you added an agent.
 Select the person type: Legal entity or Natural person (default option).
– For legal entities, enter the company name in BLOCK CAPITALS.
– For natural persons, enter the last name in BLOCK CAPITALS.
 Complete the agent's data.
For the competence of the EP as the receiving office the agent must be resident in or have
the nationality of one of the EPC states.
 If you provide an e-mail address, select the appropriate authorisation check box.
Page 292 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 At present, however, the EPO does not send any official communications by e-mail.
Figure 347: Details concerning agent, legal entity
 Click + Agt. to name a second agent.
 Enter the agent's name.
 Select Same address as the first-named agent, if applicable.
The address data entry fields are then removed from the form.
Page 293 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 348: Details concerning 2. Agent, natural person
Back in the Names tab you have further options:
 To change the order of the agents, right-click a name and select Move Up or Move Down
from the shortcut menu.
The list will be re-arranged accordingly.
Page 294 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click Power of Attorney to create the Power of attorney document (p. 295).
Figure 349: Options for 2. Agent in the Names tab
10.4.4 Power of attorney document
You can create a power of attorney document as a PDF file and attach it to the application.
The Power of Attorney button becomes available if
 at least one applicant and one agent are added
or
 more than one applicant and a common representative are added.
 In the Names tab, click Power of Attorney.
The Power of Attorney window opens.
 Select the applicant(s) giving power of attorney.
 Select the agent/common representative to whom power of attorney is given.
 Select the applicable authority from the drop-down list at the bottom of the form.
 Enter a date.
 To view the draft power of attorney document in the PDF Viewer before signing, click
Preview.
Page 295 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 To open the PDF Viewer and then proceed further to the signing dialog, click Sign.
Figure 350: Selecting applicants and agents for the Power of Attorney document
The PDF Viewer window opens.
 To return to the Power of Attorney window and modify the data before signing, click
Cancel in the bottom right-hand corner of the PDF Viewer.
 To launch the signing process, click Continue.
Figure 351: Previewing the Power of Attorney in the PDF Viewer before signing
The List of Signatories window opens.
Page 296 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 If the applicant is a legal entity, enter the last name and first name of the person entitled to
sign in the <name_of_signatory> field and that person's function in the <capacity> field.
If the applicant is a natural person, only the applicant's name can be selected.
 Click Add Signatory.
Figure 352: Adding signatory for 2. Applicant who is a natural person
The Signature window opens.
 In the Signature window, enter an alphanumeric signature between the two slashes /.../
or attach a file with the facsimile signature.
 Click Apply Signature.
Figure 353: Applying alphanumeric signature for applicant
The List of Signatories window shows the new signature.
 Repeat these steps to add more signatories if required.
Page 297 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 354: Adding signatories for the Power of Attorney document
Back in the Power of Attorney window the names and capacity (if legal applicants) of the
signatories are now indicated in the applicants' list.
 To view the form with the signatures in the PDF Viewer, click Preview.
 To return to the Power of Attorney window after checking the PDF, click Cancel.
Figure 355: Signatures in the Power of Attorney document preview
 To save your data and exit the Power of Attorney window, click OK.
Page 298 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.4.5 Adding names from the Address Book to a form and vice versa
The Address Book Exchange function provides a convenient way to copy existing
addresses from the address book to a PCT/RO/101 form. Vice versa, it allows you to copy an
address which was manually entered from the form to the Address Book.

The data structure of form PCT/RO/101 is not fully compatible with the Online Filing
address book, because the PCT plug-in is based on the WIPO PCT-Safe software and
uses an older technical platform. Please open the OLF address book from File Manager
to check whether the address information has been copied correctly, and amend the
data if necessary.
Adding names to the form
 In the Names tab, click Address Book.
In the upper part of the Address Book Exchange window the existing Address Book entries
are listed, whereas the lower part lists the names added to the form at this time.
 To copy a name from the Address Book to the form, select an entry in the list at the top.
Depending on the type of name, the following functions may be available:
– Applicant only
– Applicant/inventor (for natural persons only)
– Inventor only (for natural persons only)
– Agent
 Click the function you wish to add.
Figure 356: Selecting legal person as applicant only
The lower list now contains the entry to be added to the Names tab.
 To add more names, select another entry from the Address Book and click the appropriate
function.
 To delete a name from the list, select it and click Remove.
Page 299 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 To finish the address selection and transfer the data to the Names tab, click OK.
Figure 357: Selecting natural person as applicant/inventor
Adding names to the Address Book
If you entered address data manually after adding a name in the Names tab, the lower list in
the Address Book Exchange window displays this new address.
 Select the name in the list.
 Click Copy to Address Book.
Figure 358: Copying names from the form to the Address Book
The data is copied to the Address Book.
If an entry with the same name already exists in the Address Book, Online Filing creates a
further entry.
 Note that not all data entered in your PCT/RO/101 form is transferred to the Address
Book.
Page 300 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Open the Address Book, verify and amend the data if necessary.
Figure 359: New entry in the Address Book with data copied from the form
10.5
PCT/RO/101 Priority
The Priority tab of PCT-RO-101 is for specifying details of an earlier application from which
priority is claimed.
 Double-click the Add Priority Claim row or click Open.
Figure 360: Adding a priority claim
Page 301 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The Details of Priority Claim of Earlier Application window opens.
 Select the appropriate option: National, Regional or International (PCT).
 Select the country, the regional office or the receiving office where the earlier application
was filed.
 Enter the filing date of the earlier application.
 Enter the application number that was assigned to the earlier application.
 For some offices, the required application number format is pre-filled into the data
entry field, e.g. PCT/IB____/______ if you select IB as the receiving office.
 To add another priority, click the + icon on the left.
Figure 361: Entering details of priority claim of earlier application
Options for requesting the International Bureau to obtain a certified copy of the earlier
application
In the lower part of the Details window, you can select the method by which a certified copy of
the earlier application should be made available to the International Bureau.
The WIPO Digital Access Service (DAS) is an electronic system allowing priority documents
and similar documents to be securely exchanged between IP offices. For more information, go
to the WIPO website at IP Services > Patents > Digital Access Service and follow the
shortcut to Participating Offices
(http://www.wipo.int/patentscope/en/priority_documents/offices.html). As of March 2012, the
digital libraries of the following countries are participating for notification both as depositing
office and as accessing office: AU, DK, CN, ES, FI, GB, IB, JP, KR, SE and US.
 If applicable, select The International Bureau is requested to obtain from a digital
library a certified copy of the above-identified earlier application.
A warning message appears, asking you to verify that the priority application can be
retrieved by the receiving office. Note that the message is different if the country is one of
the countries participating in the DAS or if the selected country is not a participating
country.
 Enter the access code into the field which is displayed if the upper check box is selected.
Page 302 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Alternatively, select The receiving Office is requested to prepare and transmit to the
International Bureau a certified copy of the above-identified earlier application.
This is the appropriate option if you have e.g. chosen an EP priority, as the EPO does not
participate in the DAS (applies only to earlier applications treated by the EPO).
Request to restore the right of priority
A request for restoration of the right of priority can be filed where the international application
has an international filing date which is later than the date on which the priority period expired
but within a period of two months from that date (Rule 26bis 3).
 If applicable, select the check box The receiving Office is requested to restore the
right of priority.
 The option to add the related statement is automatically added to the Accompanying
Items sub-tab of the Contents tab. Please remember to attach the corresponding
electronic document.
 To save your data and return to the Priority tab, click OK.
Other actions
The priority claims are automatically sorted chronologically.
 To delete a priority claim, right-click and select Cut from the shortcut menu.
 To move an individual priority to another position in the list, right-click it and select Cut
from the shortcut menu. Then right-click the priority before which you want to insert the
priority and select Paste from the shortcut menu.
 To return a list to the default sorting, select sort priority claims chronologically.
Figure 362: Shortcut menu options available in the priority claims list
Validation messages
The check boxes in the Req. and Rest. columns indicate whether one of the options for
requesting a certified copy of the earlier application has been selected and if a request to
restore the right of priority is being made.
 Please see the validation messages for information about additional documents required
when adding any one of these requests.
Page 303 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 If you cannot read the full text of the validation messages, open the Validation Log in
the PDF Viewer, see PCT/RO/101 Annotate (p. 338).
Figure 363: Validation messages referring to priority claims
10.6
PCT/RO/101 Biology
The Biology tab is for providing information on biological material and indicating whether
sequence listings are part of the description of the international application.
Information on nucleotide and/or amino acid sequence listing
 If applicable, select the check box The description contains a sequence listing.
 Attach the required documents in the Contents tab; see Sequence listing (p. 329) for
more details. The following options are automatically added to the form if the above is
checked:
 In the International Application sub-tab:
– description (excluding sequence listings) replaces description
– sequence listing
 In the Accompanying Items sub-tab:
– sequence listing submitted for international search only
– statement confirming that "the information in Annex C/ST.25 text format submitted
under Rule 13ter is identical to the sequence listing as contained in the international
application".
Page 304 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Adding indications relating to biological material
 Double-click the first row Open to add a new item or click Open.
Figure 364: Entering information on biological material
The Details concerning Indications Relating to a Deposited Microorganism window
opens.
 Enter the page and line or paragraph number of the reference in the description.
 Select the depositary institution (mandatory information) from the drop-down list.
The full address is automatically provided.
 Enter the accession number (mandatory information) and the date of deposit
(mandatory information).
 If you want to supply extra documents regarding this biological material, specify the
documents in the Additional Indications field.
 The corresponding documents can be attached in the Accompanying Items (p. 326)
sub-tab of the Contents tab.
 In the Separate Furnishing of Indications field, specify the indications which you wish to
supply by separate cover.
Page 305 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 If required, modify the list of designated states; see the instructions under Applicant
(p. 286).
Figure 365: Entering details for biological material
10.7
PCT/RO/101 Declarations
The Declarations tab allows you to prepare separate declaration sheets for filing with the
application. These sheets contain the declarations as a default text, which is then
complemented by additional data that is entered by you.
 Select an option from the Declarations drop-down list.
 Click Add.
Figure 366: Declaration options
Page 306 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.7.1 Declaration as to the identity of the inventor
 In the Declarations tab, select Declaration as to the identity of the inventor from the
drop-down list, and then click Add.
The Declarations window opens.
 Double-click the Add Inventor row.
The Details concerning inventor window opens.
 In the Name field, select one of the inventors from the drop-down list.
 The deceased inventors are not available in the list.
The address data is automatically completed.
 To add another inventor, click the + icon on the left.
 To specify an inventor whose name has not been added to the form, select <other> from
the list and enter the address data manually.
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 367: Inventor's details for declaration as to identity of the inventor
The inventor is added to the list in the Declarations window.
 Click OK to return to the Declarations main tab.
Figure 368: Declaration as to the identity of the inventor added
Page 307 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.7.2 Declaration as to applicant's entitlement to apply for and be granted a patent
 In the Declarations tab, select Declaration as to applicant's entitlement to apply for
and be granted a patent from the drop-down list, and then click Add.
The Declarations window opens.
 Select one of the applicants from the list.
 Double-click the Add item row.
Figure 369: Adding declaration as to applicant's entitlement to apply for and be granted a patent
The Status/Event window opens.
 Select the appropriate option from the list:
– Inventor
– Employer of an inventor
– Agreement
– Assignment
– Consent
– Court order
– Transfer of entitlement
– Change of the applicant's name
Depending on your selection, more options and data entry fields become available.
 Make the appropriate selections and supply the required data.
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 370: Selecting names for "employer of an inventor"
 Back in the Declarations window, click OK to return to the Declarations main tab.
Page 308 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.7.3 Declaration as to applicant's entitlement to claim priority
 In the Declarations tab, select Declaration as to applicant's entitlement to claim
priority of earlier application from the drop-down list, and then click Add.
The Declarations window opens.
 Select one of the applicants from the list.
 Select one of the priority applications from the list.
 Double-click the Add item row.
Figure 371: Selecting application for declaration as to applicant's entitlement to claim priority
The Status/Event window opens.
 Select the appropriate option from the list:
– Inventor
– Employer of an inventor
– Agreement
– Assignment
– Consent
– Court order
– Transfer of entitlement
– Change of the applicant's name
Depending on your selection, more options and data entry fields become available.
 Make the appropriate selections and supply the required data.
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 372: Adding agreement between persons involved in the international application
 Back in the Declarations window, click OK to return to the Declarations main tab.
Page 309 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.7.4 Declaration of inventorship
 In the Declarations tab, select Declaration of inventorship (only for the purposes of
the USA) from the drop-down list, and then click Add.
The Declarations window opens.
The Inventors table displays all inventors and applicants/inventors from the Names tab,
except the deceased inventors.
 To exclude one of the inventors from this declaration, right-click the corresponding name
and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
 To specify an inventor whose name has not been added to the form, double-click
Inventor.
Figure 373: Adding inventor for declaration of inventorship
The Details concerning inventor window opens.
 Select <other> from the Name list.
 Enter the inventor's last name in BLOCK CAPITALS.
 Complete the address data.
Page 310 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 374: Entering details concerning inventor for declaration of inventorship
 Back in the Declarations window, click Sign.
Figure 375: Starting the signature process for declaration of inventorship
The List of Signatories window opens.
 Select an applicant/inventor and click Add Signatory.
 In the Signature window, enter an alphanumeric signature or attach a file with the
facsimile signature.
 Click Apply Signature.
The signatory is added to the list.
 Create a signature for each applicant/inventor.
Page 311 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click OK to finish.
Figure 376: Adding signatories to declaration of inventorship
10.7.5 Declaration as to non-prejudicial disclosures or exceptions to lack of novelty
 In the Declarations tab, select Declaration as to non-prejudicial disclosures or
exceptions to lack of novelty from the drop-down list and click Add.
The Declarations window opens.
 Select the applicant or inventor concerned from the list.
 Double-click the Add Disclosure row.
Figure 377: Adding declaration as to disclosures
The Disclosure window opens.
 Select the kind of disclosure from the drop-down list.
or
Select OTHER and then specify the kind of disclosure.
 Enter the corresponding data.
Page 312 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click the + icon on the left to add another disclosure.
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 378: Entering data for disclosure
10.7.6 Previewing declaration sheets
If you wish to verify your declaration data before submission, you can open the print preview of
the declaration sheets in the PDF Viewer.
The Print declarations button becomes available after the submission process, when you
open the application from the Sent folder in File Manager.
 In the Declarations main tab, double-click any of the declarations in the list.
or
Click Open.
Figure 379: List of declarations
The Declarations window opens.
Page 313 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click the Preview icon in the toolbar.
Figure 380: Opening the PDF Viewer from the Declarations window
The PDF Viewer opens and shows all the declaration sheets for this application, starting with
declaration no. 1.
 Browse the pages to see the following declarations.
 In the PDF Viewer, click the Print file icon to create a hard copy of the declarations.
 Click Cancel when finished.
Figure 381: Previewing declaration sheets in the PDF viewer
The PDF Viewer closes.
 Click OK to return to the Declarations main tab.
Page 314 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10.8
10 PCT/RO/101
PCT/RO/101 Contents
The Contents tab of form PCT/RO/101 is where you attach documents to support the patent
application.
See Preparing documents for attachment (p. 90) in the EPO Online Filing user guide for more
information about the correct settings for electronic documents.
The Contents tab provides two sub-tabs for attaching documents:
 International Application
Attaching the mandatory patent specification documents and other recommended files
 Accompanying Items
Attaching additional documents
Figure 382: Contents tab with "International Application" and "Accompanying Items" sub-tabs
Validation messages
A red traffic light indicates that one or more mandatory documents have not yet been
attached.
 Click the validation icon to see the corresponding validation messages.
Attaching documents
The attachment process is basically the same for all document types. The example below
shows how to attach a PDF file. The option PDF attachments is selected by default when you
Page 315 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
open the Contents tab. See XML attachments (p. 324) for an example of how to attach XML
files.
 Double-click a document option in the check list, e.g. Description.
or
Select the document option and click Open.
The Content Details window opens. All document attachments for this application are listed
on the left, with the currently selected item being highlighted.
 To select a file from your computer, click the Open button on the right.
Figure 383: Attaching files in the Content Details window
 In the Open window, navigate to the storage location of the corresponding file.
 Select the appropriate option in the files of type list.
The available file types depend on the type of document you want to attach. The default
type for text documents is Portable Document Format and the alternative is TIFF files,
i.e. attaching images as TIFF files. When attaching sequence listing documents, the
options ASCII Text (*.txt) and Annex C/ST.25 files (*.app) become available.
 Select the required file.
 Click Open.
Figure 384: Selecting PDF file for attachment
Page 316 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The file is attached and it retains its name in lower case in the Content Details window.
The number of pages is calculated automatically when a PDF file is attached.
 If you attach a TIFF or JPEG file, e.g. a drawing, please enter the number of pages
manually (1, in most cases).
 Otherwise, the software will not recognise the attachment.
 If you want to attach other files, select the corresponding document type on the left and
repeat the described procedure until all required documents are attached; see PDF
attachments (p. 319).
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 385: Electronic file is attached
Exchanging and removing attached files
If an original document has been modified, you can reattach the updated file to your
application.
 In the Contents tab, double-click a document to open it.
The Content Details window opens.
 To reattach a file, click the Open button and select the corresponding file once again.
The new file from your computer replaces the existing attachment in the application.
 To remove the file without attaching a new one, click Reset.
10.8.1 International Application
The International Application sub-tab provides different options and preconditions for
document attachment.
 PDF attachment is selected by default. Use this option to attach the description, claims,
drawings and abstract as separate PDF files.
Page 317 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Select Single specification file if you have prepared one single PDF file containing the
description, claims and abstract. Note that drawings cannot be included in a single
specification file. They should be added separately if required.
 Select XML attachments if you have prepared the specification document as an XML file,
e.g. with PatXML.
Document check list for PDF attachments
 Description
 Claims
 Abstract
 Drawings
 Pre-conversion archive (optional, but strongly recommended; becomes available after
one of the specification documents has been attached)
Document check list for PDF attachments if description contains a sequence listing
If the check box The description contains a sequence listing is selected in the Biology tab,
the document check list is slightly different:
 Description (excluding sequence listing)
 Claims
 Abstract
 Drawings
 Sequence listing (should be attached as an ST.25 standard file, i.e. as ASCII text (*.txt) or
Annex C/ST.25 (*.app) file)
 Pre-conversion archive (optional, but strongly recommended; becomes available after
one of the specification documents has been attached)
Document check list for PDF attachments, single specification file
 Specification
 Drawings
 Pre-conversion archive (optional, but strongly recommended; becomes available after
one of the specification documents has been attached)
Document check list for XML attachments
 Application body
 Pre-conversion archive (optional; becomes available after the XML specification file has
been attached)
Page 318 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.8.2 PDF attachments
Attaching separate PDF files for each part of the patent document is recommended as the
most convenient procedure.
 The description and claims are mandatory.
 The abstract can be filed subsequently, but it is recommended to include it with the
application.
 Drawings can also be added, if applicable.
Description
 In the International Application sub-tab of the Contents tab, double-click Description.
 The Content Details window opens.
 Click the Open button, navigate to the appropriate file and attach it.
Claims

Once the Content Details window is open, you can immediately proceed to attach all
other documents one after the other. You are not required to return to the Contents
main tab.
 In the list on the left-hand side of the Content Details window, click Claims.
 Click the Open button, navigate to the claims file and attach it.
Abstract
 Click Abstract on the left.
 Click the Open button, navigate to the appropriate file and attach it.
 Select the Language of the abstract.
The available options are English, French and German.
Figure 386: Abstract attached
Drawings
 Click Drawings on the left.
 Click the Open button, navigate to the appropriate file and attach it.
 Enter the Figure of the drawings which should accompany the abstract.
Page 319 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 If applicable, select Yes under The figure of the drawings which should accompany
the abstract contains text.
 Enter the text in the Drawing Text box.
 Click OK to return to the Contents main tab.
Figure 387: Drawings attached
Summary
The software automatically calculates the total number of pages in the International
Application sub-tab.
The fields showing the total number of documents and number of files at the bottom of this
screen summarise all attachments, in both the International Application and
Accompanying Items sub-tabs.
Page 320 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
When all the attached documents show a green traffic light, everything is correct.
Figure 388: All required documents are properly attached
10.8.3 Single specification file (PDF)
The following rules apply when preparing a single specification file:
 All pages in the document must be accounted for and there must be no overlaps.
 Every element in the attached document must start on a new page.
 The order of the individual components should be: description, claims, abstract.
If your PDF file does not correspond to these requirements, you may not be able to enter the
data appropriately and will receive corresponding validation warnings.
Attaching the specification
 In the Contents tab, select the check box Single specification file.
Page 321 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Double-click Specification.
Figure 389: Attaching a single specification file in a PDF
The Content Details window opens.
 Click the Open button, navigate to the PDF file and attach it.
 Enter the first page and last page of the description.
 Enter the first page and last page of the claims.
 Enter the first page and last page of the abstract.
 Select the Language of the abstract.
The number of pages for each document section and the total number of pages is calculated
automatically.
 Check whether the number of pages contained in the PDF file equals the total number of
pages.
 To view the corresponding section of the single document, e.g. the claims, click the
Preview icon next to the page numbers on the right.
Page 322 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Figure 390: Specification file attached and page numbers of document sections entered
Further options
 If you intend not to submit the abstract at this time, select the check box abstract is not
included.
This action deactivates the options referring to the abstract.
 Note the validation message, informing you that the abstract is required.
 Click Drawings on the left to attach the drawings separately; see PDF attachments
(p. 319).
Figure 391: "Abstract is not included" option triggers a corresponding validation message
Page 323 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.8.4 XML attachments
If you produce the specification document as XML files, e.g. with PatXML, you can insert
graphics into the text. All graphic files must be prepared in WIPO Annex F compliant format.
The graphics are stored as separate image files and referenced in the XML file.
A full version of Annex F can be found on the WIPO website at IP Services > PCT > Legal
Texts (http://www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/).
 In the Contents tab, select the option XML attachments.
 Double-click Application body.
Figure 392: Attaching specification document as XML file
The Content Details window opens.
 Click the Open button.
 Navigate to the XML specification file.
Only PatXML files can be selected.
Page 324 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Select the PatXML file and click Open.
Figure 393: Selecting the specification document as PatXML file
The file is renamed application-body.xml.
If the language attribute in the XML file does not match the language indicated in the Request
tab, a warning message to this effect will be displayed.
 Please make sure that you entered the correct language in both the PatXML file and the
Request tab.
Figure 394: Warning message if language attribute mismatch occurs
 Enter the figure of the drawings which should accompany the abstract, if applicable.
The number of pages is calculated automatically from the PatXML file.
 Click the Preview icon to check whether the specification document is displayed correctly,
including the images.
Page 325 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click OK when ready.
Figure 395: Application body XML file successfully attached
The green traffic lights in the Contents tab indicate that all the required documents have been
properly attached.
The Pre-conversion archive option is now available.
Figure 396: Green traffic light for the Contents tab
10.8.5 Accompanying Items
In the Accompanying Items sub-tab you attach all the other attachments which do not relate
to the main application body. These include documents such as statements, translations and
powers of attorney.
The available document types for attachment are:
 original separate power of attorney
 original general power of attorney
 copy of general power of attorney
 translation of international application into ...
 separate indications concerning deposited microorganisms or other biological material
 sequence listing submitted for international search only
Page 326 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
statement confirming that "the information in Annex C/ST.25 text format submitted under
Rule 13ter is identical to the sequence listing as contained in the international application"
 applicant letter to ISA concerning earlier search ('PCT Direct')
 OTHER
System files, such as the fee calculation sheet and the original separate power of attorney
document, are generated automatically as XML files by the software and do not require extra
input from your side.

Attaching predefined document types
 Go to the Accompanying Items sub-tab.
 Select the appropriate document type from the drop-down list, e.g. original general
power of attorney.
Figure 397: Selecting document type for attachment in the Accompanying items sub-tab
 Then click Add.
Figure 398: Adding selected document type to the application
A new item is created in the document check list.
 Double-click this document to open the Content Details window.
Figure 399: Opening the document for attachment
Page 327 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click the Open button, navigate to the corresponding file and attach it.
Figure 400: Original general power of attorney attached
Attaching other user-defined document types
 Select OTHER from the drop-down list.
 The text becomes editable and reads <specify>.
Figure 401: Other document to be specified
 Enter a document description.
 Click Add.
Figure 402: Description for other document entered
The new item is created in the document check list.
Figure 403: Other document added to the application; can be opened for attachment
 Attach the file in the Content Details window as described above.
Statement for restoration of the right of priority
If you have requested the restoration of the right of priority for one of the priority claims, you
are required to attach a separate statement. This item is also automatically created in the
check list in the Accompanying items tab. The numbering refers to the numbering sequence
of the priorities in the Priority tab.
Page 328 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Double-click the statement for restoration of the right of priority to attach the
corresponding file.
The Accompanying Items tab is ready when all the traffic lights are green.
Figure 404: All documents are appropriately attached
10.8.6 Sequence listing
Form PCT/RO/101 provides two different options for attaching sequences listings; see also
PCT/RO/101 Biology (p. 304).
(A) The description contains a sequence listing is selected in the Biology tab:
 Attaching a sequence listing in the International Application sub-tab is mandatory.
 If this sequence listing is not attached as an Annex C/ST.25 file, two more options
become available in the Accompanying Items sub-tab:
– The sequence listing submitted for international search only is required, but not
mandatory for the initial submission.
– The statement confirming that "the information in Annex C/ST.25 text format
submitted under Rule 13ter is identical to the sequence listing as contained in
the international application" is required, but not mandatory for the initial
submission.
(B) The description contains a sequence listing is not selected in the Biology tab:
 Adding the document type sequence listing submitted for international search only in
the Accompanying Items sub-tab is optional.

Sequence listings should always be submitted in computer readable format, i.e. as
Annex C/ST.25 files (*.app) file. Other possible file types are TXT, PDF and TIFF.
However, when attaching one of these file types a corresponding validation message
will inform you that the ISA may require a sequence listing compliant with WIPO Annex
C/ST.25. If filed as PDF file, every page of the sequence listing will be counted in the
total number of pages of the international application and for the calculation of the fees
per page over 30.
(A) Sequence listing as part of the description
 Go to the International Application tab.
 Double-click Sequence listing.
Page 329 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Scroll down the list if you cannot see the item.
Figure 405: Selecting sequence listing for attachment
The Contents Details window opens.
 Select the check box submitted as part of description under Electronic file.
This unlocks the other fields for editing.
 Click the Open button and attach the file.
If you attached an APP or TXT file, the text at the bottom of the window is activated, i.e. it is
true for this application.
Figure 406: The sequence listing submitted as part of the description is attached as an APP or TXT file and will also
be used for the purposes of the international search
Otherwise, i.e. if you attached a PDF or TIFF file, this text remains greyed out. In this case you
are required to submit the two additional documents relating to the sequence listing:
 sequence listing submitted for international search only
Page 330 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

10 PCT/RO/101
statement confirming that "the information in Annex C/ST.25 text format submitted under
Rule 13ter is identical to the sequence listing as contained in the international application"
Figure 407: Sequence listing attached as a PDF file, additional documents for international search required
(B) Sequence listing for international search only
 Go to the Accompanying Items sub-tab.
 Select sequence listing submitted for international search only from the drop-down
list.
 Click Add.
Figure 408: Adding sequence listing for international search only to the documents
The item is added to the check list.
 Double-click sequence listing ... to open the Content Details window.
Figure 409: Opening sequence listing for international search to attach electronic file
 Attach the file.
You may select any of the available file types: TXT, PDF, APP or TIFF.
 Click OK when ready.
Page 331 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.8.7 Pre-conversion archive
Once you have attached a document in the Contents tab, the Pre-conversion archive
appears as an item in the check list.
The pre-conversion archive option allows you to add your original documents, before
converting them into PDF or XML files, as a compressed ZIP archive file. This may be helpful
if you wish to provide the EPO with your original documents in colour. The documents
contained in the ZIP file will not be publicly available nor will they be an integral part of the
visible internal procedural file, but they can be accessed for reference, e.g. in the event of
quality issues.

The EPO does not recognise documents as legally binding if they are exclusively filed as
part of a ZIP archive. To be accepted as legally binding filings, the official patent
documents must always be attached as PDF or ST.25 files under the correct document
type.
 Double-click Pre-conversion archive in the International Application sub-tab.
Figure 410: Opening the pre-conversion archive option to attach a ZIP file
 In the Content Details window, click the Open button and attach the ZIP file.
Page 332 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click the Preview icon to check the contents of the pre-conversion archive.
Figure 411: Pre-conversion archive attached
The attached ZIP archive is opened as a temporary folder in Windows Explorer.
Figure 412: Previewing the contents of the pre-conversion archive
10.9
PCT/RO/101 Fees
The Fees tab of PCT/RO/101 displays the fees and amounts due. These are calculated
automatically from the data in other tabs.
Applying a fee schedule
As a default, the Fee Calculation table does not contain any fee amounts or totals and the fee
schedule is set to None.
The default currency when filing with the EPO is EUR.
 To define fee amounts, select a valid fee schedule from the drop-down list.
Figure 413: Selecting a fee schedule
The fee amount fields are populated and the Total Fees Payable is calculated.
Page 333 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Reductions are displayed as negative amounts in red.
Figure 414: Fee calculation table filled in and total fees payable calculated
Editing fees
If required, individual fee amounts can be edited.
 Click the fee amount to be edited until the background of the table cell changes from blue
to white.
 Edit the value.
Figure 415: Editing a fee amount
 Click away from the edited field to save the new amount.
Page 334 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The Total for the modified fee and the Total Fees Payable value are recalculated
automatically.
Figure 416: Fee calculation updated after a fee amount has been edited
The Update fee schedule button is activated after a fee has been edited.

Attention: If you click Update fee schedule, the new fee amount will be copied to the
fee management table in the Online Filing database. As a result, all PCT/RO/101
applications created subsequently will use this new fee amount instead of the original
fee amount issued by the EPO. If you wish to restore the original fee from the EPO's
official fee schedule at a later stage, you will need to edit the fee amount manually again
and save it by clicking Update fee schedule.
Previewing the fee calculation sheet
 Go to the Contents tab and click the Accompanying Items sub-tab.
 Double-click fee calculation sheet.
 In the Content Details window, click the Preview icon.
The fee calculation sheet is displayed in the PDF Viewer.
10.10 PCT/RO/101 Payment
The Payment tab of PCT/RO/101 is where you specify the mode of payment and provide
details of the EPO deposit account to be debited.
The EPO as receiving office offers the following payment options:
 No payment for the time being – if you intend to pay at a later time.
 Authorisation to charge current account – the relevant fees will be debited from your
EPO deposit account.
Page 335 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide



10 PCT/RO/101
Automatic debit – the EPO will calculate the fees payable using the information provided
in your application and will debit this amount direct from your EPO deposit account.
Bank transfer – you have to transfer the relevant amount to the EPO's bank account with
Commerzbank AG in Munich, Germany.
Other
 Select the applicable Mode of payment.
Depending on your selection, the dialog window will display further fields and options.
Authorisation to charge current account
 Clear any account authorisations which are not applicable.
By default, all account authorisations are selected.
 Enter your EPO deposit account number in the Current account number field.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
 Provide the authorised user name and signature; see Signing the deposit account
authorisation (p. 338).
Figure 417: Details for payment by authorisation to charge deposit account
Automatic debit
 Enter the EPO deposit account number in the Current account number field.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
Page 336 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Provide the authorised user name and signature; see Signing the deposit account
authorisation (p. 338).
Figure 418: Payment by automatic debit
Bank transfer
 If applicable, select the check box In addition, indicate current account authorisation.
– Select the relevant authorisations for subsequent payments from your deposit
account.
– Enter the EPO deposit account number in the Current account number field.
– Provide the authorised user name and signature; see Signing the deposit account
authorisation (p. 338).
Other
 Enter information about your other payment method in the Specify field.
 If applicable, select the check box In addition, indicate current account authorisation.
– Select the relevant authorisations for subsequent payments from your deposit
account.
– Enter the EPO deposit account number in the Current account number field.
– Provide the authorised user name and signature; see Signing the deposit account
authorisation (p. 338).
No payment for the time being
There are no further options.
Page 337 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.10.1 Signing the deposit account authorisation
The signature of a person who is authorised to manage the deposit account is always required
if you select one of the payment options using a specific EPO deposit account.
 In the Payment tab, enter the Authorized User Name.
 Click Sign.
Figure 419: Signing as the user authorised for the EPO deposit account
The Signature window opens; see Power of attorney document (p. 295).
 Enter an alphanumeric signature or attach a file for a facsimile signature and click Apply
Signature.
 After the signature has been applied, the traffic lights for the Payment tab change to
green.
10.11 PCT/RO/101 Annotate
The Annotate tab is where you can see all the notes and comments that have been made for
this application.
 A remark is a comment intended for the EPO and is part of the data submitted.
 A private remark is for internal use only and is not transmitted to the EPO.
Page 338 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The Annotate tab also contains the Validation Log with all the validation messages for the
application. The Entity column indicates the tab relating to each item, i.e. in which tab the
annotation was created.
Figure 420: Remarks, private remarks, validation log and other annotations in the Annotate tab
Adding annotations referring to the application in general
 To create a new annotation, select the appropriate category from the drop-down list.
 Click Add.
Figure 421: Adding a new remark
The Annotation edit dialog window opens.
 Enter your text.
 To view the other annotations, click the corresponding item on the left or browse through
the list by clicking the up and down arrows.
Page 339 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 Click OK to save the entry.
Figure 422: Creating a new remark
The remarks intended for the receiving office can be found in section 13 at the end of the PCT
form.
Figure 423: Applicant remarks in the form preview
Adding annotations referring to specific tabs
Remarks and private remarks can be created not only in the Annotate tab, but also in most of
the other tabs of Form PCT/RO/101. Wherever this function is enabled, it is accessible from
the shortcut menu.
Page 340 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 For example, to add a private remark right-click the Add Priority Claim item in the
Priority tab and select Private Remark from the shortcut menu.
Figure 424: Adding a private remark referring to priority claims
Viewing the Validation Log
 In the Annotate tab, double-click Validation Log.
The Annotation edit dialog window opens.
The validation messages are grouped and ordered by the form sections.
 Scroll through the list to read the messages.
Figure 425: Viewing the Validation Log
 If you cannot read the full text of the validation messages, click the Preview icon.
Page 341 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
 The Validation Log opens in the PDF Viewer.
Figure 426: Validation Log showing messages
10.11.1 Designating inventor for certain states only
As with the applicant, you can edit the list of designated states for the inventor, although this is
quite unusual and seldom used.
 In the Annotate tab, select Inventor(s) for certain designated States only from the
drop-down list.
 Click Add.
The Annotation edit dialog window lists the names of the existing inventors and the
designated states concerned.
 To edit the states for an inventor, double-click the inventor's name.
Figure 427: Editing designated states for an inventor
The View/Change States window opens.
 Select the countries as appropriate; see the instructions under Applicant (p. 286).
Page 342 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The selected states are displayed in the list of inventors.
Figure 428: Designated states selected for one of the inventors
10.12 Processing the PCT/RO/101 application
Once all required data has been entered and the appropriate documents attached, the
application is ready for submission to the EPO.
In the toolbar, the Sign icon and the Save as Ready for Signing icon are now activated, and
all the traffic lights show green.
Applications can also be filed if some of the traffic lights are yellow, provided that the user is
satisfied that all the information required at the time of filing has been supplied and attached.
Figure 429: Application is ready for signing
Page 343 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
10.12.1 Signing the form
Depending on the settings in the File Manager's User Preferences (see Confirmations (p. 58)),
you can launch the signing process immediately from the PCT/RO/101 form or by using the
workflow buttons in File Manager.
The option Start signing immediately when moving application forward from draft
status triggers the following behaviour:
 If that option is not selected (default), both the Sign button and the Save as Ready for
Signing button will move the application to the Ready to sign status. You can then start
the signing process from File Manager.
 If that option is selected, the Sign button prepares the application for signature and
opens the signing dialog immediately.
Preparing the form for signature (default setting)
 Click the Save as Ready for Signing button in the form toolbar.
Figure 430: Starting the signing process from the form
Preparation for submission now starts.
 If required, you can modify the User Reference here.
 Select online (default option) as the Method of Submission.
 Click Continue.
Figure 431: Preparing the application for submission
The data is saved, the form is rendered and the files are compressed and stored in the
database.
 Click Continue.
Page 344 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
The form closes and you are returned to File Manager.
Figure 432: The application data has been prepared for submission
Start signing from File Manager
The form is now in Ready to sign status.
 Select the application and click the Next button (the tool-tip says "Sign").
Figure 433: Launching the signing process from File Manager
The PDF Viewer opens.
 Click Sign Now in the bottom right-hand corner.
 Proceed as described in Signing applications (p. 92) in the Online Filing user guide or in
the File Manager online help.

The two fields ePCT Customer ID and ePCT eOwnership code are optional. These
data are only relevant for EPO Online Filing users having registered an account for the
ePCT private services run by WIPO. For more information, see the WIPO website at IP
Services > PCT > ePCT > FAQ
(http://www.wipo.int/pct/en/epct/pdf/pct_wipo_accounts_faq.pdf).
Page 345 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Figure 434: Representative signing the PCT/RO/101 application with his smart card
10.12.2 Sending the form
In File Manager, the application is in Ready to send status.
 Select the application and click the Next workflow button (the tool-tip says "Send").
 Proceed as described in Sending applications (p. 106) in the Online Filing user guide or in
the File Manager online help.
Figure 435: The application has moved from "Draft" to "Ready to send" status in File Manager
Page 346 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Viewing submission information and the receipt
After the application has been sent, you can view it from File Manager. Both the submission
information and the acknowledgement of receipt can be opened from the Annotate tab.
Figure 436: Submission details and receipt information available in the Annotate tab
10.12.3 Exporting and importing a form
For full instructions on exporting and importing applications via File Manager and Server
Manager, see Exporting data from Online Filing (p. 109) and Importing data into Online Filing
(p. 115) in the Online Filing user guide or in the File Manager online help.
If you want to export a single application from the PCT/RO/101 form view, use one of the
following export options available in the File menu:
Figure 437: Export options in the File menu
Export unpacked WAD to ...
WAD stands for "wrapped application documents".
Attachments and data are rendered to XML, PDF, JPG and TXT files and are exported into an
existing folder on your computer. The Pct101.PDF file is the application form.
Page 347 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
10 PCT/RO/101
Export WAD to ...
The same data as above is packed into a ZIP archive file and stored in the selected location.
Figure 438: PCT/RO/101 application exported to WAD
Export file package ...
This option corresponds to the Export Forms option in File Manager. It creates a ZIP archive
containing the application form, the attached files and the accompanying items as XML and
PDF files.
The text you entered for the figure accompanying the abstract is saved in a separate
draw.txt file.
Figure 439: PCT/RO/101 application exported as file package
Page 348 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11
11 PCT-SFD
PCT-SFD
You can use Form PCT-SFD to file documents submitted after the filing of an international
application under the Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT). You can also use it to select the fees
for the subsequently filed documents and the way you want to pay them. For more information
about the PCT, see the WIPO website at IP Services > PCT System > Treaty
(http://www.wipo.int/pct/en/treaty/about.html).

This document focuses on the EPO acting as receiving Office (RO), International
Searching Authority (ISA), International Preliminary Examining Authority (IPEA) or
Supplementary International Searching Authority (SISA).
Minimum requirements for subsequent filing with Form PCT-SFD
When filing with Form PCT-SFD, at least one of the following actions must be performed:
 attach a document
 select a fee payment and a mode of payment
 write an annotation.
Completing Form PCT-SFD
Form PCT-SFD is organised into five tabs. The capacity in which the EPO is acting is selected
in the Application tab and this governs the options in the Documents and Fee Payment
tabs. This is why you must start with the Application tab.
Tab
What you can do
Application
Select filing office and capacity in which it is acting, enter details of the PCT
application to which the subsequently filed document(s) belong(s).
Names
Enter details on applicant and contact person.
If the EPO is selected as the filing office in the Application tab, no data needs
to be entered in the Names tab. The option for adding persons to the form will
be disabled.
Documents
Attach the subsequently filed document(s).
Fee Payment
Select fees and enter the mode of payment.
Annotations
Supply additional information for the EPO.
Mandatory fields
A red triangle in the upper right-hand corner of a field indicates mandatory information. You
must either manually fill out this field or select one of the options provided. If mandatory fields
are not completed, the corresponding tab will show a red validation icon. Consult the
validation messages for more information.
Figure 440: The "Filing Office" is a mandatory field in the "Application" tab and is marked with a red triangle
Page 349 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
Elements in Form PCT-SFD
Figure 441: Form PCT-SFD - Overview
Element
Description
Menu Bar
Provides all options to edit, save, import and export applications, set
the display and change the status, as well as other tools.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Location Indicator Bar
Shows the selected procedure, the current status and the user
reference for an application.
Navigation Bar
Displays tabs corresponding to the sections of the form. These tabs
can contain sub-tabs, which are a sub-division of the main tab
sections within the form.
Details Area
Displays data entry fields appropriate to the selected tab.
Status Bar
Displays information about the current activity. Shows the total
number of validation messages for the open application.
Page 350 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11.1
11 PCT-SFD
PCT-SFD – Application
The Application tab is where you select the filing office and enter basic information about the
international application for which the subsequently filed documents (SFD) are being filed.
The Application tab contains two sections:
 Filing office and capacity in which it is acting
 Past record
11.1.1 Filing office and capacity in which it is acting
This document outlines the use of Form PCT-SFD when the EPO is selected as the filing
office. For information specific to one of the other filing offices, please refer to the national
patent office concerned.
 Select the EPO as filing office, either by entering the two-letter code EP into the first field or
by selecting European Patent Office from the drop-down list.
 Select the appropriate option from the Capacity drop-down list:
– Receiving Office (RO)
– International Searching Authority (ISA)
– International Preliminary Examining Authority (IPEA)
– Supplementary International Searching Authority (SISA)
Figure 442: Selecting the EPO as filing office and selecting the capacity in which it is to act
Note:
 The types of documents that can be attached depend on the capacity in which the filing
office is acting.
 You cannot attach documents before you have selected the filing office and the capacity in
which it is to act.
 If you change the capacity in which the filing office is to act after you have attached
documents, these will be detached.
 If you wish to file SFD to the EPO acting in a different capacity, please submit them as a
separate filing.
Page 351 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
11.1.2 Past record
The Past Record section provides entry fields for details of the international PCT application
to which the SFD relate(s).
 Enter the international application number of the PCT application.
This information is mandatory.
 Enter the international filing date of the PCT application.
This information is mandatory.
– Clicking on the calendar icon on the right of the date boxes will open a calendar from
which you can select the date.
– If the year of filing is different from the year in the PCT application number, a yellow
validation icon is displayed. You can file your application to the EPO nevertheless, but
please ensure that the data you enter is correct.
 If a priority has been claimed for the PCT application, enter the (earliest) priority date
(optional).
 Enter the title of the invention exactly as specified in the PCT application (usually in
block capitals).
This information is mandatory.
Once you have entered all the mandatory information, the red validation symbol will disappear
from the Application tab in the navigation bar. However, a yellow validation icon is displayed
if you do not supply the (earliest) priority date.
Figure 443: Entering details on the PCT application to which the subsequently filed documents relate
Page 352 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11.2
11 PCT-SFD
PCT-SFD – Names
If the EPO has been selected as the filing office in the Application tab, no data needs to be
entered in the Names tab. The Add button is disabled and a grey validation icon draws your
attention to the relevant validation message.

11.3
If you want to specify details of any additions, changes or replacements to the parties to
the application, please draft a letter to the EPO, have it signed and convert it into PDF.
Then go to the Documents tab and attach the file under the appropriate category.
PCT-SFD – Documents
The Documents tab of Form PCT-SFD is where you attach documents subsequent to your
original filing. The attachment options are determined by the capacity in which the filing office
is acting, as selected in the Application tab. As a result, specific document categories and
document types become available in the Documents tab.

Signing a PCT-SFD application in Online Filing does not automatically apply a signature
to the attached documents. Before attaching the PDF files, you should therefore make
sure that each document has been duly signed by the relevant person.
The following sections provide an overview of the document categories and document types
applicable when filing with the EPO as:
 Receiving Office (RO)
 International Searching Authority (ISA)
 International Preliminary Examining Authority (IPEA)
 Supplementary International Searching Authority (SISA)
Specific document types cannot be filed with the EPO although it is possible to attach them;
see the sections below for details.
11.3.1 Documents filed with the Receiving Office (RO)

This list contains document types printed in italics and marked with the symbol [N].
Although these document types are options presented in Form PCT-SFD of the Online
Filing software, they cannot be filed with the EPO. If you select one of these document
types when attaching files to your application, a red validation icon will appear in the
Documents tab. The related validation message informs you which of the attached
documents should be removed.
Page 353 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
Correction of defects (Article 11)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/articles/a11.htm
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
– Missing claims
– Missing description
– Missing drawings or part thereof
– Missing part of claims
– Missing part of description
Correction and missing parts (Article 14)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/articles/a14.htm
– Later filed abstract
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
– Missing signature (Letter)
– Missing title (Letter)
Rectification of obvious mistakes (Rule 91)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r91.htm
– Letter accompanying the rectification of obvious mistakes
– Rectified request
– Undefined rectification
Translations
PCT Rule 12, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r12.htm
– Translation of priority document
– Translation of the abstract
– Translation of the international application
– Translation of the textual parts of the drawings
Changes to indications in the request (Rule 92bis)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r92bis.htm
– Changes to person, name or address of the agent
– Changes to person, name or address of the common representative
– Changes to person, name or address of the inventor
– Changes to person, name, residence, nationality or address of the applicant
Expressions, etc., not to be used (Rule 9)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r9.htm
– Amended abstract removing matter disallowed
– Amended claims removing matter disallowed
– Amended description removing matter disallowed
– Amended drawings removing matter disallowed
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
– Undefined correction
Page 354 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
Priorities (Rules 17 and 26bis)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r17.htm
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r26bis.htm
– Correction or addition of a priority claim
– Request for restoration of priority rights (including evidence and witness statement)
– [N] Request to make the priority document available in WIPO Digital Access Service
(DAS)
Later filed documents
 Later filed sequence listings can only be filed with the EPO in computer-readable
format. Please select either ST25 or ASCII Text as the file type when attaching the file to
the application.
– Agent's letter
– Declarations
– Microorganisms form BP/4: acknowledgement of receipt by the IDA
– Microorganisms form BP/9: viability statement
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/treaties/en/registration/budapest/guide/pdf/app3_bud
apest_forms.pdf
– Microorganisms form RO/134
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/pct/en/forms/ro/editable/ed_ro134.pdf
– [N] Request for certification of international application registration data
– Request for certified copies of the international application
– Sequence listings
Earlier search (Rule 12bis)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r12bis.htm
– Application for which earlier search was performed
– Cited documents in earlier search
– Results of earlier search
– Translation of application for which earlier search was performed
– Translation of result of earlier search
Regarding payment of fees
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– [N] Fee payment receipt (RO/ES only)
– Letter regarding payment of fees
– Request for refund of undue fees
Assignment
PCT Rule 92bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r92bis.htm
– Assignment
Power of attorney
PCT Rule 90, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r90.htm
Page 355 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
11 PCT-SFD
Power of attorney
Request for extension of time limit
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– Request for extension of time limit
Incorporation by reference
PCT Rule 20, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r20.htm
– Copy of earlier application/priority document (for incorporation by reference)
– Copy of translation of earlier application/priority document (for incorporation by
reference)
– New claims for incorporation by reference (Rule 20.6)
– New description for incorporation by reference (Rule 20.6)
– New drawings for incorporation by reference (Rule 20.6)
– New sequence listings for incorporation by reference (Rule 20.6)
– Notice confirming incorporation by reference of missing elements and parts
Substitute sheets (Rule 26)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r26.htm
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
– Substitute sheet(s) abstract (Rule 26)
– Substitute sheet(s) claims (Rule 26)
– Substitute sheet(s) description (Rule 26)
– Substitute sheet(s) drawings (Rule 26)
– Substitute sheet(s) request (Rule 26)
Withdrawals (Rule 90bis)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r90bis.htm
– Withdrawal of application
– Withdrawal of designation
– Withdrawal of priority claim
Other document
Communication in cases for which no other form is applicable
– Reply to any other invitation or notification (Form PCT/RO/132)
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/pct/en/forms/ro/editable/ed_ro132.pdf
Page 356 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
11.3.2 Documents filed with the International Searching Authority (ISA)

This list contains document types printed in italics and marked with the symbol [N].
Although these document types are options presented in Form PCT-SFD of the Online
Filing software, they cannot be filed with the EPO. If you select one of these document
types when attaching files to your application, a red validation icon will appear in the
Documents tab. The related validation message informs you which of the attached
documents should be removed.
Rectification of obvious mistakes (Rule 91)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r91.htm
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
– [N] Rectification to amended claims
– [N] Rectification to amended description
– [N] Rectification to amended drawings
– [N] Rectification to amended sequence listing part of the description
– Rectified claims
– Rectified description
– Rectified drawings
– Rectified sequence listing part of the description
– [N] Undefined rectification
Earlier search (Rule 12bis)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r12bis.htm
– Application for which earlier search was performed
– Cited documents in earlier search
– Results of earlier search
– Translation of application for which earlier search was performed
– Translation of result of earlier search
Later furnished sequence listing (Rule 13ter)
PCT Rule 13ter.2, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r13ter.htm
 Later filed sequence listings can only be filed with the EPO in computer-readable
format. Please select either ST25 or ASCII Text as the file type when attaching the file to
the application.
– Late furnished nucleotide and/or amino acid sequence
– Letter regarding the sequence listing
– Statement concerning the sequence listing
Lack of unity of invention (Rule 40)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r40.htm
– Reply to invitation to pay additional fees due to lack of unity of invention
Page 357 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
Request to review the opinion regarding the lack of unity of the invention
Regarding payment of fees
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– [N] Fee payment receipt (ISA/ES only)
– Letter regarding payment of fees
– [N] Request for refund of undue fees
Power of attorney
PCT Rule 90, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r90.htm
– Power of attorney
Assignment
PCT Rule 92bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r92bis.htm
– [N] Assignment
Request for extension of time limit
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– Request for extension of time limit
Comments regarding abstract
PCT Rule 38.3, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r38.htm#_38_3
– Comments regarding the abstract
Sequence listing free text (Rule 5.2b)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r5.htm#_5_2_b
– Amended description with sequence listing free text added
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
Other document
Communication in cases for which no other form is applicable
– Reply to any other invitation or notification (Form PCT/ISA/224)
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/pct/en/forms/isa/isa224.pdf
Page 358 of 436
11 PCT-SFD
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
11.3.3 Documents filed with the International Preliminary Examining Authority (IPEA)

This list contains document types printed in italics and marked with the symbol [N].
Although these document types are options presented in Form PCT-SFD of the Online
Filing software, they cannot be filed with the EPO. If you select one of these document
types when attaching files to your application, a red validation icon will appear in the
Documents tab. The related validation message informs you which of the attached
documents should be removed.
Rectification of obvious mistakes (Rule 91)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r91.htm
– Letter accompanying the rectification of obvious mistakes
– Rectification of indeterminate type
– Rectification to amended claims
– Rectification to amended description
– Rectification to amended drawings
– Rectification to amended sequence listing
– Rectified claims
– Rectified description
– Rectified drawings
– Rectified sequence listing
Amendments (Article 34 and Rule 60.1(g))
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/articles/a34.htm
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r60.htm#_60_1_g
– Amended claims
– Amended description
– Amended drawings
– Amended sequence listing
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
– Statement concerning the sequence listing
Translations
PCT Rule 12, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r12.htm
– Translation of amendments
– Translation of priority document
– Translation of the application and/or corrections
Earlier search
PCT Rule 12bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r12bis.htm
– Application for which earlier search was performed
– Cited documents in earlier search
Page 359 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
–
–
11 PCT-SFD
Results of earlier search
Translation of application for which earlier search was performed
Translation of result of earlier search
Later furnished sequence listing (Rule 13ter)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r13ter.htm
 Later filed sequence listings can only be filed with the EPO in computer-readable
format. Please select either ST25 or ASCII Text as the file type when attaching the file to
the application.
– Late furnished nucleotide and/or amino acid sequence
– Letter regarding the sequence listing
– Statement concerning the sequence listing
Lack of unity of invention (Rule 68)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r68.htm
– Reply to invitation to pay additional fees due to lack of unity of invention
– Request to review the opinion regarding the lack of unity of the invention
Regarding payment of fees
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– [N] Fee payment receipt (IPEA/ES only)
– Letter regarding payment of fees
– Request for refund of undue fees
Withdrawals (Rule 90bis)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r90bis.htm
– Withdrawal of application
– Withdrawal of Demand
– Withdrawal of designation
– Withdrawal of election
– Withdrawal of priority claim
Assignment
PCT Rule 92bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r92bis.htm
– Assignment
Power of attorney
PCT Rule 90, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r90.htm
– Power of attorney
Request for extension of time limit
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– Request for extension of time limit
Page 360 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
Corrected Demand (Form PCT/IPEA/401) – Rules 60.1 a) - f)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r60.htm#_60_1
– Corrected demand (Form PCT/IPEA/401)
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/pct/en/forms/demand/ed_demand.pdf
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
Comments and observations
PCT Rule 66.3, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r66.htm#_66_3
– Reply to written opinion of the IPEA (Form PCT/IPEA/408)
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/pct/en/forms/ipea/ipea408.pdf
– Other comments and observations
Sequence listing free text (Rule 5.2b)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r5.htm#_5_2_b
– Amended description with sequence listing free text added
– Letter accompanying the replacement sheet(s)
Other document
Communication in cases for which no other form is applicable
– Reply to any other invitation or notification (Form PCT/IPEA/424)
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/pct/en/forms/ipea/ipea424.pdf
– [N] Reply to request to indicate the competent IPEA (Form PCT/IPEA/442)
www.wipo.int/export/sites/www/pct/en/forms/ipea/ipea442.pdf
Page 361 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
11.3.4 Documents filed with the Supplementary International Searching Authority
(SISA)
Assignment
PCT Rule 92bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r92bis.htm
– Assignment
Earlier search
PCT Rule 12bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r12bis.htm
– Application for which earlier search was performed
– Cited documents in earlier search
– Results of earlier search
– Translation of application for which earlier search was performed
– Translation of result of earlier search
Regarding payment of fees
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– Letter regarding payment of fees
Power of attorney
PCT Rule 90, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r90.htm
– Power of attorney
Request for extension of time limit
PCT Rule 16bis, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r16bis.htm
– Request for extension of time limit
Late furnished sequence listing
PCT Rule 13ter.2, www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r13ter.htm#_13ter_2__1
 Later filed sequence listings can only be filed with the EPO in computer-readable
format. Please select either ST25 or ASCII Text as the file type when attaching the file to
the application.
– Late furnished nucleotide and/or amino acid sequence
Lack of unity of invention (Rule 13)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r13.htm
– Reply to invitation to pay additional fees for lack of unity of invention
– Request to review the opinion regarding the lack of unity of the invention
Withdrawals (Rule 90bis)
www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/rules/r90.htm
– Withdrawal of request for supplementary search
Page 362 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
11.3.5 Attaching PDF documents
To attach a document, you need to select a category in the first step. After selecting the
required file from your computer, you can select the document type.

If you are not sure which the correct category for your document is, please refer to the
relevant section above (RO, ISA, IPEA or SISA).
This example demonstrates how to attach the missing claims for filing with the EPO as
receiving Office.
 In the Documents tab of PCT-SFD, click the Add button.
 Select the appropriate category, e.g. Correction of defects (Article 11).
Figure 444: Selecting a document category
 In the Open window, navigate to the storage location of your file.
Page 363 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
 Select the required file and click Open.
Figure 445: Selecting the PDF file to be attached
The file is attached to the application under its original file name.
The explanatory text on the lower right displays information on the PCT regulations relevant
for the selected document category.
 Select the appropriate document from the Document type drop-down list, e.g. Missing
claims.
 Note that most document types can only be attached once.
Figure 446: Selecting the document type for the attached PDF file
The file is renamed to the Online Filing default file name, e.g. MISSCLMS.pdf.
The original file name is also displayed at the top of the screen, along with the number of
pages.
 Select the language of the document (mandatory).
Page 364 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
You can either type the two-letter language code (EN, DE or FR) into the field to the left or
select the language from the drop-down list to the right.
Figure 447: Selecting the language for the attached document
Document types blocked by the EPO
If you attach a document type which is not accepted by the EPO acting as the selected
capacity, a red validation icon appears in the Documents tab.
 Open the validation messages to see which of the documents should be removed.
Figure 448: A document which is blocked by the EPO has been attached
11.3.6 Attaching sequence listings

Sequence listings must always be submitted in computer-readable format in accordance
with WIPO Standard ST.25. If you attach a sequence listing in PDF when filing with the
EPO as ISA, IPEA or SISA, a red validation icon is displayed in the Documents tab.
 In the Documents tab of PCT-SFD, click the Add button.
 Select the appropriate category:
– Later filed documents if the EPO is acting as RO
– Later furnished sequence listing (Rule 13ter) if the EPO is acting as ISA, IPEA or
SISA
Page 365 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
 In the Open window, navigate to the storage location of your file.
 Change the option in the Files of type drop-down list from Portable Document Format
(default) to ST25 (file type .app or .seq) or ASCII Text (file type .txt).
Figure 449: Selecting the correct file type when attaching a sequence listing file
 Select the required file and click Open.
Figure 450: Attaching a sequence listing as an APP file
The file is attached to the application under its original file name.
 Select the appropriate document from the Document Type drop-down list:
– Sequence Listings if the EPO is acting as RO
Page 366 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
11 PCT-SFD
Late furnished nucleotide and/or amino acid sequence if the EPO is acting as
ISA, IPEA or SISA
Figure 451: Selecting the document type for the attached sequence listing file
The file is renamed to the Online Filing default file name.
 Select Other in Language of the document.
Figure 452: Selecting "Other" as the language for the attached sequence listing file
11.3.7 Viewing attached documents
You can check your application and the attached documents in the print preview.
 Click the Preview button in the toolbar.
The application (pct-sfd.pdf) is displayed in the PDF Viewer.
Page 367 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
Section 3 of the form contains the attached documents with their original file names. The list is
grouped by category.
The left pane in the PDF Viewer lists all the files with their system names.
 Click a file name to the left to display the corresponding document in the PDF Viewer.
Figure 453: Previewing the form in the PDF Viewer
11.4
PCT-SFD – Fee Payment
In the Fee Payment tab you can select the fees associated with your application and indicate
how you wish to pay them. All fees must be paid in euros.
The fees displayed in the Fee Payment tab reflect the fee schedules located in File Manager
> Tools > Fee Management.
Make use of the Live Update function in Online Filing to ensure that your fee schedule is
always up to date. You will find the most recent fee schedule on the EPO website at Applying
for a patent > Online services, following the link Interactive schedule of fees
(http://www.epoline.org/portal/portal/default/epoline.Scheduleoffees).
The fees payable are determined by the capacity in which the EPO is acting, as selected in the
Application tab.
Page 368 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide



11 PCT-SFD
The option to pay fees for late payment can be found in the Payment details sub-tab (RO
or IPEA).
The option to pay fees for lack of unity of invention can be found in the Fee selection
sub-tab (ISA or IPEA).
If the EPO has been selected as the SISA, no fees are due.
11.4.1 Fee selection
When filing with the EPO, the Fee selection sub-tab will display the relevant fees for the
documents that have been attached.
Fees for subsequently filed documents
Most fees cannot be selected manually and thus the corresponding check boxes are locked.
However, the fees are automatically selected by Online Filing once certain subsequently filed
documents are attached, for example:
 If a request for restoration of the right of priority is attached, the Fee for restoration of
right of priority (013EP) is selected (RO).
Figure 454: The EPO is acting as RO and RESTPRIOR is attached: Fee for restoration of right of priority payable


If a Reply to invitation to pay additional fees due to lack of unity of invention is
attached, the Protest fee (062EP) is unlocked and can be selected (ISA, IPEA).
If a Request to review the opinion regarding the lack of unity of the invention is
attached, the Protest fee (062EP) is selected (ISA, IPEA).
Page 369 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide

11 PCT-SFD
If a late furnished sequence listing is attached, the Late furnishing fee (sequence
listing) (066EP) is selected (RO, ISA or IPEA).
Figure 455: The EPO is acting as ISA and both ISAPLUIR and LFSEQL are attached: protest fee and late
furnishing fee for sequence listing are payable
Fees for lack of unity in invention
If the EPO is acting as ISA or IPEA, you can choose to pay additional fees where the ISA or
IPEA has ruled that the invention lacks unity and has requested fees for separate inventions.
 If applicable, select the check box to pay fees for lack of unity of invention.
– The Additional search fee (003EP) is automatically selected (ISA).
– The Additional preliminary examination fee (021eEP) is automatically selected
(IPEA).
 Enter the number of independent inventions for which fees are being paid.
The amount payable is automatically calculated.
Figure 456: The EPO is acting as IPEA and the check box to pay fees for lack of unity of invention is selected:
additional preliminary examination fee is payable
Manual selection of other fees to be paid
 Select the check box for the fee to be paid.
Page 370 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
The amount payable is automatically calculated and fee total is updated.
Figure 457: The EPO is acting as IPEA: handling fee manually selected
11.4.2 Payment details
In the Payment details sub-tab you can specify the mode of payment and provide further
details required by the EPO.
Mode of payment
 Select the appropriate option from the Mode of payment list.
 Automatic debit
If you select this option the check boxes in the Fee selection sub-tab are automatically
deactivated and the total amount of the fees is shown as EUR 0.00. The EPO will
calculate the amount of the fees payable using the information you provided in your
application and will debit this amount direct from your account. With this option you cannot
select the fees yourself in the form.
 Bank transfer
The EPO accepts EUR payments to its account with the Commerzbank AG in Munich,
Germany. The IBAN and BIC codes of the EPO's bank account are supplied automatically
when you select DE, Commerzbank AG, München from the drop-down list.
 Debit from deposit account
If you choose this mode of payment, the relevant fees will be debited directly from your
EPO deposit account. If you issue a debit order during normal working hours (08.00-18.00
hrs.), you can usually view it under Pending orders within about 30 minutes. The actual
deduction from your account will appear 5 to 6 days later.
 Not specified
If you are not sure how you will be paying your fees, you can indicate Not specified.
For more information on EPO deposit accounts and the automatic debiting procedure, please
refer to the Official Journal 2015, supplementary publications 3:
Page 371 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide


11 PCT-SFD
Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA)
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p8.html)
Notice from the European Patent Office dated 12 February 2015 concerning revision of
the Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA) and their annexes
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p2.html)
Automatic debit
If you are filing with the EPO acting as RO, ISA or IPEA, you can also use the automatic debit
procedure.
 Enter the number of your deposit account and the name of the account holder.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
Debit from deposit account
An EPO deposit account is required to use the option Debit from deposit account.
 Enter the number of your deposit account and the name of the account holder.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
 If applicable, select the check box Authorisation to charge any deficiency or credit
any overpayment in the total fees.
Figure 458: Deposit account data entered
Fees for late payment
If you are filing with the EPO acting as RO or IPEA, you can select fees for late payment.
These are not automatically supplied by the software, so you are required to calculate and
enter the appropriate amount manually.
 Select the option Tick here if you want to pay late payment fees.
 Enter the amount in EUR.
Page 372 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
The amount in the Previous total field is automatically taken from the Fee selection
sub-tab and added up to give the Grand total.
Figure 459: Entering the late payment fee
11.5
PCT-SFD – Annotations
In the Annotations tab you can enter notes to be transmitted to the EPO.
Creating notes for the EPO
 Click the Add button and select New Note.
Page 373 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
 Enter the relevant information in the Note field.
Figure 460: Adding a new note for the EPO
 To add notes that are not intended for the EPO, use the Internal notes (p. 43) function on
the form's toolbar.
11.6
Signing an application with Form PCT-SFD
Once you have entered all the mandatory information, you can prepare your applications for
signature and proceed to sign it and send it to the EPO. For more information, see sections
Signing applications (p. 92) and Sending applications (p. 106).
Entering signatories
When signing a PCT-SFD application, you are required to provide the names of the
signatories manually. Unlike in other EP forms, this information is not automatically copied
from the Names tab because no data is entered in the PCT-SFD form when filing with the
EPO.
The Sign Application window allows you to add all the required signatories.
 To sign as or for the applicant, click <other> under the heading Sender to the left.
– Enter the applicant name.
– If you are signing as an employee, also enter your name into the Employee name
field.
Page 374 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
11 PCT-SFD
 To sign as or for the representative, click <other> under the heading Representatives to
the left.
– If applicable, enter the Association.
– Enter the representative's name.
 Select the type of signature.
 Complete the data as required.
 To apply the signature, click Sign.
 Add more signatories if necessary and finalise the signing process by applying an
enhanced electronic signature with a smart card and PIN.
Figure 461: Adding signatories and signing the form
Page 375 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
Form PCT/IPEA/401 is used for filing demands for international preliminary examination
according to Chapter II of the Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT). For more information, see the
WIPO website at IP Services > PCT System > Legal Texts > Treaty > Article 31
(http://www.wipo.int/pct/en/texts/articles/a31.htm).

This document focuses on the EPO acting as the International Preliminary Examining
Authority (IPEA).
Data input in Form PCT-DEMAND
Form PCT-DEMAND is organised into six tabs. It is recommended that you enter the data in
the tab sequence given, i.e. you should start with the Demand tab. Certain options and
conditions in the Documents tab, for instance, are determined by the selections you make in
the Examination Basis tab.
Tab
What you can do
Demand
Select the IPEA, enter details of the PCT application to which this demand for
international preliminary examination belongs.
Names
Enter details on applicant(s), enter details on agent(s) or supply an address for
correspondence.
Examination Basis
Specify the basis for the international preliminary examination and select the
language for the purposes of the examination.
Documents
Attach examination documents or other documents.
Fee Payment
Review fees and enter the mode of payment.
Annotations
Supply additional information for the EPO.
Mandatory fields
A red triangle in the upper right-hand corner of a field indicates mandatory information. You
must either manually fill out this field or select one of the options provided. If mandatory fields
are not completed, the corresponding tab will show a red validation icon. Consult the
validation messages for more information.
Figure 462: "Filing Office/IPEA" is a mandatory field in the "Demand" tab and is marked with a red triangle
Page 376 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
Elements in Form PCT-DEMAND
Figure 463: Form PCT-DEMAND – Overview
Element
Description
Menu Bar
Provides all options to edit, save, import and export applications, set
the display and change the status, as well as other tools.
Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to the most frequently used tasks and tools.
Location Indicator Bar
Shows the selected procedure, the current status and the user
reference for an application.
Navigation Bar
Displays tabs corresponding to the sections of the form. These tabs
can contain sub-tabs, which are a sub-division of the main tab
sections within the form.
Details Area
Displays data entry fields appropriate to the selected tab.
Status Bar
Displays information about the current activity. Shows the total
number of validation messages for the open application.
12.1
PCT-DEMAND – Demand
The Demand tab is where you select the filing office and enter basic information about the
international application for which international preliminary examination is requested.
Page 377 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 Select the EPO as the IPEA, either by entering the two-letter code EP into the first field or
by selecting European Patent Office from the drop-down list.
This information is mandatory.
 Enter the international application number of the PCT application.
This information is mandatory.
 Enter the international filing date of the PCT application.
This information is mandatory.
– Clicking on the calendar icon on the right of the date boxes will open a calendar from
which you can select the date.
– If the year of filing is different from the year in the PCT application number, a yellow
validation icon is displayed. You can file your application to the EPO nevertheless, but
please ensure that the data you enter is correct.
 If a priority has been claimed for the PCT application, enter the earliest priority date
(optional).
 Enter the title of the invention exactly as specified in the PCT application (usually in
block capitals).
This information is mandatory.
Once you have entered all the mandatory information, the red validation symbol will disappear
from the Demand tab in the navigation bar. However, a yellow validation icon is displayed if
you do not supply the (earliest) priority date.
Figure 464: Entering details on the PCT application for which international preliminary examination is requested
Page 378 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12.2
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
PCT-DEMAND – Names
The Names tab is where you enter details of the applicant(s), an agent (representative) or an
address for correspondence. Details of at least one applicant are required.
Adding names
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select a role.
Figure 465: Options for adding names in Form PCT-DEMAND
 Enter the appropriate information or copy a name from the Address Book.
Removing names from the form
 Select the name to be removed on the left-hand side of the form.
 Click the Delete button.
12.2.1 Applicant
At least one applicant is required for filing. If you add two or more applicants, you can appoint
one of them to act as the common representative. Any correspondence intended for the
applicants will then be sent to the address of that applicant.
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select Applicant, Natural or Applicant, Legal.
 Enter the name and address information for the applicant or copy the data from the
Address Book.
 If you provide an e-mail address, select the appropriate check box to authorise the IPEA to
use that e-mail address.
The two options are mutually exclusive.
 At present, however, the EPO does not send any official communications by e-mail.
 If required, add more applicants by the repeating the above procedure.
Page 379 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
It is recommended that you name either a representative (agent) or a common
representative. The yellow validation icon in the Names tab informs you about the
corresponding validation message.
Figure 466: Details of legal applicant
Appointing a common representative
Once you have added two or more applicants, the option to select a common representative is
enabled.
 Select the applicant to be appointed as the common representative.
 Select the check box This applicant is also common representative (applicant, legal)
or This person is also common representative (applicant, natural).
Figure 467: Selecting one of the applicants as the common representative
Once you select the check box for the selected applicant, it is disabled for the other applicants.
Page 380 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
Note that the Representative and Correspondence address options have disappeared from
the list. This means that you cannot add an agent or an address for correspondence if you
have already appointed a common representative.
Figure 468: The common representative option is disabled for the second applicant
12.2.2 Agent
You can add only one agent. Where an agent is appointed, any correspondence intended for
the applicant will be sent to the address indicated for that agent.
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select Representative, Natural Person or Representative, Legal Entity.
 Enter the name and address information for the representative or copy the data from the
Address Book.
Note that the Representative and Correspondence address options are not available in
the list once you have added the first representative (agent).
Figure 469: Details of representative (agent)
Details relating to the agent's authorisation
The lower part of the screen allows you to specify the relationship between applicant and
agent (representative) for the purpose of this application. The option The agent above ... has
been appointed earlier ... is selected by default.
Page 381 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 To specify a new appointment, select the appropriate option.
Related documents, e.g. a separate power of attorney, can be attached from the
Documents tab.
Figure 470: Details relating to the authorisation of the agent
12.2.3 Address for correspondence
Where no agent or common representative is appointed, any correspondence will be sent to
the address of the applicant (if only one person is named as applicant) or of the applicant who
is considered to be common representative (if there are two or more persons named as
applicants).
If the applicant wishes correspondence to be sent to a different address in such a case, that
correspondence address may be indicated in the form.
 In the Names tab, click the Add button.
 Select Correspondence address (natural person) or Correspondence address (legal
entity).
 Enter the details for that address or copy the data from the Address Book.
Once you indicate an address for correspondence, you cannot appoint one of the
applicants as the common representative. However, if you add a representative (agent)
after indicating an address for correspondence, the address for correspondence is
removed from the form.
Figure 471: Address for correspondence specified for a legal entity
Page 382 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12.3
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
PCT-DEMAND – Examination Basis
The Examination Basis tab is where you enter details about the basis for the requested
examination.
Basis for the international preliminary examination
The examination can be carried out on the basis of the application as originally filed, or as
amended under Article 19 and/or Article 34 PCT.
 If you wish the examination to be based on the application as originally filed, do not
change the options under statement concerning amendments.
The default options are as originally filed (the description, the claims, the drawings) and
not applicable (the sequence listing).

Where only as originally filed is indicated, international preliminary examination will
start on the basis of the international application as originally filed or, where a copy of
amendments to the claims under Article 19 and/or amendments of the international
application under Article 34 are received by the International Preliminary Examining
Authority before it has begun to draw up a written opinion or the international preliminary
examination report, as so amended.
Figure 472: The international preliminary examination will be based on the international application as originally
filed
Page 383 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 If you wish the examination to be based on the application as amended, select the
appropriate option from each of the drop-down lists:
the description:
– as originally filed (default)
– as amended under Article 34
the sequence listing:
– as originally filed
– as amended under Article 34 (in the form of an Annex C/ST.25 text file)
– as amended under Article 34 (in the form of an image file)
– not applicable (default)
 If you select the image file option, a red validation icon will appear in the Examination
Basis tab, because the EPO only accepts amendments to the sequence listing in Annex
C/ST.25 text file format.
the claims:
– as originally filed (default)
– as amended under Article 19
– as amended under Article 34
– as amended under Article 19 and Article 34
the drawings:
– as originally filed (default)
– as amended under Article 34
– not applicable
 If you want any amendments to the claims made under Article 19 to be reversed, select
Any amendment to the claims under Article 19 should be considered as reversed.
This check box is disabled if you selected the as amended under Article 19 option for
the claims.
 Select when to start the examination:
– Ordinary start (default)
– Postpone the start, Rule 69.1(b), 69.1(d)
Page 384 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
–
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
Start earlier, before time limit under Rule 54bis1(a)
Figure 473: The examination will be based on the international application as amended and amendments to the
claims under Article 19 should be reversed
Language for the purposes of the examination
 Select the language (mandatory).
 You can either type the two-letter language code (EN, DE or FR) into the field to the left
or select the language from the drop-down list to the right.
 Select the appropriate option for which is the language...
– in which the international application was filed (default)
– of a translation furnished for the purposes of the international search
– of publication of the international application
– of the translation (to be) furnished for the purposes of the examination.
Figure 474: Selecting the language and indicating where this language is used
12.4
PCT-DEMAND – Documents
The Documents tab of Form PCT-DEMAND is where you attach documents to be used by the
IPEA in the international preliminary examination. If you specify amended parts of the
application in the Examination Basis tab, a yellow validation icon will appear in the
Documents tab, indicating that you should also attach the relevant documents.
Page 385 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
To attach a document, you first need to select the suitable document category. The following
document categories are available:
 Examination documents (p. 386), e.g. amendments
 Accompanying items (p. 388) as PDF files, e.g. power of attorney document
 A sequence listing (see "Attaching sequence listings" p. 389) is also attached under
the Accompanying items category.
 Pre-conversion archive (p. 391), i.e. a ZIP file containing the original documents which are
not converted into PDF
12.4.1 Examination documents
The examination documents category offers the following document types:
 Translation of international application
 Amendments under Article 34
 Copy (or, where required, translation) of amendments under Article 19
 Copy (or, where applicable, translation) of any statement under Article 19 (Rule 62.1(ii))
 Copy of the letter accompanying the amendments under Article 19 (Rules 46.5(b) and
53.9)
 Letter accompanying the amendments under Article 34 (Rule 66.8)
 Other document
 To attach a document, click the Add button in the Documents tab.
 Select Examination documents.
Figure 475: Adding examination documents
 In the Open window, navigate to the storage location of your file.
Page 386 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 Select the required file and click Open.
Figure 476: Selecting the file to be attached
The file is attached to the application under its original file name.
 Select the appropriate document type, e.g. Amendments under Article 34.
Figure 477: Selecting the document type for the attached file
The file is renamed to the Online Filing default file name, e.g. AMDA34-1.pdf.
The original file name is also displayed at the top of the screen, along with the number of
pages.
Figure 478: Amendments under Article 34 attached
Page 387 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
Attaching other documents
You can specify your own document type if there is no suitable attachment option.
 Click the Add button and select Examination documents.
 Navigate to the PDF file and attach it.
 Select Other document from the Document Type list.
The file is renamed OTHERDOC-1.pdf.
 To describe this document enter your text in the Details field, e.g. Explanatory Note.
Figure 479: Other examination document attached
12.4.2 Accompanying items
The accompanying items category offers the following document types:
 General power of attorney
 Copy of general power of attorney
 Separate power of attorney
 Sequence listing (PDF) (see "Attaching sequence listings" p. 389)
 Fee payment receipt (OEPM only)
 Other document
To attach a document, click the Add button in the Documents tab.
Select Accompanying items from the list.
In the Open window, navigate to the storage location of your file.
Select the required file and click Open.
The file is attached to the application under its original file name.
 Select the appropriate document type, e.g. Separate power of attorney.




Figure 480: Selecting the document type for the accompanying item
Page 388 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
The file is renamed to the Online Filing default file name, e.g. SPOAT.pdf.
The original file name is also displayed at the top of the screen, along with the number of
pages.
Figure 481: Separate power of attorney document attached under accompanying items
Attaching other documents
You can specify your own document type if there is no suitable attachment option.
 Click the Add button and then select Accompanying items from the list.
 Navigate to the PDF file and attach it.
 Select Other document from the Document Type list.
The file is renamed OTHE-1.pdf.
 To describe this document enter your text in the Details field, e.g. Assignment document.
Figure 482: Other accompanying item attached and specified
12.4.3 Attaching sequence listings

Sequence listings must always be submitted as computer-readable files in accordance
with WIPO Standard ST.25. If you attach a sequence listing in a PDF when filing with the
EPO acting as the IPEA, a red validation icon is displayed in the Documents tab.
 To attach a sequence listing in WIPO ST25 text format, click the Add button.
 Select Accompanying items.
 In the Open window, navigate to the storage location of your file.
Page 389 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 Change the option in the files of type drop-down list from Portable Document Format
(default) to Nucleotide and Amino Acid Sequence Listing (file type .app, .seq or .txt).
Figure 483: Selecting the file type for attaching a sequence listing file
 Select the required file and click Open.
Figure 484: Attaching a sequence listing in WIPO ST25 text format
The file is attached to the application under its original file name.
 From the Document Type list select Sequence listing (text format to WIPO
Standard 25).
Depending on the original file type, the file will be renamed SEQLTXT.app, SEQLTXT.seq
or SEQLTXT.txt.
Figure 485: Sequence listing attached (file type .seq)
Page 390 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
12.4.4 Pre-conversion archive
The pre-conversion archive option allows you to add your original documents, before
converting them into PDF files, as a compressed ZIP archive file. This may be helpful if you
wish to provide the EPO with your original documents in colour. The documents contained in
the ZIP file will not be publicly available nor will they be an integral part of the visible internal
procedural file, but they can be accessed for reference, e.g. in the event of quality issues.
 To attach the ZIP archive, click the Add button.
 Select Preconversion archive.
 Navigate to your ZIP file and select it.
 Click Open to attach the file.
The file is renamed OLF-ARCHIVE.zip.
The names of the original files from the attached pre-conversion archive are listed on the
right.
Figure 486: ZIP archive containing the unconverted documents is attached
12.4.5 Viewing attached documents
You can check your application and the attached documents in the print preview.
 Click the Preview button in the toolbar.
The application (pct-demand.pdf) is displayed in the PDF Viewer.
Section VI of the form contains the attached documents with their original file names.
Page 391 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
The left pane in the PDF Viewer lists all the files with their system names.
 Click a file name to the left to display the corresponding document in the PDF Viewer.
Figure 487: Previewing the PCT-DEMAND form in the PDF Viewer
12.5
PCT-DEMAND – Fee Payment
In the Fee Payment tab you can review the fees associated with your demand and indicate
how you wish to pay them. All fees must be paid in euros.
The fees displayed in the Fee Payment tab reflect the fee schedules located in File Manager
> Tools > Fee Management.
Make use of the Live Update function in Online Filing to ensure that your fee schedule is
always up to date. You will find the most recent fee schedule on the EPO website at Applying
for a patent > Online services, following the link Interactive schedule of fees
(http://www.epoline.org/portal/portal/default/epoline.Scheduleoffees).
Page 392 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
12.5.1 Fee selection
The Fee selection sub-tab displays the fees payable to the EPO for the preliminary
examination of the international application.
The fees payable for filing a PCT-DEMAND form are the examination fee and the handling
fee. The check boxes for these fees are automatically selected and cannot be cleared. No
further action is necessary.
Figure 488: Fees payable for PCT-DEMAND are automatically selected
12.5.2 Payment details
In the Payment details sub-tab you can specify the mode of payment and provide any details
required by the EPO acting as the IPEA.
Mode of payment
 Select the appropriate option from the Mode of Payment list.
 Automatic debit
If you select this option the check boxes in the Fee selection sub-tab are automatically
deactivated and the total amount of the fees is shown as EUR 0.00. The EPO will
calculate the amount of the fees payable using the information you provided in your
application and will debit this amount direct from your account. With this option you cannot
select the fees yourself in the form.
Page 393 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide



12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
Bank transfer
The EPO accepts EUR payments to its account with the Commerzbank AG in Munich,
Germany. The IBAN and BIC codes of the EPO's bank account are supplied automatically
when you select DE, Commerzbank AG, München from the drop-down list.
Debit from deposit account
If you choose this mode of payment, the relevant fees will be debited directly from your
EPO deposit account. If you issue a debit order during normal working hours (08.00-18.00
hrs.), you can usually view it under Pending orders within about 30 minutes. The actual
deduction from your account will appear 5 to 6 days later.
Not specified
If you are not sure how you will be paying your fees, you can indicate Not specified.
For more information on EPO deposit accounts and the automatic debiting procedure, please
refer to the Official Journal 2015, supplementary publications 3:
 Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA)
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p8.html)
 Notice from the European Patent Office dated 12 February 2015 concerning revision of
the Arrangements for deposit accounts (ADA) and their annexes
(http://www.epo.org/law-practice/legal-texts/official-journal/2015/etc/se3/p2.html)
Automatic debit
If you are filing with the EPO, you can also use the automatic debit procedure. An EPO
deposit account is required and orders for automatic debiting must be signed by an authorised
person.
 Enter the number of your deposit account.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
 Enter the name of the account holder.
 Enter the name of the person authorised for signature.
 Enter the alphabetical signature of that person by writing the name between two slashes,
e.g. /Laura Huffington/.
Debit from deposit account
An EPO deposit account is required to use the option Debit from deposit account. Debit
orders must be signed by an authorised person.
 Enter the number of your deposit account.
EPO deposit account numbers are made up of eight digits, starting with 28.
 Enter the name of the deposit account holder.
 If applicable, select the check box Authorisation to charge any deficiency or credit
any overpayment in the total fees.
 Enter the name of the person authorised for signature.
Page 394 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 Enter the alphabetical signature of that person by writing the name between two slashes,
e.g. /Laura Huffington/.
Figure 489: Entering payment data for debit from deposit account
12.5.3 Viewing the fee sheet
The data relevant for fee payment and the fee amounts to be paid are summarised in a
separate fee sheet. You can preview this document in the PDF Viewer.
 Click the Preview button in the toolbar.
The application (pct-demand.pdf) is displayed in the PDF Viewer.
Page 395 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 To display the fee sheet, click fees.pdf in the list to the left.
Figure 490: Checking the fee sheet in the PDF Viewer
12.6
PCT-DEMAND – Annotations
In the Annotations tab you can enter notes to be transmitted to the EPO.
Creating notes for the EPO
 Click the Add button and select New Note.
Page 396 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
12 PCT-DEMAND (PCT/IPEA/401)
 Enter the relevant information in the Note field.
Figure 491: Writing a note to the EPO acting as IPEA
 To add notes that are not intended for the EPO, use the Internal notes (p. 43) function on
the form's toolbar.
Page 397 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13
13 Server Manager
Server Manager
Server Manager allows Online Filing users to administer and manage the Online Filing server
and databases in their office environment.
Server Manager is automatically installed together with the Online Filing software Version
5.09 when Server installation or Stand alone installation is selected during setup. Server
Manager cannot be run on a machine with the thin client only.
Starting Server Manager
You need Windows Administrator privileges to start Server Manager.
 Right-click the Online Filing 5.0 Server Manager icon.
 In Windows 7, select Run as administrator from the shortcut menu.
Figure 492: Starting Server Manager via the Start menu in Windows 7
 In Windows 8/8.1, select Run as administrator from the shortcut menu.
Figure 493: Starting Server Manager via the Apps screen in Windows 8.1
 In Windows 10, select More > Run as administrator from the shortcut menu.
Figure 494: Starting Server Manager via the Start menu > All apps in Windows 10
 If you are not the Windows Administrator, you must now enter his or her Windows account
name and password.
Page 398 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
 Click Yes in the User Account Control window.
The Server Manager login window then appears.
Login to Server Manager
Server Manager can only be started in production mode. However, most of the functions are
available for both the production database and the demo database.
Users who are members of the Administrators group can log on to Server Manager with their
user name and password. A user with Administrator ID is entitled to add users to the
Administrators group in Online Filing's User Administration (p. 70) window.
Figure 495: Login to Server Manager
13.1
Server Manager overview
By default, Server Manager starts with the Services tab opened.
Server Manager's major features can be accessed via ten tabs. Every tab features a toolbar
with buttons to use the functions currently available. You can also use the functions via the
Action menu.
Tab
What you can do
Services
Control services: monitor, stop, start, activate and deactivate the Online Filing
services.
Backup
Backup, restore and clear the complete database. Configure automatic backup.
Export
Export items from the database, e.g. applications or templates, and store them as
ZIP files. Deleting items after export is optional.
Import
Import items into the database that have been previously exported, e.g. applications
or templates, to use them in File Manager.
Users
Monitor and manage users logged in to Online Filing.
Unlock
Disconnect users from items in the database, so that the respective record
(application) in the database becomes unlocked and, hence, editable for other users.
History
List of user activities in File Manager and the other services, with IP addresses,
Windows account names and OLF user names. Export server log file.
Live Update
Countries
Select the countries for which Live Update should search for new or updated national
plug-ins.
Settings
Define default file locations for backup, import and export.
Define settings for Live Update and perform a live update.
Page 399 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Tab
What you can do
Data Migration
Transfer user administration settings from one server to another.
Move the Online Filing database to another hard disk.
13 Server Manager
Figure 496: Server-Manager - Overview
13.2
Services management
The Services tab allows for monitoring and managing the Online Filing services.
The list displays all installed services by Plugin name, Exe file name (path to the program
file), Service name, Status, Corba port, SOAP port and Connections (number of active
user sessions).
In a typical installation of the EPO OLF Server the following services are installed and
activated:
 EPO OLF File Manager
 EPO OLF EP1038 – Form EP(1038E)
 EPO OLF EP122K – Form Euro-PCT(1200E2K)
 EPO OLF EP2000 – Form EP(1001E2K)
 EPO OLF EPOPPO – Form EP(OPPO)
 EPO OLF PCT – Form PCT/RO/101
 EPO OLF PCT-DEMAND – Form PCT-DEMAND
 EPO OLF PCT-SFD – Form PCT-SFD

When setting up Online Filing you can select which national plug-ins should be
activated. All plug-ins available for Online Filing are installed as a matter of course, but
only the ones you select are activated as a service and started. Check the Online Filing
installation guide for more details.
Page 400 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
The Services tab indicates the status of the various services in the following manner:
 Services that are activated are indicated in black.
 Services that are not activated are indicated in grey.
 Services that are running are indicated by a small green triangle.
 Services that are not running (including deactivated services) are indicated by a small
square.
In the example below, the standard EPO OLF plug-ins and the EPO OLF File Manager are all
running (black font with triangle), with the exception of the EPO OLF EP1038 service which
has been stopped (black font with square). The services for the national plug-ins are not
active.
Figure 497: Services running and stopped
Button Function
Description
Start as a service
Start an online service that has been stopped.
Stop
Stop an online service that is running.
Refresh
Retrieve current status of online services from servers.
Activate service
Activate service for a national plug-in
(available for non-active services)
Deactivate service Deactivate service for a national plug-in
(available for stopped services, apart from EPO OLF standard services)
Running a service
 Select the service you wish to start - the current status is Stopped.
 Click the Start as a service button.
 The service will be started and made available to users.
Page 401 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
Stopping a service
 Select the service you wish to stop - the currents status is Running.
 Click the Stop button.
 The service will be stopped. Active users will be disconnected.
 Stopping/starting the File Manager service (EPO OLF File Manager) will stop/start all
other OLF services at the same time.
Activating a service
 Select the service for the national plug-in you want to activate - the current status is
deactivated (grey font) and Stopped.
 Click the Activate Service button.
Figure 498: Activate service
The selected service is activated but not automatically started.
 Click the Start as service button.
Figure 499: Service was activated and can be started
A national plug-in activated in this way is not available in Online Filing's File Manager until all
users have shut down and restarted this tool.
Page 402 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
Deactivating a service

Attention: If a service is deactivated, the applications created with this national
procedure are no longer available in File Manager. However, the data is not removed
from the database. The applications reappear as soon as the service is reactivated.
To deactivate a service that is running you must first stop it.
 Select the service you want to deactivate - its current status is Running.
 Click the Stop button.
The service is stopped and the Deactivate Service button reappears.
 Click the Deactivate Service button.
Figure 500: Deactivating a service that was stopped
You cannot deactivate the EPO OLF standard services, that is, the EPO OLF File Manager,
the four EPO OLF plug-ins and the EPO PCT plug-in.
13.3
Database management (Backup)
The Server Manager's Backup functionalities allow you to back up, restore and clear the
complete Online Filing database.
The Backup tab displays a list of all existing backup files stored in your default Backup
directory. The file location can be specified in Settings. The type of database, file name and
file date are indicated in the backup list.
Page 403 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Button Function
13 Server Manager
Description
Backup
Back up the complete Online Filing database to a compressed archive file.
Restore
Restore the database from a selected backup file.
Delete file
Delete a backup file.
Empty
database
Empty the Online Filing database. Specific data from the production database
can be copied to the new database.
Refresh
Display current list of all backup files from the default backup directory.
Figure 501: List of database backups in the backup directory
13.3.1 Backing up database
Use backup regularly to save all users' data in a physical location different from the hard drive
used by the server. Backup is available for both demo and production mode.
Applications that have been moved to the Trash folder in File Manager will not be included in
the database backup. They are therefore not available for restore at a later date.
 Click the Backup button to start the backup process.
 In the Backup logging window, select the database you want to back up: Production or
Demo.
 Click Start.
Figure 502: Selecting database for backup
Page 404 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
The database will be backed up and stored in the default backup directory. The Backup
complete message will inform you when the process is finished.
The backup file list is automatically refreshed.
Figure 503: Backup complete, new file added to list
Deleting backup files
 Select the backup file(s) in the list that you want to delete.
– To select multiple files, select the first backup file you want to delete with a click and
all other individual files with CTRL+click.
or
– Select the first file and then press SHIFT+click the last one to select all of them.
 Click the Delete button.
Figure 504: Deleting multiple backup files
Page 405 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
You will be prompted for confirmation if you select multiple files to be deleted.
Figure 505: Confirming to delete multiple backup files
Enabling automatic backup procedure
You can enable the automatic backup procedure for the production database in an Online
Filing server installation. Automatic backup runs database backups at regular intervals without
user interaction.
 Select the check box Enable automatic backup procedure.
Figure 506: Default settings for automatic backup
 Enter the number of days between the backups, e.g. 1 for daily backup or 7 for weekly
backup.
 Keep in mind that daily backups require considerable amounts of free disk space and
that you should therefore delete old backup files regularly. It is recommended to set the
backup directory path to a physical hard drive with adequate storage capacity; see
Settings for file locations (p. 416).
 Enter the time of day.
 If the OLF server is down at this time, the automatic backup will start at a later time
once the server is running.
 Enter the Starting date.
Figure 507: Settings for the automatic backup procedure
The backup settings will take effect after restarting the File Manager service. Once you click
away from the Backup tab or you close Server Manager, the following message is displayed
as a reminder.
Figure 508: Reminder to restart the File Manager service, thereby activating the automatic backup
Page 406 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
13.3.2 Restoring database

Warning: Restore overwrites the whole database and restores it to the state it was in
when the backup file was generated. You will lose all applications created since the
backup.
 Click the backup file in the list from which you want to restore your database.
Any backup of the production database can only be restored to the production database,
and any backup of the demo database can only be restored to the demo database. There
is only one option available at a time, that is to say it is not possible to restore a backup file
of the production database to the demo database or vice versa.
 Click the Restore button.
If users are connected to the system, you will be prompted to disconnect them first.
Figure 509: Warning message if there are active user connections
 In the Restore logging window, click Start.
Figure 510: Restore logging window
The next window prompts you to confirm that the data in the database will be overwritten.
 Click Yes.
Figure 511: Warning before restore will overwrite data in the database
The database will be restored.
Page 407 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
13.3.3 Creating a new empty database
Proceed as follows before you select Empty:
 Use Backup to create a complete copy of your database for backup.
 Terminate any active user sessions in the Users tab (see "User sessions" p. 412).
Emptying the database will create a new database and will delete all applications from the
existing database. You can opt to transfer data like users, groups, profiles, mappings,
templates and the Address Book as well as all applications that are not in Status Sent to the
new database.
 Click the Empty button to start.
 Select which database is to be emptied.
 Extended options are available for the production database only.
Figure 512: Empty database - selection of data to be transferred
 Click OK to continue.
 Click Yes in the Question window to confirm that you are sure you want to empty the
selected database.
The new database is created. If applicable, the data previously selected is transferred
from the old database to the new one.
13.4
Exporting items
The Export tab shows all the items stored in the Online Filing database. All existing
applications and templates, including the corresponding number of validation messages and
attachments, are listed to the right.
The export functions in Server Manager apply to the production database only.
Page 408 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Button
13 Server Manager
Function
Description
Export
Export selected items to the default export location. Applications will be
saved as ZIP files containing XML and PDF documents.
Refresh
Update current status of applications.
Figure 513: All applications in the Export tab
Filtering by date
You can restrict the applications to be displayed by enabling the filter by last saved date.
 Select the Enable Filter check box.
This enables the Start Date and End Date fields. The default settings are the day before
the current date in the End Date field and the day four weeks before the End Date in the
Start Date field.
 Modify the Start Date and End Date as required.
 Click Apply Filter.
Figure 514: Enabling filter by start date and end date
 To disable the filter, clear the Enable Filter check box.
 The filter will also be removed automatically when you close Server Manager.
Exporting selected items
Each application will be stored as a separate ZIP file in the default Export directory specified
in Settings.
 Narrow down the list of displayed items by selecting a workflow folder from the list on the
left and/or enabling a filter by date.
 Click the check box next to an item to select it for export.
Page 409 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
 Click other check boxes to select more than one item.
or
Click the
icon in the list header to select all items. Click the icon again to cancel the
selection of all items.
 Click the Export button to start exporting files.
Figure 515: Selecting applications from the draft folder after a filter has been applied

Each time you export an application, the Export function creates a new ZIP file and
names it according to the application's user reference. If a ZIP file of the same name
already exists in the export folder, e.g. sample_oppo.zip, the following ZIP files will be
named sample_oppo_001.zip, sample_oppo_002.zip and so on. The same applies if
two or more applications have the same user reference.
Deleting items from database
You can opt to delete exported items from the database.
 Select the option Delete items from database after archiving.
 Click the Export button.

Warning: Do not click Cancel while the Export progress window is still visible. Doing
this will delete the selected applications processed up to this point but will not export
them.
The applications will be exported and permanently deleted from the database. If you need to
retrieve them, use the Import functions in File Manager or Server Manager.
Page 410 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13.5
13 Server Manager
Importing items
The Import tab shows all the applications available in the default import folder; see Settings
for file locations (p. 416). Server Manager reads the ZIP files that have been created during
export by File Manager or Server Manager.
Like Export, Import works for the production database only.
Button
Function
Description
Import
Import selected items from the default import location. ZIP files will be
converted into database records including the original attachments.
Refresh
Update current status of applications.
Selecting items for import
All items are selected by default.
 Click one of the folders to the left to display applications grouped by workflow status or to
select templates only.
 Clear the check boxes for the items that should not be imported.
or
Reset the selection of all items by clicking the
individual items.
 Click the Import button to start importing items.
icon in the list header and selecting
Figure 516: Import selected items
Applications imported into the database always have Draft status, irrespective of their
pre-export status. Only sent applications are imported in Sent status.
In File Manager, you will find all imported applications in the default import folder that you
specified under Settings for Server Manager. You can edit these applications once again in
File Manager and move them to the required status.
Page 411 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13.6
13 Server Manager
User sessions
The Users tab displays all users currently connected to the Online Filing server. In a
stand-alone installation of Online Filing with a single user, the Users tab is empty.
Individual users can open multiple connections to the server: starting File Manager, opening
applications and templates. All Online Filing plug-ins, e.g. EPO OLF EP122K, run as
individual services to which users can connect when working in the specific Online Filing
procedure.
Each individual connection is listed by Plugin name (service) and User ID. User info shows
the path to the service's configuration file, the user's IP address, domain name and login name
within the computer network as well as the internal Online Filing user name.
Button
Function
Description
Get user log
Display log information for selected user session in the
right-hand pane.
Get full user log
Display more detailed log information.
Terminate user
Disconnect user from server.
Refresh
Update current user session list.
 Click the Get user log or the Get full user log button to see the log for the OLF service
connected to the currently selected user session ID.
Figure 517: Users logged in to Online Filing services
Page 412 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
Terminating user sessions
 Select the user session to be disconnected in the left-hand pane.
 Click the Terminate user button.
Figure 518: Terminate user
The connection will be terminated. In File Manager or in the form, the user will receive the
following message:
Figure 519: User info - connection to server lost
13.7
Unlocking forms
The Unlock tab displays a list of all database records locked by users. In a stand-alone
installation of Online Filing with a single user, the Unlock tab is empty.
If a user logged on to File Manager and opened an application or template for processing, the
corresponding record is locked in the database. If other users now try to open this specific
application, they receive a message that this record is locked and a read-only copy of the
application is opened.
Figure 520: Warning about a locked application/document
Page 413 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
In the Unlock tab, you can unlock locked records to enable other users to continue working on
the relevant application. The Unlock function is not applicable for the PCT forms and works
only for the production database.
Button
Function
Description
Unlock
Unlock record and disconnect user from service.
Refresh
Update current locked record list.
The Plugin name (service for the selected plug-in), Session ID (internal user number), Table
(table in the database) and Record (internal number of the record) are listed for each record.
The User info column shows the IP address of the computer and the domain name of the
network where the user logged on, the user's Windows logon name as well as his or her user
name in Online Filing.
Figure 521: List of records currently locked
Unlocking a record
 Select the record to be unlocked.
 Click the Unlock button.
Server Manager terminates the active user session when unlocking a record.
 Click Yes to confirm.
Figure 522: Unlocking a record also terminates the user session
Page 414 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13.8
13 Server Manager
History
The History tab provides a chronological list of login and logout actions by all users as well as
the status of Online Filing services. A separate log is available for every service. Older entries
are automatically hidden.
This enables the administrator to check user activities, find errors and, if necessary, prevent
unauthorised operations.
 Click the Refresh button to retrieve the most recent status.
 Click a service (Plugin name) to display the associated history on the right.
Figure 523: Log of user activities in the History tab
Exporting server log files
You can export the logs for every individual OLF service for later evaluation, if required.
 Select the Plugin name.
 Click the Export button.
Server Manager creates a CSV file, which is named according to the selected service and
stores it in the default export folder.
13.9
Settings
The Settings tab comprises various options for configuring Server Manager.
 Setting the target directories for backup and restore, for export and import in the file
system of your computer or network.
 Selecting the destination folder in File Manager for importing applications.
 Entering data for internet access via a proxy server, if applicable.
Page 415 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide



13 Server Manager
Entering access data for the internet connection used by Live Update, if applicable.
Configuring the e-mail service for distributing Live Update information.
Configuring Live Update and checking for updates manually.
13.9.1 Settings for file locations
During the installation of Online Filing, the default setting for all directories is defined by the
program path to Server Manager, i.e. C:\Program
Files\EPO_OLF5\tools\smanager\data.
You can designate your own specific directories for the Server Manager's data exchange
functions, for example on a different hard disk partition or a mapped network drive.
In the Backup, Export and Import tab, Server Manager only lists the files located in these
designated directories; files stored in sub-directories are ignored.
Setting
Description
Backup and restore directory
Location for storing database backup files.
Export directory
Location for exporting applications as ZIP files.
Import directory - source
Default location from which ZIP files are imported to new
applications.
Import directory - destination
Default folder in File Manager where imported applications
are created.
Figure 524: Default settings for file locations
Changing directory settings
 Click the folder button to the right of the directory path you wish to modify.
 Navigate to the new folder in your computer/network drives.
 Click OK.
Page 416 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
The new path will be displayed in the Settings tab.
Figure 525: Example of individual settings for file locations
13.9.2 Default Network Settings
The administrator defines the default network settings in Online Filing for all users in the
corporate network. PC workstations in larger companies usually do not connect directly to the
internet but rather are routed over a proxy server. This proxy examines all incoming and
outgoing connections and rejects unauthorised connection attempts.
 Enter the IP address of the proxy server in the Proxy server field.
 In the field to the right of it, enter the number of the proxy server port that Online Filing
should use to establish an internet connection. You can configure the proxy server in such
a way, for instance, that this port is only used by Online Filing.
 Enter appropriate access data in the fields Username and Password if the proxy server
requires authentication every time a connection is established.

Warning: The username and password for the proxy user are saved in unencrypted
form in the file OLFfm.conf. For security reasons, these credentials should never be
identical to your Windows authentication.
The SSL Version is set to TLSv1 by default and cannot be changed. To provide for enhanced
security in terms of data encryption, Online Filing does not use previous SSL versions
anymore.
 Please contact your system administrator if you are unsure about the information you
need to enter in your situation.
Figure 526: Network settings
Page 417 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
13.10 Live Update
The Live Update service is used to update the Online Filing software. Live Update establishes
a connection between the Online Filing client and the EPO's update server and checks for
updates for the installed version of the software.
Live Update is configured and can be activated manually in Server Manager. This means that
only users in the Administrators group are allowed to perform a live update in Online Filing.
How to update Online Filing
 Log on to Server Manager with your user name.
 Use Backup to create a copy of your database.
 Check if there are any updates available in the Settings tab.
 Download the update.
 Install the update in a test environment to ensure that it does not cause any problems on
your productive system.
 Shut down all Online Filing services.
 Install the update in the server installation. If the update also includes amendments to
Online Filing's thin client, a new installation file is generated for the thin client when
updating the server and stored in the program folder EPO_OLF5/ThinClient_v500.
 Restart the services.
 Distribute the thin client update to the individual users.
Update types
Live Update performs three different types of update.
 Maintenance: Changes in the maintenance tables, such as countries, languages, fees,
URLs, addresses. The relevant maintenance tables are automatically updated when
starting File Manager after the update has been downloaded.
 Patch: Changes to the existing software, new features, new national routes.
 Installation: New version of the Online Filing software released following a complete
revision.
You can either install updates via Live Update or download the installation files from the EPO
website at Online Services > Online Filing > Download software for filing with the EPO
(http://www.epo.org/applying/online-services/online-filing/download.html).
13.10.1 Settings for Live Update
The basic settings for Live Update are made in Server Manager.
 Log on to Server Manager with the Administrator user name.
 Go to the Settings tab.
Page 418 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
The Live Update options are listed on the lower part of the tab.
Figure 527: Live Update settings in Server Manager
Enabling Live Update
The check box for Enable software update system is selected by default.
 Enter how frequently you want to check for updates in the field Check for update every
... day(s).
The default setting is 1 day.
 Select the location of the server you want to check for updates in the Live Update Server
Location list.
The only option in the latest version of Online Filing is the EPO's Live Update server in
The Hague.
Live Update check in File Manager
Online Filing automatically checks for updates every time File Manager starts and reports any
updates found.
Page 419 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
Only the administrator can perform live updates manually in Server Manager. The following
message appears when a user opens File Manager for the first time on the day in question:
Figure 528: Message about an available update when File Manager starts
Connection to Live Update server
If your corporate network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet, you can enter the
relevant data in the Live Update settings.
 Enter the server name or the IP address of the proxy server in your network in the Server
field under Live Update proxy.
 In the Port field, enter the number of the port that the server should use to set up the
connection to the EPO Live Update server.
 If the proxy server requires authentication, enter the appropriate data in the fields
Username and Password.
E-mail to the user
You can inform the users in your company when a new update is available for installation.
 Enter the address of your mail server in the Server field under Live Update e-mail.
 Server Manager can only send e-mails via your mail server if the outgoing mail server
(SMTP) does not require authentication.
 Enter the e-mail address of the sender in the Sender field.
 Enter the e-mail address(es) of the recipient(s) in the Receiver field.
 If you enter multiple addresses, add a separator after each e-mail address. You can use
commas, semicolons or line breaks.
 The configuration of a special collective address which forwards mail internally to
individual recipients is recommended.
 To verify your settings, click Test.
If all settings are correct, the receivers will get an e-mail. If not, you can find the error log
file in the OLF program folder under C:\Program
Files\EPO_OLF5\tools\smanager\logs\SendMail.log.
Including country-specific procedures in Live Update
Live Update automatically checks for new national procedures or their updates if you selected
specific countries in the Live Update Countries tab.
 Select the appropriate countries.
 If you activated national plug-ins when installing Online Filing, the relevant countries
are automatically selected by default.
Page 420 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
Live Update informs you that updates are available for download as soon as the EPO
publishes a new national procedure for one of your selected countries.
Figure 529: Selecting countries for Live Update
13.10.2 Downloading updates
Irrespective of the settings for Live Update, you can check for updates at any time you wish.
 Click the Settings tab in Server Manager.
 Click Check Now.
Online Filing establishes a connection to the EPO's Live Update server and checks for
updates for the software and the selected countries. If so, a message appears asking you if
you want to download the updates now.
 Click Yes to download the updates.
Figure 530: New updates found
The Live Update window opens with a list of the updates available.
Live Update shows all the available updates in order of Date. The entry in the Type column
indicates whether it is a maintenance update, patch or full installation. The Status column
Page 421 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
shows whether the update is new or has already been downloaded. An exclamation mark in
the Critical column indicates that the EPO considers that the update is particularly important
and should be installed.
Further information about the selected update can be found at the bottom of the window under
Package Content.
 Select the update in the list.
 Click Download.
 The Install button does not become active until after the update has been
downloaded.
Figure 531: Updates available for download
Downloading multiple updates
 From the View drop-down list in the top right-hand corner select New.
The Update column now contains a check box for each update.
 Select the check boxes of the updates you wish to download.
 Click Download.
Downloading an update
With larger files, a progress indicator shows the progress of the download operation.
Figure 532: Progress indicator during Live Update download
Before the files are saved on your hard disk, they are subjected to verification.
Figure 533: Verification of updates after download
Page 422 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
Live Update always indicates when downloading and verification are successfully completed.
 Click OK.
Figure 534: Downloading and verification completed.
The downloaded updates are now displayed with Downloaded status in the Live Update
window.
 Click Close to exit Live Update without installing any updates.
13.10.3 Installing updates
Installing maintenance updates
Maintenance updates are automatically loaded into the database after the files have been
downloaded via Live Update.
 Download the maintenance update.
 Close both File Manager and Server Manager.
 Start File Manager on the server machine.
 If User Management is enabled, log on as Administrator.
The maintenance update will be loaded before the File Manager window opens.
Installing a patch via Live Update
 In the Live Update window select the update you require.
 Click Install.
Figure 535: Installing a downloaded update
For the update to be installed correctly, all OLF programs and services must be stopped.
Page 423 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
 Check the Users tab in Server Manager to see if there are any users currently working on
applications and give them ample warning of the impending disruption of online services.
 Click Yes when the following window appears.
Figure 536: Pre-installation warning about the termination of Online Filing services
File Manager and any other active services are terminated. The Live Update window remains
open in the background.
The installation program starts.
Running installation files as a program
 Close the Live Update window.
 Give any logged-on users ample warning of the impending disruption.
 Terminate all active Online Filing services in the Services tab in Server Manager.
 Open the Windows Explorer.
The downloaded updates are stored in the C:\Program
Files\EPO_OLF5\fm\config\LU\Installations folder as executable EXE-files.
Figure 537: Downloaded update files in the EPO_OLF5 program directory
 Double click the update you wish to install.
or
Right-click the file and select Run as administrator.
The installation program starts.
 Follow the instructions provided by the installation wizard.
Page 424 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
13.11 Data Migration
The Data Migration tab in Server Manager offers options for migrating data from one server
to another or from the production database to the demo database, without the need to run the
installation program. You can migrate the selected data either to a different hard drive or to a
different machine.
Migrating user data
 Copy the complete user administration from the production server to the demo server.
 Export the user administration from the production server to a file.
 Import the user administration from a file to the production server.
Migrating databases
 Move the production database to another storage location.
 Move the demo database to another storage location.
13.11.1 User Data Migration
If your company has been working with Online Filing for some time, your Online Filing
administrators may have created a specific system of user accounts, groups and profiles for
your purposes.
When you install Online Filing on a new machine, you can conveniently transfer this user
management set-up to the new installation. Likewise, the user settings of your OLF production
server can be copied to your demo server for testing purposes.

Attention: To avoid data conflicts, User Administration should only be copied to or
imported into an empty Online Filing database.
 Open the Data Migration tab.
 Under User Data Migration, select the appropriate option.
 Click Execute.
Figure 538: Options for migrating the User Administration
Page 425 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
If users are connected, a message appears and the action is cancelled.
Figure 539: Warning to disconnect users before exporting or importing user management settings
Exporting user administration
The export operation creates a ZIP file in the Server Manager's default export directory. The
ZIP file is named useradministration[date]_[time].zip, e.g.
useradministration20120628_153639.zip and contains three files, um.tmp, uma.tmp and
umr.tmp.
Figure 540: Locating the user administration file in the Server Manager's export folder
Importing user administration
The User Administration ZIP file can either be copied to the Server Manager's default import
directory on the target machine or it can be located during import.
The Data Migration function opens the default import directory.
 Select the appropriate ZIP file or browse the file system to locate your user administration
file.
Page 426 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
 Click Open.
Figure 541: Selecting the user administration ZIP file for import to the production server
13.11.2 Database Migration
You can move the Online Filing databases to a different hard disk drive if your server
computer's hard disk runs out of space or if you have to replace the hardware.
By migrating the database to another location, the Online Filing server will be reconfigured to
connect to the new database path.

Inform all users to save their work and log out of Online Filing before you start the
database migration.
 Under Database Migration, select the appropriate option:
– Leave the copy of the database in the former location after successful migration
(default)
– Delete the copy of the database in the former location after successful migration
 It is recommended to leave the copy of the database in the former location until you
are sure that everything works correctly in the new location.
Figure 542: Options for migrating the OLF database
Both the production database and demo database can be migrated independently.
Page 427 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
13 Server Manager
 Click the folder icon next to the database path you wish to modify.
 Select an existing folder in your file system or create a new one.
 Click OK.
Figure 543: Selecting a new location for the OLF database
 Wait until the Information window appears.
If the database is very large, the process of copying and verifying the database could take
some time.
The new path is displayed in the message.
Figure 544: Confirmation of successful database migration
Page 428 of 436
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
14
Glossary
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information
Interchange.
May contain letters, numbers, spaces and
punctuation, but no formatting. Also called
a text file.
CD-ROM
A CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read-Only
Memory) is a CD with permanently stored
data. A CD-RW, in contrast, is rewritable
(RW), meaning it permits the deletion of
data on the CD.
Check digit
A check digit contains an algorithm that
verifies the other numbers entered and
helps reduce typing errors.
CORBA
Common Object Request Broker
Architecture: defines cross-platform
protocols and services, eases
development of distributed applications in
heterogeneous environments.
CSV
Character separated values.
A file format typically used for data sets
where the data is arranged in columns and
rows. The individual data fields are
separated from each other by delimiters
such as commas.
Default
An automatic selection made by the
system when the user does not specify an
alternative.
Page 429 of 436
14 Glossary
Delimiter
A special character that sets off, or
separates, individual items in a set of data.
Commas and semi-colons are examples of
delimiters commonly used.
Dock
To move a toolbar or window to the edge of
an application window so that it attaches
and becomes a feature of the application
window.
DVD-ROM
A DVD (Digital Video Disc) is an optical
data storage unit like a CD but with
significantly more capacity (approx. 4 GB).
It is therefore used primarily for the storage
of video films. DVD-ROMs (Read-Only
Memory) are generally used to save data.
An appropriate DVD burner is needed to
write data to a DVD.
Field
A space in an on-screen form where the
user can enter a specific item of
information, for example a name or a date.
Fields may have restrictions on the length
and type of data that may be entered, for
example text only, or numbers in a certain
format.
Firebird SQL database server
Firebird is a simplified Open Source
spin-off of the InterBase relational
database management system produced
by Borland.
GUI
Graphical User Interface: software
component allowing user interaction with
graphical elements in the program via a
mouse and keyboard.
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
HTTP
HyperText Transfer Protocol: method of
transferring information on the WWW,
usually in HTML.
HTTPS
HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure:
indicates that HTTP is used with a different
port (443) and an additional
encryption/authentication layer between
HTTP and TCP.
Icon
A small image displayed on the screen that
allows the user to control certain computer
actions without having to remember
commands or type them on the keyboard.
IIOP
Internet Inter ORB Protocol: defined in
CORBA, used to execute remote
procedure calls.
LAN
Local Area Network: typically within one
building of a company.
Non-repudiation
To protect and ensure trust in digital
signatures, the parties may employ
non-repudiation, which not only validates
the sender, but also time-stamps the
transaction, so it cannot be claimed
subsequently that the transaction was not
authorised or was not valid.
ORB
Object Request Broker: agent enabling
communication between objects within a
distributed system, for example the
internet.
Page 430 of 436
14 Glossary
Patch
A new feature or function added to a
program, commonly used as an interim
measure before release of a full version of
the software.
PDF
Portable Document Format. A file format
used in saving documents. It can be read
using free PDF Reader software.
PIN
Personal Identification Number: a numeric
password shared between a user and a
system, used to authenticate the user to
the system.
PMS
Patent Management System.
Port
A port is part of a network address for a
server application running on a computer
within the network. Typical ports are 80 for
HTTP Web servers and 110 for POP3 mail
servers.
Proxy server
A firewall component that manages
internet traffic to and from a network.
SOAP
Simple Object Access Protocol: using XML
for data display and mainly HTTP for
transmission.
SQL
Simple Query Language. Used to query
and modify databases.
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
SSL
Secure Socket Layer. A protocol for
ensuring security and privacy in internet
communications. Supports authentication
of client, server, or both, as well as
encryption during a communication
session.
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol.
Used to manage data exchange between
computers via network connections.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format.
A standard file format commonly used for
scanning and storing grey-scale images.
TIF files may be used for scanned
signatures.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator.
An address for a resource on the internet.
Used by Web browsers to locate internet
resources.
WAN
Wide Area Network: normally across
several offices/subsidiaries of a large
company or organisation, including internet
connection parts in between.
Workflow
The tracking and management of all
activities from start to finish.
XML
eXtensible Markup Language. XML is a
document-processing standard officially
recommended by the World Wide Web
Consortium and widely accepted
throughout the internet community. It
provides a way to define and manage
Page 431 of 436
14 Glossary
information. It can be used to check the
accuracy and quality of documents.
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
15
Index
A
Abstract • 149, 153, 154, 187,
189, 215, 319, 321
Accelerated processing • 251
Accelerated search • 215, 224
Accession number • 146, 185,
304
Accompanying items • 315, 326
Account holder • 166, 204, 227,
264, 335, 371
Account number • 166, 204,
227, 264, 335, 371
Acknowledgement • 107, 215,
256, 344
Activate • 16, 400
Additional opponents • 245, 268
Address book • 45, 49, 51, 53,
54, 128, 178, 285, 299
Address for correspondence •
129, 178, 213, 245, 249, 285,
286, 382
Administration • 70, 72, 73, 76,
78, 398, 418, 423
Adobe Acrobat • 90
Affidavit • 263
Agent • 48, 292, 295, 381
Agreement • 135, 308, 309
Alphabetical signatures • 95,
105, 295, 393
Amendments • 186, 187, 215,
359, 383, 386
Amicus curiae • 215
Amino acids • 159, 194, 304,
365
Amyuni PDF converter • 90
Annex C/ST.25 • 304, 315, 329
Annex F • 90, 97, 324
Annotations • 43, 172, 197, 209,
215, 236, 267, 338, 373, 396
APP file • 159, 194, 329, 365,
389
Appeal • 92, 211, 215, 225
Applicant • 48, 49, 129, 141,
178, 213, 286, 295, 308, 309,
310, 374, 379
Application • 26, 27, 28, 29, 30,
31
Application body • 317, 324
Application date • 177, 279
Page 432 of 436
15 Index
Application number • 107, 144,
175, 177, 210, 213, 237, 243,
352, 377
Application workflow • 38
Archiving • 109, 112, 404, 408
ARIPO • 286
ASCII file • 159, 194, 222, 315,
329, 353, 365
Assignment • 215, 308, 309,
353, 357, 359, 362
Association • 134
Attachments • 58, 60, 147, 186,
215, 255, 315, 353
Authentication • 14, 99, 105
Authorisation • 129, 134, 162,
178, 197, 215, 245, 256
Automatic debit order • 166,
204, 227, 264
Auxiliarily • 251
B
Backup • 403, 404
Bank account • 166, 204, 227,
264
Bank transfer • 166, 264, 335,
371
Batch send • 108
Biological material • 146, 185,
215, 304, 326
Biology • 146, 185, 304
Build number • 18
Button • 22, 38
C
Capacity • 290, 295, 349, 351
Card reader • 99, 102
Category (documents) • 187,
215, 222, 363
CD-ROM • 60, 69
Certificate • 99, 103
Certified copy • 124, 301
Changing status • 38, 39, 41,
92, 106
Citations by third party • 215,
256
Claims • 124, 149, 153, 154,
187, 189, 215, 244, 256, 319,
321, 383
Clean copy • 215
Client • 14
Common Representative • 285,
286
Company • 47, 99, 129, 178,
213, 245, 286, 292
Computer readable file • 159,
194, 389
Confirmation • 58
Connections • 400, 412, 413,
417
Consent • 308, 309
Contents • 315
Continuation • 282
Contracting states to the EPC •
120, 141, 183, 239
Conversion • 90, 158, 200
Copies of search report • 166,
204
Copying • 27, 33, 276
CORBA • 14, 400
Corrected demand • 359
Corrections • 353
Correspondence address • 382
Country • 141, 418
Court order • 308, 309
CSV file • 53, 54
Currency • 165, 203, 227, 264,
333
Current account • 166, 204,
227, 264, 335
Customer number • 27
D
Data backup • 112, 404
Database • 28, 109, 112, 403,
425
Deactivate • 16, 400
Debiting • 165, 166, 203, 204,
227, 264
Deceased inventor • 135, 290
Declaration • 306
Declaration sheet • 306, 313
Defects • 353
Deferred execution date • 166,
204, 227, 264
Delete application • 24, 30, 112,
408
Deleting • 24, 30, 47, 112, 408
Demand for international
preliminary examination •
376
Demo mode • 12, 57, 404
Deposit account • 166, 204,
227, 264, 371, 393
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Depositary institution • 146,
185, 304
Description (patent) • 149, 153,
154, 159, 189, 194, 215, 256,
319, 321, 383
Designated office • 175
Designated states • 140, 183,
234, 282, 286, 342
Designation • 141, 165, 183,
227, 234, 342
Designation fee • 141, 183, 234
Designation of inventor • 135,
215, 307, 342
Diagnostic file • 18
Digital library • 301
Directories • 57, 416
Disable • 73
Disclosure • 312
Divisional application • 123, 141
Documents • 90, 147, 154, 158,
186, 200, 215, 255, 315, 353
Download • 17, 421
Draft • 27, 28, 36, 38, 39, 115,
276, 411
Drawing • 90, 149, 154, 164,
187, 189, 215, 263, 319, 324,
383
E
Earlier application • 123, 124,
144, 162, 301
Earlier search • 353, 357, 359,
362
Editor • 53, 54
Elected office • 175
Employee • 129, 178, 213, 245
Employee, authorised
representative • 97, 99, 129,
178, 213, 245
Employer • 135, 308, 309
Encryption • 60, 99, 417
Entitlement • 129, 245, 308, 309
EP application number • 107,
144, 177, 213, 237, 243
EP Phase • 175
EP(1001E2K) • 118
EP(1038E) • 211
EP(Oppo) • 239
EPC • 140, 175, 183
EPO customer services • 10, 18
EPO online services • 10, 165,
203, 227
Page 433 of 436
15 Index
Error • 41
Eurasian patent • 286
Euro-PCT(1200E2K) • 173
Evidence • 215, 239, 261, 263
Examination • 376, 383, 386
Examination procedure • 215
Examination report • 187, 197,
215
Excel • 53, 54
EXE file • 423
Exempted offices • 124, 144
Exporting • 53, 109, 110, 113,
114, 347, 408, 415, 425
Extension of time limit • 215,
251, 353, 357, 359, 362
Extension states • 143, 183
F
Facts and arguments • 256, 258
Fee calculation sheet • 326, 333
Fee reduction • 86, 120, 168,
175, 206, 227, 230, 333
Fee reform • 86, 234
Fee schedule • 86, 168, 206,
227, 230, 333, 368
Fee sheet • 333, 395
Fees • 37, 86, 165, 203, 227,
264, 333
Field names • 53, 54
Figure • 149, 153, 154, 319, 324
File Manager • 20, 109, 411
File type • 90, 147, 153, 159,
194, 215, 315
Files • 90
Filing date • 352, 377
Filing fee • 118, 168, 173
Filing office • 48, 88, 90, 103,
120, 124, 175, 279, 351
Filtering • 20, 26, 168, 206, 230,
408
First communication • 239, 245
Folders • 24, 27, 30, 33, 60, 83,
114, 416
Forms • 24, 27, 109, 110, 118,
173, 211, 239, 349, 376, 413
G
General authorisation • 129,
134, 178, 197, 256
Generation • 123
Grant • 282
Graphical User Interface (GUI) •
27, 57, 398
Grounds for opposition • 244
Groups • 70, 72, 76, 83
H
Hearing • 251
Help • 10, 18, 22
Highlighting • 187, 197, 215
History • 415
I
Identity of the inventor • 307
Images • 90, 97, 158
Importing • 54, 115, 116, 117,
347, 411, 425
Incorporation by reference • 353
Info Pane • 20, 31, 41, 72, 107
Inspection of the file • 215
Installation • 14, 16, 17, 423
Interface • 67
Internal notes • 43, 172, 209,
236, 267, 338
International application • 124,
173, 177, 186, 187, 189, 194,
317, 352, 377
International Bureau • 103, 301
International priority • 144, 301
International search • 329
Interpreter • 251
Interveners • 239, 245, 249, 256
Intervention • 239, 242
Inventor • 135, 286, 290, 307,
308, 309, 310, 342
Inventor waiver • 135, 215
IP address • 14, 412, 417
IPEA • 177, 186, 351, 359, 376,
377
IPER • 197, 215
ISA • 177, 204, 279, 351, 357
J
JPG • 90, 97, 158
K
Keyboard • 11
L
Lack of novelty • 244, 312
Lack of unity of invention • 357,
359, 362, 369
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
Language • 27, 57, 120, 129,
147, 154, 175, 177, 251, 279,
319, 321, 324, 363, 365, 383
Late payment fee • 369, 371
Later filed documents • 353,
365
Legal person • 45, 47, 49, 51,
54, 129, 286, 292, 379, 381
Legal remedies • 215
Limitation • 215
Live Update • 17, 418
Location indicator • 20, 118,
173, 211, 239, 349
Log file • 415
M
Maintenance • 88, 418, 423
Maintenance tables • 88, 423
Mandatory data • 38, 41
Mandatory field • 118, 173, 211,
239, 349, 376
Mapping profiles • 83
Medical certificate • 215, 224
Menu • 20, 22
Menu bar • 20, 118, 173, 211,
239, 272, 349, 376
Message • 41
Microsoft Excel • 53, 54
Microsoft Word • 90
Migration • 425, 427
Missing parts • 353
Modify application • 27, 39
Move application • 24, 30
Moving • 24, 30
N
Names • 47, 49, 51, 128, 178,
213, 245, 285, 299, 353
National priority • 144, 301
National procedures • 16, 400,
418
Nationality • 120, 129, 175, 227
Natural person • 45, 47, 49, 51,
54, 129, 135, 286, 292, 379,
381
Navigation bar • 20, 118, 173,
211, 239, 272, 349, 376
Network • 14, 60, 398, 400, 417
Non-patent literature • 215
Non-patentability • 244
Non-public • 215, 224, 260
Non-repudiation • 105, 108
Page 434 of 436
15 Index
Non-scannable object • 263
Note • 43, 172, 209, 236, 267,
373, 396
Notepad • 53, 54
Notice of appeal • 215
Notice of intervention • 242, 256
Notice of opposition • 242, 256
Nucleotides • 159, 194, 304,
365, 389
Number of pages • 189, 315,
324
O
OAPI • 282, 286
Observations • 256, 268, 359
Online Fee Payment • 165, 203,
227, 264
Online help • 18, 22
Opponents • 239, 245, 249, 256
Opposition • 242, 245
Opposition fee • 264
Oral proceedings • 215, 242,
251
Original document • 90, 154,
158, 200, 263
Other action • 242, 249, 256
P
PACE programme • 144
Package • 347
Page orientation • 90
Paper size • 90
Parent application • 282
Party • 245
Password • 60, 63, 67, 72, 73,
75, 417, 418
Password policy • 63, 72, 75
Patch • 418, 423
Patent number • 243
Patent of addition • 282
Patent Prosecution Highway •
215
PATENTSCOPE • 301
PatXML • 90, 153, 154, 317,
324
Payments • 86, 165, 203, 227,
264, 335
PCT • 48, 90, 272, 282, 349,
376
PCT application number • 144,
177, 210
PCT/RO/101 • 272
PCT-DEMAND • 376
PCT-SFD • 349
PDF • 31, 90, 107, 149, 154,
159, 162, 187, 194, 197, 222,
317, 363
PDF viewer • 31, 92, 107, 164,
201, 226, 268, 295, 313, 338,
367, 391, 395
Persons • 45, 54
PIN code • 67, 99, 103, 105,
106, 108
Place of principal business •
120, 129, 175, 227
Plug-in • 16, 400, 418
PMS • 67
PMS gateway • 67
Port • 14, 60, 400, 418
Portable Document Format •
315
Power of attorney • 292, 295,
326, 353, 357, 359, 362, 388
PPH • 215
Pre-conversion archive • 90,
158, 200, 317, 332, 391
Preferences • 57, 61, 415
Preliminary international
examination • 383, 393
Preview • 31, 107, 164, 201,
226, 268, 295, 313, 338, 367
Printing • 31, 107, 164, 201
prior application • 310
Priority • 144, 197, 301
Priority claim • 144, 301, 309,
326
Priority documents • 124, 162,
186, 187, 197, 215, 256, 353
Private remark • 338
Privileges • 70, 78, 83
Procedural language • 27, 33,
57, 120, 147, 154, 164
Procedure • 16, 27, 33, 48
Proceedings • 242, 251
Proceedings before the EPO •
186
Production mode • 12, 57, 398,
404
Profiles • 70, 78, 83
Proprietor of the patent • 239,
249, 256
Protest fee • 369
Proxy server • 60, 417, 418
Publications • 261
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
R
Ready to send status • 38, 106,
346
Ready to sign status • 38, 58,
92, 344
Receipt • 107, 215, 256, 344
Receiving office • 48, 88, 90,
103, 120, 124, 175, 279, 351,
353
Rectification • 353, 357, 359
Re-establishment of rights •
124, 144, 215, 256, 369
Reference • 124
Refunds • 166, 204, 227, 264
Regional phase • 175, 227, 234
Regional priority • 144, 301
Registration number • 48, 54
Remark • 338
Rename application • 29
Renaming • 24, 29, 58, 72
Replies • 197, 215, 256, 353,
357, 359
Representative • 134, 178, 213,
245, 249, 285, 374, 381
Request • 120, 124, 175, 251,
279
Request for accelerated
processing • 251
Request for accelerated
search/examination • 215,
224
Request for clarification • 215
Request for examination • 120,
175, 215
Residence • 120, 129, 175, 227
Restoration of the right of
priority • 301, 326, 353
Restore • 407
Review procedure • 215
Revocation • 215, 251
Roles • 48
Route • 48
RSS feed • 17
Runtime variable • 66
S
Saving • 28, 31, 276
Search authority • 177
Search reports • 166, 197, 204,
215
Search results • 144, 162, 197,
215, 279
Page 435 of 436
15 Index
Second communication • 239,
245
Security • 75, 99
Sender • 374
Sending • 69, 106, 108, 346
Sent • 38, 107, 115
SEQ file • 159, 194, 222, 365,
389
Sequence listings • 124, 159,
194, 215, 304, 317, 329, 353,
357, 359, 362, 365, 389
Server • 14, 106, 398, 400, 418
Service • 399, 400
Session • 412, 413, 415
Shortcut menu • 22
Signatory • 295, 310
Signature • 58, 65, 92, 95, 97,
99, 103, 105, 295, 310, 335,
338, 374
Signature, digital • 92, 99, 103
Signature, facsimile • 97, 295
Signing • 58, 65, 92, 95, 97,
344, 353, 374
Single file • 149, 321
SISA • 351, 362
Smart card • 58, 65, 67, 92, 99,
102, 105, 106, 374
SOAP • 14, 400
Soft certificates • 58, 103
Sorting • 24, 301
Specific authorisation • 162,
197, 256
Specification • 149, 153, 154,
321
SSL • 60, 417
ST.25 (WIPO) • 90, 124, 159,
194, 304, 353, 365, 389
Statement • 326
Statement of grounds • 244,
251
States • 141, 143, 183, 227, 282
Status • 38, 39, 41
Status bar • 20, 51, 118, 173,
211, 239, 349, 376
Status selection bar • 20
Sub-folder • 24, 33, 83
Submission • 242, 268, 344
Subsequent filing • 210, 237
Subsequently filed documents •
215, 349, 353
Substitute sheets • 353
Sub-tab • 118, 173, 211, 239
Successor • 135, 290
Summons • 245
System settings • 61
T
Tab • 41, 118, 173, 211, 239,
272, 349, 376, 399
Technical documents • 149,
153, 154
Templates • 24, 27, 28, 33, 36,
37, 110, 276, 277
Test reports • 186
Thin client • 14
Third party • 249, 256
Third party observations • 215,
256
TIFF file • 90, 97, 153, 158, 315
Time limit for opposition • 243,
251
Title of invention • 31, 120, 243,
279, 352, 377
Toolbar • 20, 22, 118, 173, 211,
239, 272, 349, 376
Tool-tip • 38, 39, 41, 92, 106
Traffic lights • 272
Transfer of entitlement • 308,
309
Transfer of rights • 215, 256
Translations • 120, 147, 154,
162, 187, 197, 215, 256, 263,
326, 353, 359, 386
Transmission to EPO • 69, 106,
108
Trash • 24, 30
TXT file • 159, 194, 329, 365,
389
U
Unblock records • 413
Update • 17, 37, 418, 421
URL • 88
US priority documents • 162,
197, 215, 326
User • 12, 70, 72, 73, 75
User Account Control
(Windows) • 398
User administration • 62, 70,
398, 425
User authorisation • 12, 14, 70,
76, 78
User name • 12, 70, 72, 73, 75
User preferences • 57
EPO Online Filing 5.09 – User Guide
User reference • 27, 29, 36,
113, 114, 116, 117, 210, 237,
274, 344
User session • 400, 413, 415
User support • 10, 18
V
Validation • 41, 164, 201
Validation icons • 41, 118, 173,
211, 239, 272, 349, 376
Validation Log • 301, 338
Validation messages • 41, 57,
272, 301, 338
Validation states • 143, 183
Variable • 66
Version • 18
View • 20, 24, 31, 41
W
WAD • 347
Waiver for communication •
175, 215
Warning • 41
Window • 41, 43
Windows 10 • 398
Windows 7 • 398
Windows 8 • 398
WIPO • 90, 103, 173, 272
Withdrawals • 215, 251, 353,
359, 362
Witnesses • 239, 245, 249, 251
Workflow • 38, 39, 41, 92, 106,
343
Working directories • 60, 416
X
XML • 67, 90, 110, 113, 114,
116, 117, 153, 154, 317, 324
Z
ZIP file • 110, 113, 116, 158,
159, 194, 200, 332, 347, 391,
425
Page 436 of 436
15 Index
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement